Honda CR-V 2026 User Manual

2026

CR-V

Hybrid

Owner’s Manual

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s

systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related

to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is

designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator

and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the

circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data

are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and

crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash

investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,

and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the

vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that

have the special equipment, can read the information if they have

access to the vehicle or the EDR.

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by

anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the

vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record

information about powertrain performance. The data can be used

to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians

diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with

data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains

confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is

uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.

Vehicle Data Recordings

This vehicle records the following information as data when the

Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

) is operated.

●

Images of objects in front of the vehicle when the CMBS

is activated

●

Operational status of each function of the CMBS

●

Accelerator / brake pedal operation

●

Vehicle speed

●

Information such as distance and relative speed of the target

identified by the CMBS

activated

Honda may obtain and use the recorded data for the purpose of

technical diagnosis and research and development of Honda vehicles.

The CMBS

does not record images or audio inside the vehicle.

Special tools are required to review or remove data (including

images) recorded by CMBS

The CMBS

image recording function can be turned off so that no

images are recorded when CMBS

is activated.

Disclosure of data

Honda will not disclose or provide the acquired data to third-parties

with data recorded by CMBS

except in the following cases:

●

When the owner of the vehicle consents

●

When required by law, court order, or similar legally enforceable

request

●

When the data has been processed to de-identify/anonymize the

vehicles/users, such as when aggregate data is provided to

research institutions

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act

The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this

vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may

apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded

by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid

damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

Canadian models

NOTICE

System Updates Terms & Conditions

General

Your vehicle has an application that allows your 9" Color

Touchscreen with Google built-in to automatically search for

Honda software updates that are specific to your 9" Color

Touchscreen with Google built-in and its connected devices

(initially every one (1) week via Wi-Fi or every four (4) weeks via

Telematics Control Unit (TCU), queries may occur more or less

frequently due to internet outages, retries, direct user action, WAP

push from the server or a change in query policy on the Honda

servers). This application periodically transmits to our servers a

limited amount of vehicle and device information (Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN), the Model Type (MT) Identification

Number, Hardware and Software Part Number, Serial Number,

Software Version, preferred language, Internet Protocol (IP)

address, Transaction Log (alert or update viewing, update

download and installation, software status), etc.). When the

application finds an update from the server, the application initially

asks permission to download and install the update. Where

available, in your settings menu you may elect to automatically

download and install these updates or you may elect to manually

update the system.

When your 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in searches our

servers for updates or alerts, we will automatically provide you with

the opportunity to update your devices or transmit the update or

alert directly to your 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in.

We will also maintain on our servers a log of the updates or alerts

that are installed.

Your Personal Data

Should the aforementioned information transmitted to Honda

constitute personal information in your region, please note that this

information will be treated in strict accordance with the rules and

regulations outlined in this notice as well as applicable data

protection law.

The terms of our privacy notice are incorporated into these terms by

reference and your use of system updates will be subject to the

privacy notice. Our privacy notice sets out information about how we

and any named third parties will process any personal data we collect

from you or that you provide to us, via the application.

For further details, see Honda's vehicle data privacy notice at:

Honda collects, uses and stores your personal data for the reasons set out below:

●

to deliver the system updates and related services to you;

●

to allow us to improve and optimize the system updates

products and services;

●

to respond to user questions and complaints; and for internal

record keeping.

●

where necessary for Honda's legitimate interests, as listed below, and

where our interests are not overridden by your data protection rights.

●

as otherwise described in Honda's Privacy Notice and Vehicle Data Privacy Notice.

Protecting our legitimate business interests and legal rights

includes, but is not limited to, use in connection with compliance,

regulatory, auditing, legal claims (including disclosure of such

information in connection with legal process or litigation) and other

ethics and compliance reporting requirements.

Honda will also convert personal data into anonymous data and

use it (normally on an aggregated statistical basis) for uses such as

market research and analysis, to improve the system updates, to

analyze trends, and to assess the success of software update

releases. Aggregated personal information does not personally

identify you or any other use of the system updates.

Honda may share this data with Honda's worldwide support

organization or affiliated Honda companies or other third parties

engaged by Honda for the purposes of rendering support services

in connection with system support.

U.S.: https://www.honda.com/privacy/connected-product-privacy-

notice

Canada: https://www.honda.ca/privacy/vehicledata (English)

https://www.honda.ca/confidentialite/

politiquedeconfidentialité (French)

* Not available on all models

Software End User License Agreement

Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by

the End User License Agreement in Owner’s Manual, and which

contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User

License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your

use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services,

functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of

the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and

conditions of the End User License Agreement.

You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software

by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda

Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Service Mail Stop

CHI-5, 1919 Torrance Blvd., Torrance, CA 90501-2746.

Privacy Notice

This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage

this setting, visit at:

To learn more about how we collect and use Personal

Information including precise geolocation data, please

read our Privacy Notice and Vehicle Data Privacy

Notice, accessible at:

U.S.: https://mygarage.honda.com/s/vehicle-data-privacy-

settings?page=question

Canada: https://www.honda.ca/privacy/vehicledata (English)

https://www.honda.ca/fr/confidentialite/

politiquedeconfidentialité (French)

U.S.: https://www.honda.com/privacy/connected-

product-privacy-notice

Canada: https://www.honda.ca/privacy/vehicledata

(English)

https://www.honda.ca/fr/confidentialite/

politiquedeconfidentialité (French)

A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And

operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have

provided operating procedures and other information on labels and

in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that

could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the

hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You

must use your own good judgment.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,

including:

●

Safety Labels - on the vehicle.

●

Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and

one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.

These signal words mean:

●

Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.

●

Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.

●

Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information - please

read it carefully.

3DANGER

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if

you don't follow instructions.

3WARNING

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if

you don't follow instructions.

3CAUTION

You CAN be HURT if you don't follow

instructions.

Contents

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the

vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find

descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your

particular model.

The images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front

cover) that depict features, equipment, Audio/Information screen

details, and Meter screens are only examples and may not be

representative of your particular model.

This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and

Canada.

The information and specifications included in this publication were

in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.

reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications

or design at any time without notice and without incurring any

obligation.

2 Safe Driving P. 45

For Safe Driving P. 46 Seat Belts P. 51 Airbags P. 61

2 Instrument Panel P. 99

Indicators P. 100 Gauges and Driver Information Interface P. 120

2 Controls P. 181

Clock P. 182 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 184

Moonroof P. 218

Seats P. 239 Interior Convenience Items P. 250

2 Features P. 273

Audio System P. 274 9" Color Touchscreen P. 280

General Information on the Audio System P. 369

2 Driving P. 447

Before Driving P. 448 Towing a Trailer P. 453

Parking Your Vehicle P. 599 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 610

2 Maintenance P. 617

Before Performing Maintenance P. 618 Maintenance Minder

P. 621

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 648

Climate Control System Maintenance P. 664

2 Handling the Unexpected P. 673

Tools P. 674 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 675

Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 695 Overheating P. 696

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 712

2 Information P. 719

Specifications P. 720 Identification Numbers P. 722

Emissions Testing P. 727 Warranty Coverages P. 729

Contents

Post-Collision Braking System P. 81 Child Safety P. 82 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 95 Safety Labels P. 96

Tailgate P. 201 Security System P. 212 Windows P. 215

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 219 Mirrors P. 237

Climate Control System P. 267

9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in P. 304 Audio Error Messages P. 367

Customized Features P. 389, 396 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 417, 430

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 459 When Driving P. 461 Honda Sensing® P. 506 Braking P. 589

Refueling P. 612 Fuel Economy and CO

Emissions P. 615

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 631 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 644

Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 652 12-Volt Battery P. 661 Remote Transmitter Care P. 663

Cleaning P. 665 Accessories and Modifications P. 670

Handling of the Jack P. 688 Power System Won’t Start P. 689 If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead P. 693

Indicator Coming On/Blinking P. 698 Fuses P. 705 Emergency Towing P. 711

If You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 713 Refueling P. 714

Emergency Call (eCall) P. 715

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 723 Reporting Safety Defects P. 726

Authorized Manuals P. 732 Customer Service Information P. 733 Open Source License P. 734

Quick Reference Guide

P. 8

Safe Driving

P. 45

Instrument Panel

P. 99

Controls

P. 181

Features

P. 273

Driving

P. 447

Maintenance

P. 617

Handling the Unexpected

P. 673

Information

P. 719

Index

P. 736

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index

❚

Climate Control System (P267)

❚

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror

Button

(P233)

❚

Audio System (P274)

❚

System Indicators (P100)

❚

Gauges (P120)

❚

POWER Button (P219)

❚

Heated Windshield Button (P233)

Canadian models

❚

Power Tailgate Button

(P207)

❚

Hazard Warning Button

❚

Front Seat Heater Buttons (P264)

❚

Driver Information Interface (B-type Meter) (P151, 154)

❚

Driver Information Interface (A-type Meter) (P125)

9
Quick Reference Guide
❚
 Headlights/  Turn Signals (P221, 222)
❚
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with 
Low Speed Follow Buttons 
(P537)
❚
 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 
Button 
(P561)
❚
 Interval Button (P550)
❚
Steering Wheel Adjustments (P236)
❚
 Heated Steering Wheel
*
 (P263)
❚
 (Talk) Button
*
 (P299, 303, 325, 350, 351, 355, 356, 358)
❚
Audio Remote Controls (P277)
❚
 (Home) Button
*
 (P125)
❚
Horn (Press the area around  .)
❚
Left Selector Wheel (P278)
❚
 Wipers/Washers (P230)
❚
Paddle Selector (Shift Up) (P472)
❚
Paddle Selector (Shift Down) (P472)
❚
Right Selector Wheel
*
 (P155)
* Not available on all models

Visual Index
10
Quick Reference Guide
❚
Door Mirror Controls (P238)
❚
Hood Release Handle (P632)
❚
Driver’s Front Airbag (P64)
❚
Rearview Mirror (P237)
❚
Knee Airbags (P69)
❚
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator 
(P78)
❚
Interior Fuse Box (P707)
❚
Passenger’s Front Airbag (P64)
❚
Knee Airbags (P69)
❚
Wireless Charger (P259)
❚
USB Ports (P275)
❚
Drive Mode Switch (P476, 480)
❚
Automatic Brake Hold Button (P594)
❚
Electric Parking Brake Switch (P589)
❚
 (Hill Descent Control) Button (P487)
❚
Power Window Switches (P216)
❚
Master Door Lock Switch (P199)
❚
Glove Box (P252)
❚
Accessory Power Socket (P258)
❚
Shift Lever (P470)
❚
SET Button
*
 (P235)
❚
Memory Buttons
*
 (P235)

Quick Reference Guide

❚

Moonroof Switch (P218)

❚

Front Side Airbags (P72)

❚

Map Lights (P251)

❚

USB Ports (P275)

❚

Front Seat (P239)

❚

Sun Visors (P266)

❚

Vanity Mirrors

❚

Rear Seat Heater Buttons

(P265)

Canadian models

❚

Sunglasses Holder (P257)

❚

Center Console Box (P253)

❚

Rear Seats (P243)

❚

LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P87)

❚

Grab Handle

❚

Coat Hook (P256)

❚

Rear Side Airbags (P72)

❚

Seat Belts (P51)

❚

Side Curtain Airbags (P75)

❚

Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P58)

❚

Cargo Area Lights (P251)

❚

Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P89)

❚

Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P89)

❚

Accessory Power Socket (P258)

❚

Ceiling Light (P250)

* Not available on all models

Visual Index
12
Quick Reference Guide
❚
Windshield Wipers (P230, 648)
❚
How to Refuel (P613)
❚
High-Mount Brake Light (P647)
❚
Rear Wiper (P232, 650)
❚
Brake/Taillights (P645)
❚
Power Door Mirrors (P238)
❚
Maintenance Under the Hood (P631)
❚
Multi-View Rear Camera (P610)
❚
Front Turn Signal/Parking/Daytime Running Lights 
(P221, 644)
❚
Tires (P652, 675)
❚
Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P202)
❚
Side Turn Signal Lights (P221, 644)
❚
Headlights (P222, 644)
❚
Rear Turn Signal Lights (P645)
❚
Rear Side Marker Lights (P645)
❚
Front Side Marker Lights (P644)
❚
Tailgate Outer Handle (P208)
❚
Rear License Plate Light (P647)
❚
Door Lock/Unlock Control (P187)
❚
Taillights (P647)
❚
Back-Up Lights (P647)

Quick Reference Guide

SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent Multi-Mode

Drive)

Your SPORT HYBRID i-MMD vehicle uses both an electric motor and a gasoline engine as propulsion sources, with the electric motor

receiving electricity from an internal High Voltage battery and/or internal generator. The High Voltage battery is charged from the

generator driven by the engine or regenerative braking.

When driving, your vehicle is propelled exclusively by the electric motor, exclusively by the gasoline engine, or by a combination of the two.

The system selects which propulsion source is most appropriate and automatically switches to it.

●

Energy efficiency

As with a gasoline-powered vehicle, hybrid vehicle fuel efficiency and driving range is most impacted by your driving style. Aggressive

acceleration and high-speed driving can easily trigger the system to switch the propulsion source to the gasoline-powered engine.

In addition, heavy climate control system use negatively affects vehicle range and efficiency. Either of these use patterns will more quickly

reduce the High Voltage battery's state of charge.

●

Battery types

There are two types of batteries used in this vehicle; a standard 12-volt battery that powers the airbags, the interior and exterior lights, and

other standard 12-volt systems; and a high voltage battery that is used to power the propulsion motor and recharge the 12-volt battery.

Quick Reference Guide

SPORT HYBRID i-MMD SYSTEM MAIN COMPONENTS

Gasoline Engine– Runs the generator and under certain

conditions, drives the wheels directly.

Generator– Starts the engine and generates electric power

when driven by the gasoline engine to supply electricity to

power the electric motor and/or to charge the High Voltage

battery.

Electric Motor– Provides propulsion to drive the wheels in

conjunction with the gasoline engine in certain conditions and

provides electricity to the High Voltage battery through

regenerative braking.

High Voltage Battery– Provides electrical storage and serves

as a power source for the electric motor.

Learning about the High Voltage battery’s characteristics will

help you get the best handling and maximize the range of your

electric vehicle. (P505)

●

Sounds Unique to the SPORT HYBRID i-MMD System

When you first start driving this vehicle, you will likely hear some unfamiliar sounds, particularly when you turn on the power system, or

while you are driving or accelerating from a stop. Some of these sounds are unique to this vehicle‘s powertrain, fuel, and climate control

systems; others are similar to sounds generated by conventional automobiles that typically are masked by louder noises absent from a

vehicle of this design. These sounds are not a cause for concern, and you will soon recognize them as normal and thus be able to detect any

new or unusual noise should one develop.

After shutting off the engine, you may hear certain noises coming from the vehicle. Here’s the lowdown:

●

Noise from Under Vehicle: This noise is caused by the vacuum pump inside the fuel evaporation leakage check module (ELCM).

Depending on conditions, the pump will come on for about 15 minutes about 5 to 10 hours after engine shutoff. This noise is just normal

vehicle operation and doesn’t indicate a vehicle problem.

High Voltage

Battery

Generator & Electric Motor

Gasoline Engine

Quick Reference Guide

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

Operating

mode

Electric Vehicle (EV) Hybrid (HV) Engine (Direct Drive) Regeneration

Driving state

Stopped or driven at low speeds:

●

Only the electric motor

provides propulsion to the

wheels.

Driven in high-load conditions

(e.g., when accelerating, going

uphill):

●

The Electric Motor provides

propulsion to the wheels.

●

The gasoline engine drives the

generator, supplying electricity

to the electric motor for added

propulsion or to the High

Voltage battery for charging.

Driven in high-speed, low-load

conditions:

●

The gasoline engine provides

propulsion to the wheels.

●

The High Voltage battery

supplies electricity to the

electric motor for added

propulsion.

●

The electric motor provides

electricity to the High Voltage

battery through regenerative

braking.

The accelerator pedal is released

and the vehicle is decelerating.

●

The electric motor provides

electricity to the High Voltage

battery through regenerative

braking.

Power Flow

Monitor

Electric motor

Stopped/Running Running Generating/Running Regenerating

Generator Stopped Generating No Output Stopped/No Output

Engine Stopped Running Running Stopped/No Output

High Voltage

battery

Discharge Charging/Discharge Charging/Discharge Charging

2WD models

Vehicle Speed

Time

Quick Reference Guide

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

Operating

mode

Electric Vehicle (EV) Hybrid (HV) Engine (Direct Drive) Regeneration

Driving state

Stopped or driven at low speeds:

●

Only the electric motor

provides propulsion to the

wheels.

Driven in high-load conditions

(e.g., when accelerating, going

uphill):

●

The Electric Motor provides

propulsion to the wheels.

●

The gasoline engine drives the

generator, supplying

electricity to the electric

motor for added propulsion

or to the High Voltage battery

for charging.

Driven in high-speed, low-load

conditions:

●

The gasoline engine provides

propulsion to the wheels.

●

The High Voltage battery

supplies electricity to the

electric motor for added

propulsion.

●

The electric motor provides

electricity to the High Voltage

battery through regenerative

braking.

The accelerator pedal is released

and the vehicle is decelerating.

●

The electric motor provides

electricity to the High Voltage

battery through regenerative

braking.

Power Flow

Monitor

Electric motor

Stopped/Running Running Generating/Running Regenerating

Generator Stopped Generating No Output Stopped/No Output

Engine Stopped Running Running Stopped/No Output

High Voltage

battery

Discharge Charging/Discharge Charging/Discharge Charging

AWD models

Vehicle Speed

Time

Quick Reference Guide

●

Regenerative Energy and Regenerative Braking

When decelerating without the accelerator being depressed or the brake pedal being applied, or

while driving downhill, the electric motor acts as a generator that recovers a portion of the

electrical energy that was used to accelerate the vehicle. This regenerative braking slows the

vehicle in a manner similar to engine braking in a gasoline-powered vehicle. You can control the

rate of deceleration by using the deceleration paddle selector.

●

Auto Engine Stop/Start

Your vehicle’s gasoline engine automatically stops running during vehicle operation or restarts while the vehicle is stationary when it is

appropriate.

In the following cases, however, auto engine stop may not activate.

• The vehicle momentarily needs additional power for aggressive acceleration, or driving uphill or at high speed.

• The climate control system is in heavy use.

• The High Voltage battery temperature is high or low.

• The High Voltage battery is too low on charge.

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

When regenerative braking is in

operation

Motor

High Voltage Battery

Quick Reference Guide

Safety Precautions

Do not touch the High Voltage system

Attempting to take a High Voltage system component apart or disconnect one of its wires

can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure that any maintenance or repairs to the High

Voltage system are performed by a Honda dealer.

If a crash occurs

●

Be careful of electric shock hazard.

uIf a severe crash damages your vehicle’s High Voltage system, there is a possibility of

electrical shock due to exposed High Voltage components or wires. If this happens, do not

touch any of the High Voltage system components or any of its orange wires.

●

Avoid contact with High Voltage battery fluid.

uThe High Voltage battery contains a flammable electrolyte that could leak as a result of

a severe crash. Avoid skin or eye contact with the electrolyte as it is corrosive. If you

accidentally come into contact with the electrolyte, rinse the exposed skin or flush your

eyes with copious amounts of water for at least five minutes, and seek medical attention

immediately.

●

Use a fire extinguisher for an electrical fire.

uAttempting to extinguish an electrical fire with even a small quantity of water, from a

garden hose for instance, can be dangerous.

●

Any time the vehicle is damaged in a crash, have it repaired by a dealer.

Do not cover the air intake.

If the air intake is obstructed

during vehicle operation, the High

Voltage battery can become too

hot. To protect the battery, the

system may start to limit the

battery’s output and cause the

power system and 12-volt battery

charging system indicators to come

on.

Air Intake

Quick Reference Guide

Emergency Shutdown System for the High Voltage System

If the vehicle is involved in a crash, the emergency shutdown system will activate depending on the severity of the impact. When the system

activates, the High Voltage system automatically shuts down, and the vehicle can no longer move under its own power. To return the High

Voltage system back to normal operation, consult a dealer.

Honda collects and recycles High Voltage batteries used in its vehicles – consult a dealer for more information.

Quick Reference Guide

Eco Assist® System (P 476, 480)

*1:Models with A-type meter

*2:Models with B-type meter

Ambient Meter

●

With SPORT mode off, the color of the ambient meter changes to green to indicate that the vehicle is being driven

in a fuel-efficient manner.

Drive Mode System

(P 476, 480)

Select the ECON mode to

help maximize fuel

economy.

ECON Mode Indicator (P 113)

Comes on when the ECON mode is

on or selected.

*1 *2

Ambient Meter

Quick Reference Guide

Safe Driving (P45)

Airbags (P61)

●

Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and

your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety (P82)

●

All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.

●

Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.

●

Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P95)

●

Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon

monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon

monoxide gas can accumulate.

Before Driving Checklist (P50)

●

Before driving, check that the front seats, head

restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been

properly adjusted.

Seat Belts (P51)

●

Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well

back in the seat.

●

Check that your passengers are wearing

their seat belts correctly.

Fasten your lap belt as

low as possible.

Quick Reference Guide

Instrument Panel (P99)

Indicators (P100)/Gauges (P120)/Driver Information Interface (P125, 151, 154)

POWER Gauge (P122)

CHARGE/DECEL Gauge (P122)

Speedometer (P120)

Traffic Sign Recognition System (P123)

Driver Information Interface (P125)

Fuel Gauge (P121)

Outside Temperature (P122)

Odometer (P121)

Shift Position Indicator (P106) /

Transmission System Indicator (P106)

Deceleration Paddle Selector Indicator (P106)

Models with A-type meter

Quick Reference Guide

Shift Position Indicator (P106) /

Transmission System Indicator (P106)

Deceleration Paddle Selector Indicator (P106)

Fuel Gauge (P121)

Driver Information Interface

(Right Side Area) (P154)

POWER Gauge (P122)

CHARGE/DECEL Gauge (P122)

Speedometer (P120)

Traffic Sign Recognition System (P123)

Odometer (P121)

High Voltage Battery Charge

Level Gauge (P121)

Driver Information Interface

(Left Side Area) (P151)

Outside Temperature (P122)

●

You can change the gauge design.

2 Change gauge design (P170)

Models with B-type meter

Quick Reference Guide

Controls (P 181)

Clock (P 182)

To adjust date

To adjust time

a Press the button.

b Select General Settings.

c Select System.

d Select Date & Time.

e Select Set Date & Time.

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

f Select Automatic Date & Time, then

select Off.

g Select Set Date or Set Time.

h Select or .

Select

Back

icon to set the date or

time.

The audio system receives signals from GPS

satellites, updating the clock automatically.

To adjust date

To adjust time

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

with Google built-in

a Press the button.

b Select General Settings.

c Select System.

d Select Date & Time.

e Select Set Date & Time.

f Select Automatic Date & Time, then

select Off.

g Select Set Date or Set Time.

h Select or .

i Press the button to set the date or

time.

The audio system receives signals from GPS

satellites, updating the clock automatically.

Quick Reference Guide

POWER Button (P219)

Press the button to change the vehicle’s

power mode.

Turn Signals (P221)

Lights (P222)

Turn Signal Control Lever

Right

Left

Light Control Switches

Low Beam

High Beam

Flashing

Wipers and Washers

(P230)

*1:Models with automatic intermittent

wipers

*2:Models with manual intermittent

operation

AUTO should always be turned OFF before

the following situations in order to prevent

severe damage to the wiper system:

●

Cleaning the windshield

●

Driving through a car wash

●

No rain present

Wiper/Washer Control Lever

Adjustment Ring

(-: Low sensitivity

: Lower speed, fewer sweeps

(+: High sensitivity

: Higher speed, more sweeps

MIST

OFF

AUTO

: Wiper speed varies automatically

INT

: Low speed with intermittent

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

Pull toward

you to spray

washer fluid.

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

* Not available on all models

Quick Reference Guide

Steering Wheel (P236)

●

To adjust, push the adjustment lever

down, adjust to the desired position, then

lock the lever back in place.

Unlocking the Front

Doors from the Inside

(P198)

●

Pull either front door inner handle to

unlock and open it at the same time.

To adjust

To lock

Tailgate (P201)

●

Press the tailgate outer handle to unlock

and open the tailgate when you carry the

keyless remote on you.

●

Press the tailgate outer handle to unlock

and open the tailgate when you carry the

keyless remote on you.

●

Press the power tailgate button on the

driver side control panel.

●

Press the power tailgate button on the

keyless remote.

Models without power tailgate

Models with power tailgate

Outer Handle

With the remote on you, raise and lower

your foot (in a kicking motion) under the

center of the rear bumper to open or close

the tailgate.

Models with hands free access

1 sec.

Quick Reference Guide

Power Door Mirrors

(P238)

●

With the power mode in ON, move the

selector switch to L or R.

●

Push the appropriate edge of the

adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.

Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

Power Windows (P216)

●

With the power mode in ON, open and

close the power windows.

●

If the power window lock button is in the

off position, each passenger's window

can be opened and closed with its own

switch.

●

If the power window lock button is in the

ON position (indicator on), each

passenger's window switch is disabled.

Power Window Lock Button

Window

Switch

Indicator

Quick Reference Guide

Climate Control System (P267)

●

Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.

●

Press the button to turn the system on or off.

●

Press the button to defrost the windshield.

Fan Control Dial

(Windshield Defroster) Button

Driver’s Side Temperature

Control Dial

(Recirculation) Button

(ON/OFF) Button

AUTO Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Dashboard

vent

Dashboard

and floor

vents

Floor vents Floor and

defroster

vents

Passenger’s Side Temperature

Control D

ial

SYNC Button

Quick Reference Guide

Features (P273)

Audio Remote Controls

(P 277)

Left Selector Wheel

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

VOL(+/VOL( - (Volume) Switch

Models with A-type meter

(Home) Button

Left Selector Wheel

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

VOL(+/VOL(-

(Volume) Switch

Models with B-type meter

●

VOL(+ / VOL(- (Volume) Switch

Press to adjust the volume up/down.

●

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Radio:

Press / to change the preset

radio station. Press and hold /

to change the strong station.

When listening to the wired connection,

USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio, or

Smartphone Connection:

Press / to skip to the

beginning of the next song or return to

the beginning of the current song.

USB flash drive:

Press and hold / to change a

folder.

●

Left Selector Wheel

When selecting the audio mode

Press the (Home) button, then roll up

or down to select Audio on the driver

information interface, and then press the

left selector wheel.

Roll up or down:

To cycle through the audio modes, roll up

or down and then press the left selector

wheel:

FM/AM/iPod/USB/Bluetooth/Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto

u Depending on a connected device, the

displayed modes may be changed.

Models with A-type meter

●

Left Selector Wheel

Roll up or down:

To cycle through the audio modes, roll up

or down and then press the left selector

wheel:

Back/Phone/FM/AM/USB/Bluetooth/Apple

CarPlay/Android Auto/Alexa

/Customize

display

u Depending on a connected device, the

displayed modes may be changed.

Models with B-type meter

* Not available on all models

Quick Reference Guide

Audio system (P 274)

VOL/ AUDIO

(Volume/Power) Knob

(Home) Button

(Connect) Button

Audio/Information Screen

(P 280)

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Quick Reference Guide

VOL/ AUDIO

(Volume/Power) Knob

(Home) Button

(Back) Button

Audio/Information Screen

(Seek/Track) Button

(P 304)

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Quick Reference Guide

About System Updates

When a software update is available for your vehicle, a notification will be displayed on the audio/information screen.

Instructions for performing updates via the audio/information screen are included in this manual.

For details on other methods of performing an update, please refer to the HondaLink manual, or ask a dealer.

System updates that change specifications may result in some discrepancies with the information in this owner’s manual.

■

Instructions

2 System Updates (P320)

Quick Reference Guide

Driving (P447)

Transmission (P469)

●

Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when turning on the power.

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift

lever release button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever

release button.

Press the shift lever release button and

shift.

Park

Used when parking or turning the power

on or off.

Reverse

Used when reversing.

Neutral

Transmission is not locked.

Drive

Used for normal driving.

●

The deceleration paddle selector can be used

temporarily.

●

The deceleration paddle selector can be used when

SPORT mode is on.

Drive (B)

●

Used when driving down a long hill and to increase

regenerative braking.

●

The deceleration paddle selector can be used.

Release Button

Shift Lever

Shift selection

READY Indicator

On: You can start to drive.

Shift Position Indicator

The shift position indicator and

the shift button indicator

indicate the current shift

selection.

* Not available on all models

Quick Reference Guide

Deceleration Paddle Selector (P472)

When you release the accelerator pedal, you can control the rate of deceleration without

releasing your hands from the steering wheel. Using the deceleration paddle selector situated on

the steering wheel, you can sequentially shift through four stages of deceleration.

●

When shift position is in ( D

If you pull back the paddle selector, the rate of deceleration will change temporarily, and the

stage will appear on the gauge.

●

When shift position is in ( D and SPORT mode is ON or when shift position is in

If you pull back the paddle selector, the rate of deceleration will change and the stage along

with M will appear on the gauge.

(- Paddle

Selector

(+ Paddle

Selector

Deceleration stage

When shift position is

(D, the deceleration

stage appears.

When shift position is in

(D and

SPORT mode is ON or when shift

position is in , the deceleration

stage and M appear.

Quick Reference Guide

CMBS

On and Off

(P513)

●

When a possible frontal collision is likely

unavoidable, the CMBS

can reduce the

vehicle speed and the severity of the

collision.

●

The CMBS

is turned on every time you

turn the power system on.

●

To turn the CMBS

on or off, use the

safety support of the driver information

interface.

VSA® On and Off (P489)

●

The Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®)

system helps stabilize the vehicle during

cornering, and helps maintain traction

while accelerating on loose or slippery

road surfaces.

●

VSA® comes on automatically every time

you turn the power system on.

●

The VSA® function can be partially

disabled or fully restored in VSA® settings

using the driver information interface.

2 VSA Mode (P139)

2 Vehicle Stability Assist Mode

(P168)

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS)

(P492)

●

Detects a change in tire conditions and

overall dimensions due to decrease in tire

pressures.

●

The TPMS is turned on automatically

every time you turn the power system on.

●

A calibration procedure must be

performed when certain conditions arise.

U.S. models

Quick Reference Guide

Refueling (P 612)

Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

Fuel tank capacity: 14 US gal (53 L)

a Unlock the driver’s door. (P197)

b Press and release the area indicated

by the arrow to release the fuel fill

door. You will hear a click and the

lid will open slightly.

c After filling, wait about five seconds

before removing the filler nozzle.

Wait for five seconds

Quick Reference Guide

Honda Sensing® (P 506)

Assists with functions such as acceleration,

braking, and steering in order to reduce the

burden on the driver, as well as help avoid

or reduce the severity of collisions.

Honda Sensing® has the following functions.

Collision Mitigation

Braking System

(CMBS

) (P 509)

The system can assist you when it

determines there is a possibility of your

vehicle colliding with a vehicle (including

motorcycles) ahead from behind, an

oncoming vehicle in front, a vehicle

approaching from the side, a pedestrian, or

someone riding a bicycle (moving bicycle).

The CMBS

is designed to alert you when

the potential for a collision is determined, as

well as assist in reducing speed, avoiding

collisions, and reducing collision severity.

Low Speed Braking

Control

(P 522)

Using sonar sensors located on the front and

rear bumpers, this system can detect if there

is danger of a potential collision with a wall

or other obstacle during normal driving or

when the accelerator pedal is depressed

with too much force. The system then assists

in avoiding collisions and reducing damage

from impact through assistive braking and/

or assistive driving power suppression.

Road Departure

Mitigation System

(P 528)

Alerts and helps assist you when the system

detects a possibility of your vehicle crossing

over detected lane markings, or

approaching the outer edge of the

pavement (into grass or gravel border) or a

detected oncoming vehicle.

Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) with Low Speed

(P536)

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and

a set following-interval behind a vehicle

detected ahead of yours and, if the detected

vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and

stop your vehicle, without you having to

keep your foot on the brake or the

accelerator.

Lane Keeping Assist

System (LKAS)

(P 558)

Provides steering input to help keep the

vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and

provides tactile and visual alerts if the

vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Traffic Jam Assist (P569)

The Traffic Jam Assist system uses a camera

mounted to the upper portion of the

windshield to detect and monitor left and

right white (or yellow) traffic lane lines.

Based on inputs from the camera, the

system can apply steering torque to keep

your vehicle in the center of the detected

lane.

* Not available on all models

Quick Reference Guide

Traffic Sign Recognition

System

(P578)

Reminds you of road sign information, such

as the current speed limit your vehicle has

just passed through, showing it on the

gauge.

Blind Spot Information

System

(P501)

When the system detects vehicles

approaching from behind in adjacent lanes,

the appropriate indicator comes on,

providing assistance when you change lanes.

Cross Traffic Monitor

(P606)

Monitors the rear corner areas using the

radar sensors when reversing, and alerts you

if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner

is detected.

The system is convenient when you are

backing out of a parking space.

Parking Sensor System

(P601)

The corner and center sensors monitor

obstacles around your vehicle, and the

beeper, driver information interface and

audio/information screen let you know the

approximate distance between your vehicle

and the obstacle.

Auto High-Beam (P227)

The front sensor camera detects the light

sources ahead of the vehicle such as the

lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or

street lights. When you are driving at night,

the system automatically switches the

headlights between low beam and high

beam depending on the situation.

Driver Attention Monitor

(P133, 162)

The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes

steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is

being driven in a manner consistent with

drowsy or inattentive driving. If it

determines that the vehicle is being driven

in such a manner, it will display the degree

of the driver’s attention on the driver

information interface.

Quick Reference Guide

Maintenance (P617)

Under the Hood (P631)

●

Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer

fluid. Add when necessary.

●

Check brake fluid and high voltage system coolant.

●

Check the 12-volt battery condition monthly.

Pull the hood release handle under the driver's side lower corner

of the dashboard.

b Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then

raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you

can release the lever.

c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly

locked in place.

Lights (P644)

●

Inspect all lights regularly.

Wiper Blades (P648)

●

When lifting the front wiper arms,

move them into the maintenance

position before lifting them.

●

Replace blades if they leave streaks

across the windshield or become noisy.

Tires (P652)

●

Inspect tires and wheels regularly.

●

Check tire pressures regularly.

●

Install snow tires for winter

driving.

* Not available on all models

Quick Reference Guide

Handling the Unexpected (P673)

Flat Tire (P675)

●

Park in a safe location and repair the flat

tire using the tire repair kit in the cargo

area.

Indicators Come On

(P698)

●

Identify the indicator and consult the

owner's manual.

Power System Won't

Start

(P689)

●

If the 12-volt battery is dead, jump start

using a booster battery.

Blown Fuse (P705)

●

Check for a blown fuse if an electrical

device does not operate.

Overheating (P696)

●

Park in a safe location. If you do not see

steam under the hood, open the hood,

and let the power system cool down.

Emergency Towing (P711)

●

Call a professional towing service if you

need to tow your vehicle.

Quick Reference Guide

What to Do If

The power mode does not

change from ACCESSORY

to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Why?

The shift lever should be moved to

(P.

Why does the brake pedal

pulsate slightly when

applying the brakes?

This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a

problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never

pump the brake pedal.

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P597)

The rear door cannot be

opened from inside the

vehicle. Why?

Check if the childproof lock is in

the lock position. If so, open the

rear door with the outside door

handle.

To cancel this function, slide the

lever up to the unlock position.

Quick Reference Guide

Why do the doors lock

after I unlocked the doors?

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are

relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper

sound when I open the

driver’s door?

The beeper sounds when:

●

The exterior lights are left on.

●

The power mode is in ACCESSORY.

Why does a beeper sound

when I walk away from the

vehicle after I close the

door?

The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto lock

operating range before the door completely closes.

2 Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®) (P190)

Why does the beeper

sound when I start driving?

The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are

not wearing their seat belts.

Pressing the electric

parking brake switch does

not release the parking

brake. Why?

Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal

depressed.

Quick Reference Guide

I'm seeing an amber

indicator of a tire with an

exclamation point. What is

that?

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If

you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate

the system.

2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P492)

Depressing the accelerator

pedal does not release the

parking brake

automatically. Why?

●

Fasten the driver’s seat belt.

●

Check if the transmission is in (P or (N. If so, select any other

position.

Why do I hear a screeching

sound when I apply the

brake pedal?

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle

inspected by a dealer.

U.S. models

This page intentionally left blank.

Safe Driving

You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving

Important Safety Precautions.............. 46

Important Handling Information......... 48

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 49

Safety Checklist ................................. 50

Seat Belts

About Your Seat Belts........................ 51

Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 56

Seat Belt Inspection............................ 60

Airbags

Airbag System Components............... 61

Types of Airbags ................................ 64

Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 64

Knee Airbags ..................................... 69

Side Airbags....................................... 72

Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 75

Airbag System Indicators.................... 77

Airbag Care ....................................... 80

Post-Collision Braking System

About the Post-Collision Braking System ... 81

Child Safety

Protecting Child Passengers ............... 82

Safety of Infants and Small Children.... 84

Safety of Larger Children ................... 93

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 95

Safety Labels

Label Locations .................................. 96

Safe Driving

For Safe Driving

The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them

properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the

most important.

Important Safety Precautions

■

Always wear your seat belt

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to

supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped

with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and

wear them properly.

■

Restrain all children

Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the

front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger

children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the

belt properly without a booster seat.

■

Be aware of airbag hazards

While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants

who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,

and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and

warnings in this manual.

■

Don’t drink and drive

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to

changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.

So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.

1Important Safety Precautions

Some states, provinces, and territories prohibit the

use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by

the driver while driving.

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

Safe Driving

■

Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely

Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying

close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.

Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to

divert some attention away from driving.

■

Control your speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher

the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.

Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum

speed posted.

■

Keep your vehicle in safe condition

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.

To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition

frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

■

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle

Children, pets, and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be

injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the

vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be

injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of

the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the

climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the

climate control system can shut off at any time.

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information

Safe Driving

Important Handling Information

Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use

only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway

driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also

provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher

off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tipping

or rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is

significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder,

make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.

1Important Handling Information

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover,

read:

2 Precautions While Driving P. 468

2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 459

Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result

in a crash or a rollover.

uuFor Safe Driving uYour Vehicle’s Safety Features

Safe Driving

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and

your passengers.

1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that

work together to help protect you and your

passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part.

These include a strong steel framework that forms a

safety cage around the passenger compartment,

front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering

column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat

belts in a sufficient crash.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full

advantage of these features unless you remain seated

in the correct position and always wear your seat

belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to

injuries if they are not used properly.

Safety Cage

Crush Zones

Seats and Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Collapsible Steering Column

Seat Belts

Front Airbags

Side Airbags

Seat Belt Tensioners

Knee Airbags

Door Locks

Side Curtain Airbags

Outer Lap Pretensioners

8 7

12109

uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist

Safe Driving

Safety Checklist

For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items

each time before you drive.

• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are

closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant

from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the

tailgate.

2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 197

• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are

adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the

vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a

crash.

2 Seats P. 239

• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective

when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller

persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.

2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraint Positions P. 247

• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any

passengers are properly belted as well.

2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 56

• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age,

height, and weight.

2 Child Safety P. 82

1Safety Checklist

If the door and/or tailgate open message appears on

the driver information interface, a door and/or the

tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and

the tailgate tightly until the message disappears.

Continued

Safe Driving

Seat Belts

About Your Seat Belts

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you

connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety

features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the

vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat

belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full

advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.

In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:

- frontal impacts

- side impacts

- rear impacts

- rollovers

■

Lap/shoulder seat belts

All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency

locking retractors. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely while keeping

some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor locks to

restrain your body.

The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with

child seats.

2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 89

1About Your Seat Belts

If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in

place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt,

then extend it slowly.

Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every

crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your

risk of serious injury.

Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories

require you to wear seat belts.

WARNING

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases

the chance of serious injury or death in a

crash, even though your vehicle has

airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always

wear seat belts and wear them properly.

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Safe Driving

■

Proper use of seat belts

Follow these guidelines for proper use:

• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position

for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the

belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or

behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.

• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very

seriously injured in a crash.

• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort

or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability

and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

1About Your Seat Belts

If a front or rear seat passenger moves around and

extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may

activate. If this happens, release the retractor by

unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract

completely. Then, refasten the belt.

Continued

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Safe Driving

■

Front seats

The seat belt system includes an indicator on

the instrument panel to remind the driver or a

front passenger or both to fasten their seat

belts.

If the power mode is set to ON and a seat belt

is not fastened, a beeper will sound and the

indicator will blink. After a few seconds, the

beeper will stop and the indicator will come

on and remain illuminated until the seat belt is

fastened.

The beeper will periodically sound and the

indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving

until the seat belt is fastened.

■

Seat Belt Reminder

1Seat Belt Reminder

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger

does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after

the power mode is set to ON.

When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,

the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not

sound.

The indicator also may not come on and the beeper

may not sound when the occupant is not heavy

enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants

(e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved

to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will

injure or kill them.

2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 82

The driver information interface uses colors to aid the

driver in checking the status of the passengers.

For the front seating positions:

• Green indicates the seat belt is fastened.

• An unfastened gray graphic indicates the seat belt

is not fastened and an occupant has not been

detected.

• An unfastened red graphic indicates the seat belt is

unfastened and an occupant has been detected.

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Safe Driving

■

Rear seats

Your vehicle monitors rear seat belt use.

A driver information interface notifies you if

any of the rear seat belts are unfastened after

they were previously fastened.

In order to encourage the driver to evaluate

rear seat belt usage, the display appears

when:

• Any of the rear passengers’ seat belts are

unfastened when the power mode is

turned to ON.

• A rear door is opened and then closed.

• Any of the rear passengers fastens or

unfastens their seat belt.

The seat belt reminder indicator blinks and

beeper sounds if any rear passenger’s seat belt

is unfastened while driving.

1Seat Belt Reminder

The system will not detect a passenger in the rear

seats who has not fastened the seat belt.

The driver should check the status of the rear

passengers’ seat belts at the start of each trip and

each time a passenger is seated in the rear seats,

using the driver information interface as an aid.

An alert will sound if a passenger in the rear seats

unfastens the seat belt while the vehicle is in motion

or if motion resumes while the graphic is red.

The driver information interface uses colors to aid the

driver in checking the status of the passengers.

For the rear seating positions:

• Green indicates the seat belt is fastened.

• An unfastened gray graphic indicates the seat belt

has not been fastened recently.

• An unfastened red graphic indicates the seat belt

was unfastened recently.

The system does not monitor harnesses that are part

of a child seat, nor the anchors of the LATCH system.

While the system can inform you that a seat belt is

fastened, it cannot determine whether a child seat is

properly installed or used.

2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 82

: fastened

: unfastened

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Safe Driving

The front seats and the outer rear seats are equipped with automatic seat belt

tensioners to enhance safety.

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts and the outer rear seat belts

during a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not

severe enough to inflate the front airbags or the front knee airbag.

■

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.

If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come

on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and

thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not

offer protection in a subsequent crash.

During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the

tensioners on both sides of the vehicle also activate.

Front seats

Outer rear seats

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Safe Driving

Fastening a Seat Belt

After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well

back in the seat:

2 Seats P. 239

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then

tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is

secure.

u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or

caught on anything.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat

belt or one that does not appear to be working

correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working

properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.

Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or

retractor mechanism.

If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully

retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt

once, then push it back in.

Then, smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten.

If you are unable to release the seat belt from a fully

retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in the

seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair.

2 About Your Seat Belts P. 51

2 Seat Belt Inspection P. 60

Pull out slowly.

Correct

Seated

Posture.

Latch

Plate

Buckle

Continued

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Safe Driving

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as

possible across your hips, then pull up on

the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part

fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic

bones take the force of a crash and reduces

the chance of internal injuries.

4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to

remove any slack, then check that the belt

rests across the center of your chest and

over your shoulder. This spreads the forces

of a crash over the strongest bones in your

upper body.

The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter

occupants.

1. Move the anchor up and down while

pulling the shoulder anchor outward.

2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests

across the center of your chest and over

your shoulder.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and

then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted

completely.

When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly

stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing

door.

WARNING

Improperly positioning the seat belts can

cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly

positioned before driving.

Lap belt

as low as

possible

■

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four

levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height

one level at a time.

After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder

anchor position is secure.

Pull

outward

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Safe Driving

1. Pull out the seat belt’s small latch plate and

the latch plate from each holding slot in the

ceiling.

2. Line up the triangle marks on the small

latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure

the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt

to the anchor buckle.

3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle.

Properly fasten the seat belt the same way

you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.

■

Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor

1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor

To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch

plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.

WARNING

Using the seat belt with the detachable

anchor unfastened increases the chance of

serious injury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt, make sure the

detachable anchor is correctly latched.

Latch Plate

Small Latch Plate

Latch Plate

Small Latch Plate

Anchor Buckle

Small Latch

Plate

Latch

Plate

Buckle

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Safe Driving

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when

driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the

belt as low as possible across the hips.

■

Advice for Pregnant Women

1Advice for Pregnant Women

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is

okay for you to drive.

To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your

unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front

airbag:

• When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far

back as possible while allowing full control of the

vehicle.

• When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust

the seat as far back as possible.

Wear the shoulder belt

across the chest avoiding

the abdomen.

Wear the lap part of the

belt as low as possible

across the hips.

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

Safe Driving

Seat Belt Inspection

Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.

• Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract

easily.

u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only

use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make

sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.

Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper

protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.

A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of

protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after

any collision.

1Seat Belt Inspection

WARNING

Not checking or maintaining seat belts can

result in serious injury or death if the seat

belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have

any problem corrected as soon as possible.

Continued

Safe Driving

Airbags

Airbag System Components

9 10

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

Safe Driving

The front, driver’s knee, front passenger’s

knee, side, and side curtain airbags are

deployed according to the direction and

severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags

are deployed in a rollover. The airbag

system includes:

a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored

in the center of the steering wheel; the

front passenger’s airbag is stored in the

dashboard. Both are marked SRS

AIRBAG.

b Two knee airbags. The driver’s knee

airbag is stored under the steering

column; the front passenger’s knee

airbag is stored under the glove box.

Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

c Four side airbags. One for the driver, one

for the front passenger, and two for the

rear outboard seating positions. The

airbags are stored in the outer edges of

the seat-backs. All are marked SIDE

AIRBAG.

d Two side curtain airbags, one for each

side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored

in the ceiling, above the side windows.

The front and rear pillars are marked

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

e An electronic control unit that, when the

power mode is in ON, continually

monitors information about the various

impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors,

rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat

belt tensioners, and other vehicle

information. During a crash event, the

unit can record such information.

f Automatic seat belt tensioners for the

front seats and outer rear seats. In

addition, the driver’s and front

passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate

sensors that detect whether or not the

belts are fastened.

g Driver’s seat position sensor. This sensor

detects the driver’s seat slide position to

help determine the optimal deployment

of the driver’s airbag.

h Weight sensors in the front passenger’s

seat. The sensors are used for occupant

classification to activate or deactivate the

front passenger’s airbag.

i Impact sensors that can detect a

moderate-to-severe front or side impact.

j An indicator on the console panel that

alerts you that the passenger’s airbag has

been turned off.

k An indicator on the instrument panel that

alerts you to a possible problem with your

airbag system or seat belt tensioners.

l A rollover sensor that can detect if your

vehicle is about to roll over and signal the

control unit to deploy both side curtain

airbags.

m Pressure sensors that can detect a

moderate-to-severe side impact.

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

Safe Driving

Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with

tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,

and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing

their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly and sit upright and as

far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the

vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as

possible.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that

can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags

deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp

object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front, driver's knee, and front

passenger's knee airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG

could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the

vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

■

Important Facts About Your Airbags

1Important Facts About Your Airbags

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,

airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

When driving, keep hands and arms out of the

deployment path of the front airbag by holding each

side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over

the airbag cover.

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags

Safe Driving

Types of Airbags

Your vehicle is equipped with four types of airbags:

• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.

• Knee airbags: Airbags under the steering column and under the glove box.

• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s, front passenger's, and rear outer

passenger's seat-backs.

• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.

Each is discussed in the following pages.

Front Airbags (SRS)

The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect

the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to

supplement seat belt not replace them. Seat belt is the occcupant primary restraint

system.

The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and

in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

■

Housing Locations

1Types of Airbags

The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is

in ON.

After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a

small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion

process of the inflator material and is not harmful.

People with respiratory problems may experience

some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of

the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

1Front Airbags (SRS)

During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or

both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate

at different rates, depending on the severity of the

crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/

or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to

supplement the seat belts to help reduce the

likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal

crashes.

Continued

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Safe Driving

Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.

When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control

unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a

vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

While your seat belt restrains your torso, the

front airbag provides supplemental protection

for your head and chest.

The front airbags deflate immediately so that

they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility

or the ability to steer or operate other

controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not

aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

■

Operation

■

How the Front Airbags Work

1How the Front Airbags Work

Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags

normally inflate within a split second of each other, it

is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can

happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,

or threshold that determines whether or not the

airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will

provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental

protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Safe Driving

■

When front airbags should not deploy

Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and

help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur

during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.

Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration

causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side

airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the

severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which

can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle.

Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear

impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed

to deploy in such collisions.

Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle

is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front

airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide

little, if any, protection.

■

When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage

Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the

vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.

Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object

that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is

underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.

■

When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage

appears severe

Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of

visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some

collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags

would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they

had deployed.

Continued

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Safe Driving

The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related

injuries to smaller occupants.

The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a

seat position sensor.

Based on information from this sensor and the

severity of the impact, the advanced airbag

system determines the optimal deployment of

the driver’s airbag.

The front passenger’s advanced airbag system

has weight sensors. The sensors are used for

occupant classification to activate or

deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.

For adult size occupants, the system will

automatically activate the front passenger’s

airbag. If a small adult sits in the front

passenger seat and the system does not

recognize him/her as an adult, see

2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 78

■

Advanced Airbags

1Advanced Airbags

If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position

sensor or the passenger’s seat weight sensors, the

SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a

crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver’s

seating position or passenger’s occupant

classification) with a force corresponding to the

severity of the impact.

2 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Indicator P. 77

For the advanced front airbags to work properly,

confirm that:

• The occupant is sitting in an upright position,

wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is

not excessively reclined.

• The occupant is not leaning against the door or

center console.

• The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front

of them.

• There are no objects hanging from the front

passenger’s seat.

• Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back

pocket.

• The steering wheel and passenger’s side dashboard

are not obstructed by any object.

• No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.

Driver’s

Seat

Position

Sensor

Passenger’s Seat

Weight Sensors

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Safe Driving

We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger’s

seat. However, if you do allow a small child or infant to ride in the front passenger’s

seat, the system is designed to automatically deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.

Do not let a small child or infant ride in the front passenger’s seat if the airbag does

not automatically deactivate.

1Advanced Airbags

• There is no child seat or other object pressing

against the rear of the seat or seat-back.

• There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger’s seat.

• There are no objects placed under or beside the

front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned

objects can interfere with the advanced airbag

sensors.

• The head restraint is not contacting the roof.

2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 78

• The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is

set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An

improperly placed mat can interfere with the

advanced airbag sensors.

2 Floor Mats P. 666

uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags

Continued

Safe Driving

Knee Airbags

The knee SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help keep

the driver and/or front passenger in the proper position and to help maximize the

benefit provided by the vehicle’s other safety features.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to

supplement seat belt not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary

restraint system.

The knee airbag for the driver and the one for

the front passenger are housed under the

steering column and the glove box

respectively.

Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

■

Housing Locations

1Knee Airbags

Do not attach accessories on or near a knee airbag as

they can interfere with the proper operation of the

airbag, or even hurt someone if the airbag inflates.

The driver and front passenger should not store any

items under the seat or behind their feet. The items

can interfere with proper airbag deployment in the

event of a moderate to severe frontal collision and

may result in inadequate protection.

Housing

Location

Housing

Location

uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags

Safe Driving

The driver’s and front passenger’s knee airbag

deploy at the same time as the driver’s and

front passenger’s airbag respectively.

Even if the collision is not severe enough to

deploy the front airbag, the knee airbag may

inflate alone.

■

Operation

When

inflated

Knee

Airbag

When

inflated

Knee Airbag

uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags

Safe Driving

■

When knee airbags deploy with little or no visible damage

Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the

vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.

Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed objects

that cause a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is

underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.

■

When knee airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage

appears severe

Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of

visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some

collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags

would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they

had deployed.

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Safe Driving

Side Airbags

The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver, front passenger, or

an outer rear seat occupant during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

The side airbags are housed in the outside

edge of the driver's, passenger's, and rear

outer passenger's seat-backs.

Each is marked SIDE AIRBAG.

■

Housing Locations

1Side Airbags

Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.

They can interfere with the proper operation of the

airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

Do not cover or replace the seat-back covers without

consulting a dealer.

Improperly replacing or covering seat-back covers can

prevent your side airbags from properly deploying

during a side impact.

Make sure you and your front seat and rear outboard

passengers always sit upright. Leaning into the path

of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from

deploying properly and increases the risk of serious

injury.

Side airbag deployment is controlled by a pressure

sensor inside each front door. Damage or changes to

the inside or outside of the doors may negatively

affect side airbag deployment. Contact an authorized

dealer before changing or repairing a front door.

Housing

Location

Housing

Location

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Continued

Safe Driving

When the sensors detect a moderate-to-

severe side impact, the control unit signals the

side airbag on the impact side to immediately

inflate.

■

Operation

When

inflated

Side

Airbag

Side

Airbag

When

inflated

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Safe Driving

■

When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage

Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side

of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there

may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough

impact to deploy the airbag.

■

When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears

severe

It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in

apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the

far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed

most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been

needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Continued

Safe Driving

Side Curtain Airbags

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the

outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain

airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of

partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes,

particularly rollover crashes.

The side curtain airbags are located in the

ceiling above the side windows on both sides

of the vehicle.

■

Housing Locations

1Side Curtain Airbags

To get the best protection from the side curtain

airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts

properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.

Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof

pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation

of the side curtain airbags.

If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the

passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there

are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is

about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side

curtain airbags and activates the seat belt tensioners

for the front seats and outer rear seats.

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Safe Driving

The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy

in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side

impact.

■

When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision

One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled

frontal collision.

■

Operation

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Continued

Safe Driving

Airbag System Indicators

If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a

message appears on the driver information interface.

■

When the power mode is set to ON

The indicator comes on for a few seconds,

then goes off. This tells you the system is

working properly.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the

system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat

belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

■

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

WARNING

Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in

serious injury or death if the airbag systems

or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as

soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts

you to a possible problem.

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Safe Driving

■

When the passenger airbag off

indicator comes on

The indicator comes on to alert you that the

passenger’s airbag has been turned off.

This occurs if the seat is empty or when the

weight sensors determine that a small child or

infant is on the passenger seat.

Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.

2 Child Safety P. 82

If the indicator is on, in the event of a crash the passenger’s airbag will not deploy.

The passenger's knee airbag will not deploy, either.

When you set the power mode to ON, the indicator comes on and goes off a few

seconds later to indicate that system checks are being performed. After that, the

indicator comes on or off depending on the passenger’s occupant classification.

■

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm

that:

• The occupant is sitting in an upright position,

wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is

not excessively reclined.

• The occupant is not leaning against the door or

center console.

• The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front

of them.

• There are no objects hanging from the front

passenger’s seat.

• Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back

pocket.

• No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.

• There is no child seat or other object pressing

against the rear of the seat or seat-back.

• There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger’s seat.

• There are no objects placed under or beside the

front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned

objects can interfere with the advanced airbag

sensors.

• The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is

set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An

improperly placed mat can interfere with the

advanced airbag sensors.

• The head restraint is not contacting the roof.

U.S. Canada

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Safe Driving

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and

go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is

near the airbag cutoff threshold. For a small adult,

depending on physique and posture, the system may

not recognize him/her as an adult and thus deactivate

the passenger’s airbag.

If this occurs, please confirm that the conditions set

forth in the above bullet points on the previous page

are met.

If the above conditions are met and the indicator is

still on, then with the transmission in

(P, set the

power mode to OFF and back to ON.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as

possible if:

• All of the above conditions are met, and the

indicator comes on with an adult seated in the

front passenger seat.

• The seat is empty and the indicator is off.

• The indicator does not come on and go off after

setting the power mode to ON as described.

Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front

seat when the indicator is on.

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Safe Driving

Airbag Care

You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any

airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle

inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

■

When the airbags have deployed

If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.

Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be

replaced.

■

When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision

Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s

seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, seat belt tensioners for

the front seats and outer rear seats, and each seat belt that was worn during the

crash.

■

Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer

This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position

sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or

modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda

dealer. For U.S. vehicles, contact American Honda Automobile Customer Service at

1-800-999-1009. For Canadian vehicles, contact Honda Canada Customer Relations

at 1-888-9-HONDA-9.

1Airbag Care

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag

system components, including the airbag, tensioners,

sensors, and control unit.

Safe Driving

Post-Collision Braking System

About the Post-Collision Braking System

When the airbag system is activated after a collision is detected, this system

simultaneously applies the brakes and limits propulsion to reduce damage from a

secondary collision.

The Post-Collision Braking System activates when the airbag system or automatic

seat belt tensioners activate due to a frontal collision or side impact.

However, it will not activate if components of the system are damaged.

After the Post-Collision Braking System is activated, the system will be canceled if

either of the following conditions is met.

• The vehicle is stopped.

• You depress the accelerator pedal after releasing it.

■

Conditions for activation

■

Conditions for cancellation

1Post-Collision Braking System

This system may not be able to reduce damage from

secondary collisions in all situations.

Its effectiveness depends on the circumstances of the

collision.

When a collision occurs, confirm your surroundings,

and carefully operate your vehicle as needed to park

in a safe place.

Safe Driving

Child Safety

Protecting Child Passengers

Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are

either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the

number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state and Canadian

province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when

they ride in a vehicle.

Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:

• An inflating front airbag can injure or kill a

child sitting in the front seat.

• A child in the front seat is more likely to

interfere with the driver’s ability to safely

control the vehicle.

• Statistics show that children of all sizes and

ages are safer when they are properly

restrained in a rear seat.

1Protecting Child Passengers

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

and Transport Canada recommend that all children

ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear

seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws

restricting where children may ride.

WARNING

Children who are unrestrained or

improperly restrained can be seriously

injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be

properly restrained in a child seat. A larger

child should be properly restrained with a

seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

Safe Driving

• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the

event of a collision.

• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would

likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.

• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very

seriously injured in a crash.

• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an

approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat

belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.

• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows, or seat adjustments.

• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when

the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate

vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.

1Protecting Child Passengers

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle

and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag

hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning

labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the

front visors. Please read and follow the instructions

on these labels.

2 Safety Labels P. 96

WARNING

Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or

wrap one around their neck can result in

serious injury or death.

Instruct children not to play with any seat

belt and make sure any unused seat belt a

child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,

and locked.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

Safety of Infants and Small Children

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat until the infant

reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat.

■

Positioning a rear-facing child seat

Child seats must be placed and secured in a

rear seating position.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front

passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back

in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat

and the seat in front of it.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag

system.

2 Airbags P. 61

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front

passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.

Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

■

Protecting Infants

1Protecting Infants

Experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a

child so long as the child’s height and weight are

appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

Infants should never be seated in a forward-facing

position.

Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions before installation.

Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat

installed in a rear seating position.

The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly

detect the actual weight of the occupant.

WARNING

Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front

seat can result in serious injury or death

during a crash.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the

rear seat, not the front.

Continued

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

If a child has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rear-facing child seat,

the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat

until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.

■

Forward-facing child seat placement

We strongly recommend placing a forward-

facing child seat in a rear seating position.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with

advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A

rear seat is the safest place for a child.

■

Protecting Smaller Children

1Protecting Smaller Children

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations

regarding child seat use where you are driving, and

follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the

front seat can result in serious injury or

death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child

seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far

back as possible, and properly restrain the

child.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children).

Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both

are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be

installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat

manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates

as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing

your child’s safety.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible

child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.

This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured

with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat

manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat

once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual

for proper installation instructions.

■

Important consideration when selecting a child seat

Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:

• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.

• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.

• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

■

Selecting a Child Seat

1Selecting a Child Seat

Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is

simple.

LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed

to simplify the installation process and reduce the

likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

Continued

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.

A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of

connectors.

1. Locate the lower anchors.

2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then

attach the child seat to the lower anchors

according to the instructions that came

with the child seat.

u When installing the child seat, make sure

that the lower anchors are not

obstructed by the seat belt or any other

object.

■

Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

For your child’s safety, when using a child seat

installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the

child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child

seat that is not properly secured will not adequately

protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the

child or other vehicle occupants.

WARNING

Never attach two child seats to the same

anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not

be strong enough to hold two child seat

attachments and may break, causing

serious injury or death.

Lower

Anchors

Rigid Type

Lower Anchors

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

3. Raise the head restraint to its highest

position, then route the tether strap

through the head restraint legs.

Make sure the strap is not twisted.

4. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.

5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the

child seat manufacturer.

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by

rocking it forward and back and side to

side; little movement should be felt.

7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child

can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor

is activated, and the belt is fully retracted

and locked.

Flexible Type

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the

rear center seat

Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower

anchors which are used to secure a LATCH-

compatible child seat. The rear center seat, however,

is not equipped with anchors of any kind.

The inner and outer anchors are spaced apart at a

standard distance of 11 inches (280 mm). The distance

between the two inner anchors is 17 inches (432.6 mm).

LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted

with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the

rear center seat. However, a system fitted with

flexible-type attachments can be installed in the

center seat, provided that the manufacturer’s

instructions for that system permit the use of the

inner anchors with the stated spacing.

Before seating a child, make sure that the system is

properly attached to both the lower anchors and

tether anchors.

WARNING

Using the outer rear seats’ inner anchors to

secure a LATCH-compatible child seat in the

center seating position may result in failure

of the child seat, causing injury or death.

Only use the outer rear seats’ inner anchors

to install a child seat in the center seating

position if the manufacturer’s instructions

expressly permit.

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Straight Top Tether Type

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Other Top Tether Type

Continued

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely

necessary, the front passenger seat.

1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.

2. Route the seat belt through the child seat

according to the seat manufacturer’s

instructions, and insert the latch plate into

the buckle.

u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all

the way out until it stops. This activates the

lockable retractor.

4. Let the seat belt retract a few inches and

check that the retractor has switched

modes by pulling on the webbing. It should

not pull out again until it is reset by

removing the latch plate from the buckle.

u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt

out, the lockable retractor is not

activated. Slowly pull the seat belt all the

way out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.

■

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

A child seat that is not properly secured will not

adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause

injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near

the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack

from the lap part of the belt.

u When doing this, place your weight on

the child seat and push it into the vehicle

seat.

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by

rocking it forward and back and side to

side; less than one inch of movement

should occur near the seat belt.

7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child

can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor

is activated, and the belt is fully retracted

and locked.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle

and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

Continued

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

A tether anchor point is provided behind the

rear outer seating positions and in the ceiling

for the rear center.

If you have a child seat that comes with a

tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the

tether may be used for additional security.

■

Using an outer anchor

1. Raise the head restraint to its highest

position, then route the tether strap

through the head restraint legs.

Make sure the strap is not twisted.

2. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.

3. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the

child seat manufacturer.

■

Adding Security with a Tether

1Adding Security with a Tether

Always use a tether for forward-facing child seats

whether using the seat belt or lower anchors.

Tether Anchor Points

Outer position

Tether

Anchor

Point

Center position

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Straight Top Tether Type

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

■

Using the center anchor

1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest

position.

2. Open the anchor cover.

3. Route the tether strap over the head

restraint.

Make sure the strap is not twisted.

4. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.

5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the

child seat manufacturer.

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Other Top Tether Type

Anchor

Anchor Cover

Straight Top Tether Type

Anchor

Anchor Cover

Other Top Tether Type

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Continued

Safe Driving

Safety of Larger Children

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind

of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who

must sit in front.

When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/

shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the

following questions.

■

Checklist

• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over

the edge of the seat?

• Does the shoulder belt cross between the

child’s neck and arm?

• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as

possible, touching the child’s thighs?

• Will the child be able to stay seated like this

for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder

seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a

booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

■

Protecting Larger Children

■

Checking Seat Belt Fit

1Safety of Larger Children

WARNING

Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in

front can result in injury or death if the

passenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front, move the

vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,

have the child sit up properly and wear the

seat belt properly, and use a booster seat if

needed.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safe Driving

If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used

properly, position the child in a booster seat in

the rear seat. For the child’s safety, check that

the child meets the booster seat

manufacturer’s recommendations.

Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever

have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:

• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information

in this manual.

• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.

• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.

• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the

seat.

■

Monitoring child passengers

We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more

mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up

properly.

■

Booster Seats

1Booster Seats

When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the

instructions that came with it, and install the seat

accordingly.

There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a

booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat

belt correctly.

Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and

territories require children to use a booster seat until

they reach a given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or 60

lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state,

province, or territory where you intend to drive.

■

Protecting Larger Children - Final Checks

Safe Driving

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Carbon Monoxide Gas

The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,

odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon

monoxide gas will not get into the interior.

■

Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever

• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.

• The exhaust system may have been damaged.

• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into

the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate

open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.

1. Select the fresh air mode.

2. Select the mode.

3. Set the fan speed to high.

4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked

vehicle with the engine running.

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up

with carbon monoxide gas.

Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.

Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the

garage immediately after starting the engine.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and

even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that

expose you to carbon monoxide.

Safe Driving

Safety Labels

Label Locations

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U. S. dashboard label, which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer

for a replacement.

Sun Visor

U.S. models

Inverter Coolant Filler

Tank Cap

Dashboard

U.S. models only

Air Conditioner System

U.S. models

Radiator Cap

Canadian models

Sun Visor

U.S. models only

uuSafety LabelsuLabel Locations

Safe Driving

Information for Painting

U.S. models

Canadian models

High Voltage System Components

U.S. models

This page intentionally left blank.

Instrument Panel

This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators .......................................... 100

Gauges and Driver Information Interface

Gauges............................................ 120

Driver Information Interface (A-type

Meter) ........................................125

Driver Information Interface Left Side

Area (B-type Meter) ....................151

Driver Information Interface Right Side

Area (B-type Meter) ....................154

100

Instrument Panel

Indicators

Indicators come on/blink depending on the condition of the vehicle. Messages may display on the Driver Information Interface at the same

time. Please take the appropriate action outlined in the message, such as contacting a dealer.

Parking Brake and

Brake System

Indicator (Red)

U.S.

Canada

 P. 102

Parking Brake and

Brake System

Indicator (Amber)

U.S.

Canada

Automatic Brake

Hold System Indicator

Automatic Brake Hold

Indicator

U.S.

Canada

*1: When you set the power mode to ON, these indicators come on to indicate that system checks are being performed. They go off a few seconds later or after the power

system has started. If an indicator does not come on or turn off, there may be a malfunction in the corresponding system. To resolve the issue, follow the instructions in

the owner's manual.

Malfunction Indicator

Lamp

12-Volt Battery

Charging System

Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Indicator

Seat Belt Reminder

Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

(Amber)

Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA

®) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA

®) OFF Indicator

Supplemental Restraint

System Indicator

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS

Indicator

Electric Power Steering

(EPS) System Indicator

 P. 104

 P. 105

 P. 109

Shift Position Indicator

 P. 106

Transmission System

Indicator

 P. 106

 P. 107

 P. 108

 P. 109

 P. 108

Deceleration Paddle

Selector Indicator

 P. 106

POWER SYSTEM

Indicator

 P. 106

READY Indicator

 P. 106

EV Indicator

 P. 106

* Not available on all models

101

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

*1: When you set the power mode to ON, these indicators come on to indicate that system checks are being performed. They go off a few seconds later or after the power

system has started. If an indicator does not come on or turn off, there may be a malfunction in the corresponding system. To resolve the issue, follow the instructions in

the owner's manual.

Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) with Low S

peed

Follow Indicator (Amber)

Lane Keeping Assist System

(LKAS) Indicator (Amber)

Safety Support Indicator

(Green/Gray)

 P. 115

 P. 116

 P. 119

Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) with Low Speed

Follow Indicator (White/

Green)

 P. 115

Lane Keeping Assist

System (LKAS) Indicator

(White/Green)

 P. 116

Safety Support Indicator

(Amber)

 P. 117

System Message Indicator

Immobilizer System

Indicator

 P. 111

 P. 114

Cruise Mode Indicator

(White/Green)

 P. 115

 P. 112

Hill Descent Control System

Indicator (White/Green)

 P. 114

Security System Alarm

Indicator

ECON Mode Indicator

 P. 113

NORMAL Mode Indicator

 P. 113

SNOW Mode Indicator

 P. 114

SPORT Mode Indicator

 P. 113

Auto High-Beam

Indicator

Lights On Indicator

High Beam Indicator

 P. 110

Turn Signal and Hazard

Warning Indicators

 P. 110

Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) with Low Speed

Follow Interval Indicator

 P. 115

INDIVIDUAL Mode

Indicator

 P. 113

* Not available on all models

102

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Parking Brake and

Brake System

Indicator (Red)

●

Comes on when the parking brake is

applied, and goes off when it is released.

●

The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if

you drive with the parking brake applied.

●

Comes on for about 30 seconds when you apply

the electric parking brake while the power mode is

in ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then goes off.

●

Stays on for about 30 seconds when you set the

power mode to VEHICLE OFF while the electric

parking brake is applied, then goes off.

●

Comes on when the brake fluid level is low.

●

Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking

brake is released. Stop in a safe place and check the

brake fluid level.

2 What to do when the indicator comes on

while driving P. 701

U.S.

Canada

(Red)

103

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Parking Brake and

Brake System

Indicator (Red)

●

Comes on if there is a problem with the

brake system.

●

Comes on along with the Parking Brake and

Brake System Indicator (amber) - Immediately

stop in a safe place. Contact a dealer for repair. The

brake pedal becomes harder to operate.

Depress the pedal further than you normally do.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake

System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 702

●

Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have

your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

or Blinks P. 701

●

Blinks and the Parking Brake and Brake System

Indicator (amber) comes on at the same time -

There is a problem with the electric parking brake

system. The parking brake may not be set.

Avoid using the parking brake and have your

vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake

System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 702

U.S.

Canada

(Red)

104

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Parking Brake and

Brake System

Indicator (Amber)

●

Comes on if there is a problem with a system

related to braking other than the

conventional brake system.

●

Comes on while driving - Avoid high speeds and

sudden braking. Take the vehicle to a dealer

immediately.

●

Comes on if there is a problem with the

electric parking brake system and/or the

automatic brake hold system.

●

Stays on constantly - Avoid using the parking

brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer

immediately.

●

Comes on if the brake system is deactivated

temporarily after the 12-volt battery has

been disconnected, then reconnected.

●

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20

km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not,

have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

●

Comes on if there is a problem with the

radar sensor.

●

Indicator may come on temporarily when the

Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

●

Make sure the total load is within the Maximum

Load Limit.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 451

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by

a dealer.

U.S.

Canada

(Amber)

105

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Automatic Brake

Hold System

Indicator

●

Comes on when the automatic brake hold

system is on.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 594

Automatic Brake

Hold Indicator

●

Comes on when the automatic brake hold is

activated.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 594

Malfunction

Indicator Lamp

• After you have set the power mode to ON,

the vehicle performs system checks.

However, if the readiness codes have not

been set by that time, this indicator will blink

five times and then go off.

• Readiness codes are part of the on-board

diagnostics for the emissions control systems.

2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 727

●

Comes on if there is a problem with the

emissions control systems or electric vehicle

system.

●

Blinks when a misfire in the engine’s

cylinders is detected.

2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On

or Blinks P. 700

12-Volt Battery

Charging System

Indicator

• Comes on when there is a problem with the

charging system.

• Stop in a safe place and contact a dealer

immediately.

2 Checking the 12-Volt Battery P. 661

2 If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System

Indicator Comes On P. 699

U.S.

Canada

106

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Shift Position

Indicator

• Indicates the current shift position.

2 Shifting P. 470

Transmission

System Indicator

• Blinks if the transmission system has a

problem.

• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

• Do not drive displays on the driver

information interface - Immediately stop in a

safe place and contact a dealer.

Deceleration

Paddle Selector

Indicator

●

Comes on when the paddle selector is

pulled.

●

Blinks when deceleration does not occur

while pulling the paddle selector.

●

Comes on with M when SPORT mode is

selected or the shift position is in , and the

paddle selector is pulled.

2 Deceleration Paddle Selector P. 472

POWER SYSTEM

Indicator

●

Comes on if there is a problem with the

electric vehicle system.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer immediately.

●

Do not drive displays on the driver

information interface - Immediately stop in a safe

place and contact a dealer.

READY Indicator

●

Comes on when the vehicle is ready to drive.

2 Turning on the Power P. 461

EV Indicator

●

Comes on when the vehicle is moved by the

motor, and the engine is not operating.

—

107

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Seat Belt

Reminder

Indicator

• Blinks and the beeper sounds for a few

seconds if you are not wearing a seat belt

when you set the power mode to ON, then

the indicator comes on.

• If the front passenger is not wearing a seat

belt, the indicator comes on a few seconds

later.

• Comes on for a while when the rear seat

belt is unfastened while the power mode in

ON.

• Blinks while driving if you and/or any

passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The

beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at

regular intervals.

• The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when

you and the passengers fasten their seat belts.

• Stays on after you and/or the passengers have

fastened the seat belt(s) - A detection error may

have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle

checked by a dealer.

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 53

Low Fuel Indicator

(Amber)

• Comes on when the fuel reserve is running

low (approximately 2.1 U.S. gal./8.0 Liters

left).

• Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.

●

Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel

gauge.

• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Anti-lock Brake

System (ABS)

Indicator

• Comes on if there is a problem with the

ABS.

• Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still

has normal braking ability but no anti-lock

function.

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 597

108

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Supplemental

Restraint System

Indicator

• Comes on if a problem with any of the

following is detected:

- Supplemental Restraint System

- Side airbag system

- Side curtain airbag system

- Seat belt tensioner

• Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

Electric Power

Steering (EPS)

System Indicator

• Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS

system.

• Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

• Do not drive displays on the driver

information interface - Immediately stop in a

safe place and contact a dealer.

2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator Comes On P. 703

Vehicle Stability

Assist

(VSA®)

System Indicator

●

Blinks when VSA® is active. —

●

Comes on if there is a problem with the

VSA® system, hill start assist system, or agile

handling assist.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

2 Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®), aka

Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

P. 488

2 Hill start assist system P. 466

2 Agile Handling Assist P. 490

●

Comes on if the VSA® system is deactivated

temporarily after the 12-volt battery has

been disconnected, then reconnected.

●

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20

km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not,

have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

109

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Vehicle Stability

Assist

(VSA®)

OFF Indicator

●

Comes on when you partially disable VSA®.

2 VSA® On and Off P. 489

Low Tire Pressure/

TPMS Indicator

●

May come on briefly if the power mode is set

to ON and the vehicle is not moved within 45

seconds, to indicate the calibration process is

not yet complete.

●

Comes on and stays on when:

- One or more tires’ pressures are

determined to be significantly low.

- The system has not been calibrated.

●

Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place,

check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if

necessary.

●

Stays on after the tires are inflated to the

recommended pressures - The system needs to

be calibrated.

2 TPMS Calibration P. 493

●

Blinks for about one minute, and then stays

on if there is a problem with the TPMS.

●

Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle

checked by a dealer.

●

Comes on if the TPMS is deactivated

temporarily after the 12-volt battery has

been disconnected, then reconnected.

●

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your

vehicle checked by a dealer.

* Not available on all models

110

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Turn Signal and

Hazard Warning

Indicators

• Blinks when you operate the turn signal

lever.

• Blinks along with all turn signals when you

press the hazard warning button.

• Does not blink or blinks rapidly

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 644

Lights On

Indicator

• Comes on when the parking, tail, and other

external lights are on.

2 Lights P. 222

High Beam

Indicator

• Comes on when the high beam headlights

are on.

—

Auto High-Beam

Indicator

• Comes on when all the operating conditions

of the auto high-beam are met.

2 Auto High-Beam P. 227

111

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

*1:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before selecting the ON mode.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Immobilizer

System Indicator

●

Blinks if the immobilizer system cannot

recognize the key information.

• Blinks - You cannot start the power system. Set

the power mode to VEHICLE OFF

, then select the

ON mode again.

• Repeatedly blinks - The system may be

malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a

dealer.

• Do not attempt to alter this system or add other

devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.

Models with

A-type

meter

Indicator

Models with

B-type

meter

Indicator

112

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

*1:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before selecting the ON mode.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Security System

Alarm Indicator

●

Blinks when the security system alarm has

been set.

2 Security System Alarm P. 212

Models with

A-type

meter

Indicator

Models with

B-type

meter

Indicator

113

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

INDIVIDUAL

Mode Indicator

• Comes on when you set the drive mode to

INDIVIDUAL.

2 Drive Mode System P. 480

SPORT Mode

Indicator

●

Comes on when you set the drive mode to

SPORT.

●

The ambient meter remains lit up in red as long as

SPORT mode is selected.

2 Drive Mode System P. 476

●

The ambient meter and the gauges in the

instrument panel light up in red as long as SPORT

mode is selected.

2 Drive Mode System P. 476

2 Drive Mode System P. 480

NORMAL Mode

Indicator

• Comes on when you set the drive mode to

NORMAL.

2 Drive Mode System P. 476

2 Drive Mode System P. 480

ECON Mode

Indicator

• Comes on when you set the drive mode to

ECON.

2 Drive Mode System P. 476

2 Drive Mode System P. 480

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

114

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

SNOW Mode

Indicator

• Comes on when you set the drive mode to

SNOW.

2 Drive Mode System P. 476

2 Drive Mode System P. 480

Hill Descent

Control System

Indicator (White/

Green)

• Lights up in white when the Hill Descent

Control System is on and ready to use.

• Lights up in green when the Hill Descent

Control System is in operation.

2 Hill Descent Control System P. 486

System Message

Indicator

• Comes on along with a beep when a

problem is detected. A system message on

the driver information interface appears at

the same time.

●

Refer to the Indicators information in this chapter

when a system message appears on the driver

information interface. Take the appropriate action

for the message.

●

While the indicator is on, press the (home)

button, and select Warnings to see the message

again.

2 Switching the Display P. 125

●

The driver information interface will not return to

the normal screen unless the warning is canceled,

or the (home) button is pressed.

●

While the indicator is on, roll the right selector

wheel to see the message again.

2 Switching the Display P. 154

●

The driver information interface will not return to

the normal screen unless the warning is canceled,

or the right selector wheel is rolled.

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

115

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC)

with Low Speed

Follow Indicator

(Amber)

●

Comes on if there is a problem with ACC

with Low Speed Follow.

●

Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle

checked by a dealer.

●

Comes on if the ACC with Low Speed Follow

is deactivated temporarily after the 12-volt

battery has been disconnected, then

reconnected.

●

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20

km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not,

have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

●

Indicator may come on temporarily when the

Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

●

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been

automatically canceled.

●

Make sure the total load is within the Maximum

Load Limit.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 451

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC)

with Low Speed

Follow Indicator

(White/Green)

●

Lights up in white when you press the

button.

●

Lights up in green while the system is in

operation.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Speed Follow P. 536

Cruise Mode

Indicator (White/

Green)

●

Lights up in white when you change to

cruise mode.

●

Lights up in green when you have set a

speed for cruise control.

2 To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to

Cruise Control P. 554

Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC)

with Low Speed

Follow Interval

Indicator

●

Comes on when ACC with Low Speed

Follow indicator comes on.

2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 550

* Not available on all models

116

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Lane Keeping

Assist System

(LKAS) Indicator

(Amber)

●

Comes on if there is a problem with the

LKAS.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

●

Indicator may come on temporarily when the

Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

●

Make sure the total load is within the Maximum

Load Limit.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 451

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

Lane Keeping

Assist System

(LKAS) Indicator

(White/Green)

●

Lights up in white when you press the LKAS

button.

●

Lights up in green when the LKAS is in

operation.

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 558

2 Traffic Jam Assist P. 569

117

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Safety Support

Indicator (Amber)

●

Comes on if there is a problem with the

Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBS

Low Speed Braking Control

, or blind spot

information system.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

●

Comes on if there is a problem with the

parking sensor.

●

Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered

with mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator stays on

even after you clean the area, have the system

checked by a dealer.

●

Indicator may come on temporarily when the

Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

●

Make sure the total load is within the Maximum

Load Limit.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 451

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

●

Comes on if the Road Departure Mitigation

system, CMBS

and Low Speed Braking

Control

are deactivated temporarily after

the 12-volt battery has been disconnected

and then reconnected.

●

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20

km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not,

have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Models with parking sensor system

* Not available on all models

118

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Safety Support

Indicator (Amber)

●

Comes on when the Road Departure

Mitigation system and/or CMBS

shuts itself

off.

●

Indicator may come on temporarily if the radar sensor

cannot detect any objects when passing through an

enclosed space such as a tunnel, or driving on an open

road without any structures nearby.

●

The area around the radar sensor is blocked by dirt,

mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place and wipe

the debris off with a soft cloth. Indicator may take

some time to go off after the radar sensor is cleaned.

●

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the

indicator does not go off even after you have

cleaned the radar sensor.

2 Radar Sensor P. 587

●

Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is

too high.

Use the climate control system to cool down the

camera.

The system activates when the temperature inside

the camera cools down.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 585

●

Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked

by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place

and wipe the debris off with a soft cloth.

●

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the

indicator and message are still displayed even after

you have cleaned the area around the camera.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 585

●

It may come on when the ambient conditions are

dark, such as when driving in a tunnel, or at night,

dawn, or dusk.

119

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Safety Support

Indicator (Amber)

●

Comes on when mud, snow, or ice

accumulates in the vicinity of the blind spot

information system sensor.

●

Comes on when the temperature of the

blind spot information system sensor is high.

●

Comes on while driving - Something may be

interfering with the blind spot information system

sensor. Check the vicinity of the blind spot

information system sensor and remove any

obstacles.

●

The system will return to normal when the

temperature cools down.

2 Blind Spot Information System P. 501

●

Comes on when mud, snow, or ice

accumulates in the vicinity of the sonar

sensor.

●

Remove the obstacle in the vicinity of the sonar

sensor.

2 Low Speed Braking Control

P. 522

Safety Support

Indicator (Green/

Gray)

●

Lights up in green when the Road Departure

Mitigation system, CMBS

, Low Speed

Braking Control

, blind spot information

system, and parking sensor system

are on.

●

Lights up in green and gray when one or

more of the systems above are off.

●

Lights up in gray when all systems above are

off.

2 Road Departure Mitigation System P. 528

2 Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

) P. 509

2 Blind Spot Information System P. 501

2 Low Speed Braking Control

P. 522

2 Parking Sensor System

P. 601

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

* Not available on all models

120

Instrument Panel

Gauges and Driver Information Interface

Gauges

Gauges include the speedometer, fuel gauge, and other related indicators.

They are displayed when the power mode is in ON.

Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.

■

Speedometer

1Speedometer

You can change the Speed/Distance units.

2 No Content P. 138

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 167

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 167

2 Customized Features P. 396

If you change the unit from miles and mph to km and

km/h, the current vehicle speed in mph appears next

to the digital speedometer.

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

U.S. models with B-type meter

Vehicle

Speed in

mph

* Not available on all models

Continued

121

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges

Instrument Panel

Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

Shows the remaining High Voltage battery charge level.

Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.

■

Fuel Gauge

1Fuel Gauge

NOTICE

You should refuel when the reading approaches .

Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,

damaging the catalytic converter.

After lightly refueling, or depending on your vehicle’s

condition, the actual amount of remaining fuel may

differ from the fuel gauge reading.

■

High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge

■

Odometer

Models with B-type meter

1High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge

The High Voltage battery charge level may decrease

under the following conditions:

• When the 12-volt battery has been replaced.

• When the 12-volt battery has been disconnected.

• When the High Voltage battery control system

corrects its reading.

The charge level reading will be corrected

automatically while driving.

Changes in the temperature of the High Voltage

battery can cause the number of indicators in the

battery charge level gauge to change.

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges

122

Instrument Panel

Shows the output of the electric motor.

Shows the degree to which the High Voltage battery is being charged.

When the deceleration paddle selector is being used, it shows the strength of

deceleration.

Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

■

Adjusting the outside temperature display

Adjust the temperature reading by up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading

seems incorrect.

■

POWER Gauge

■

CHARGE/DECEL Gauge

■

Outside Temperature

1Outside Temperature

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.

Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can

affect the temperature reading when your vehicle

speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).

It may take several minutes for the display to be

updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

You can adjust the temperature reading.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

Continued

123

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges

Instrument Panel

Shows certain detected traffic signs while driving.

If speed limit warning is activated, the sign icon blinks when the maximum speed of

the traffic sign detected is exceeded by a threshold, when compared with the vehicle

speed.

2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 578

■

Traffic Sign Recognition System

1Traffic Sign Recognition System

The default speed limit warning threshold is the

maximum speed of the traffic sign detected.

You can adjust the threshold for speed limit warning.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges

124

Instrument Panel

Shows the current mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow, LKAS, and Traffic Jam

Assist.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 536

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 558

2 Traffic Jam Assist P. 569

Shows the clock.

■

Current Mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow, the LKAS, and

Traffic Jam Assist

■

Clock

1Current Mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow, the LKAS, and

Traffic Jam Assist

When you set speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow

or cruise control, a set speed mark will be displayed

on the speedometer.

Models with B-type meter

Set Speed

Models with A-type meter

1Clock

You can adjust the time manually and change the

clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour

clock.

2 Clock P. 182

125

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

Driver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

The driver information interface shows information such as the estimated travelable

distance and fuel economy of the vehicle. It also displays messages such as warnings

and other helpful information.

When a warning message displays, please check the message and contact a dealer

to have the vehicle inspected if necessary. Please refer to the pages below if the

Engine oil pressure low, Engine temperature too hot or Limited stopping

power message is displayed.

2 If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears P. 698

2 Overheating P. 696

2 If the Limited stopping power Warning Appears P. 699

Press the (home) button, then roll the left selector wheel to scroll to the content

you want to see. Press the left selector wheel to see detailed information.

■

Switching the Display

1Switching the Display

You can add or delete the meter contents.

2 Gauge Display Settings P. 140

126

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

Gauge display

settings

P. 140

Left Selector

Wheel

(Home) Button

Roll the left

selector wheel.

No content

P. 138

Speed & time

P. 131

Warnings

P. 140

Power flow

P. 127

Vehicle settings

P. 141

Driver

attention

P. 133

Seat belts

P. 136

Safety

support

P. 137

Phone

P. 132

Audio

P. 132

AWD torque

distribution

P. 136

VSA mode

P. 139

Range & fuel

P. 129

Maintenance

P. 136

Brightness

P. 139

* Not available on all models

Continued

127

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

Displays the power flow of the motor and engine, indicating the vehicle’s power

source, remaining battery level, and whether the battery is being charged.

■

Power Flow/Engine Status Display/High Voltage Battery

Charge Level Gauge

1Power Flow/Engine Status Display/High Voltage Battery Charge

Level Gauge

The High Voltage battery charge level may decrease

under the following conditions:

• When the 12-volt battery has been replaced.

• When the 12-volt battery has been disconnected.

• When the High Voltage battery control system

corrects its reading.

The charge level reading will be corrected

automatically while driving.

Changes in the temperature of the High Voltage

battery can cause the number of indicators in the

battery charge level gauge to change.

While the vehicle is stationary with the engine

running, the following may appear on the driver

information interface.

2WD models

Power is supplied

by the motor and

the engine.

Hybrid (HV)

The engine is running

and the motor is

charging the High

Voltage battery.

Power is being

supplied by the

engine only.

Engine ON

Engine OFF

Power is supplied

by the motor.

Electric Vehicle (EV)

The engine is running

and the motor is

charging the High

Voltage battery.

Engine (Direct Drive)

Power Flow

Engine

The motor is

charging the High

Voltage battery.

Regeneration

High Voltage

Battery Charge

Level Gauge

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

128

Instrument Panel

AWD models

1Power Flow/Engine Status Display/High Voltage Battery Charge

Level Gauge

AWD models

Power is supplied

by the motor and

the engine.

Hybrid (HV)

The engine is running

and the motor is

charging the High

Voltage battery.

Power is being

supplied by the

engine only.

Engine ON

Engine OFF

Power is supplied

by the motor.

Electric Vehicle (EV)

The engine is running

and the motor is

charging the High

Voltage battery.

Engine (Direct Drive)

Power Flow

Engine

The motor is

charging the High

Voltage battery.

Regeneration

High Voltage

Battery Charge

Level Gauge

129

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.

■

Range/Fuel/Trip Meter

Average Fuel Economy

Range

Trip Meter B

Instant Fuel Economy

Trip Meter A

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

130

Instrument Panel

■

Trip meter

Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A

and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

Resetting a trip meter

To reset the trip meter, display it, press the left selector wheel and then select Reset.

u The trip meter is reset to 0.0.

■

Average fuel economy

Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km.

The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel

economy is also reset.

■

Instant fuel economy

Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

■

Range

Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining power and fuel. This

estimated distance is based on the vehicle’s current fuel economy.

1Average fuel economy

You can change when to reset the average fuel

economy.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

1Range

The driving range displayed is only an estimate and

may differ to the actual distance the vehicle can

travel.

131

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.

■

Speed/Time/Trip Meter

Trip Meter B

Average Speed

Trip Meter A

Elapsed Time

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

132

Instrument Panel

■

Trip meter

2 Trip meter P. 130

■

Elapsed time

Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

■

Average speed

Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

Shows the current audio information.

2 9" Color Touchscreen P. 280

Shows the current phone information.

2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 417

■

Audio

■

Phone

1Elapsed time

You can change when to reset the elapsed time.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

1Average speed

You can change when to reset the average speed.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

Continued

133

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is

being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it

determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the

degree of the driver’s attention on the driver information interface.

When you select Driver attention on the

driver information interface, bars on it light up

in white to indicate the degree of the driver’s

attention.

2 Switching the Display P. 125

■

Driver Attention Monitor

1Driver Attention Monitor

The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if

the driver is tired or inattentive.

Regardless of the system’s feedback, if you are

feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest for as

long as needed.

Driver Information Interface

Left Selector

Wheel

(Home) Button

Level

134

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

If two bars light up, the Driver attention

level low message will appear.

If one bar lights up, the Driver attention

level low. Time for a break. message will

appear, a beep will sound, and the steering

wheel will vibrate.

If this message appears, stop in a safe location

and rest for as long as needed.

The message will disappear when the

(home) button is pressed or when the system

has determined that the driver is driving

normally.

If the driver does not take a break and the

monitor continues to detect that the driver is

very tired, the message will appear again after

approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a

beep and steering wheel vibrations.

The message does not appear when the

traveling time is 30 minutes or less.

Continued

135

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

■

The Driver Attention Monitor resets when:

• The power system is turned off.

• The driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.

■

For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:

• The vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h).

• The electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.

■

Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention

Monitor may not function in the following circumstances:

• The steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active.

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 558

• The condition of the road is poor; e.g., the surface is unpaved or bumpy.

• It is windy.

• The driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner, such as

changing lanes or accelerating.

■

Customizing

You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile and audible

alert, Tactile alert, or OFF.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:

The bars on the driver information interface remain

grayed-out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is

functioning.

136

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

The indicators on the display show the amount of torque being transferred to the

right front, left front, right rear, and left rear wheels.

2 Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control System

P. 491

Occurs, under specified conditions, when seat belts are latched or unlatched.

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 53

Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance Minder

2 Maintenance Minder

P. 621

■

AWD Torque Distribution Monitor

■

Seat Belts

■

Maintenance

* Not available on all models

Continued

137

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

Indicates the status of the Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBS

, and blind

spot information system, such as On, Off, or Failure, by color and letters.

The following colors indicate the status of any of the above-mentioned systems:

• Green: The system is on.

• Gray: The system is off.

• Amber: There is a problem with the system.

■

Safety Support

1Safety Support

If a system is indicated by the color amber, have your

vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

To turn each system on or off, first rotate the left

selector wheel to switch displays. From the next

display, you can select which system to turn on or off.

2 Road Departure Mitigation System P. 528

2 Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

) P. 509

2 Blind Spot Information System P. 501

You can also confirm the status of each function by

the color of the safety support indicator.

2 Safety Support Indicator (Amber) P. 117

2 Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)

P. 119

Area Info for Road Departure

Mitigation System

Area Info for

CMBS

Area Info for Blind Spot

Information System

Road Departure

Mitigation

System Icon and

Status Info

Blind Spot

Information

System Icon and

Status Info

CMBS

Icon

and Status Info

138

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

2 POWER Gauge P. 122

2 CHARGE/DECEL Gauge P. 122

■

Speed/Distance Units

Enables you to show another unit on the driver information interface and set the

displayed measurements to read in either miles and mph or km and km/h.

Press and hold the left selector wheel when you select No content on the driver

information interface. Each time you do this, the unit will change from miles and

mph to km and km/h or vice versa. After this, a confirmation screen will appear for

a few seconds.

■

No Content

Continued

139

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

Press the left selector wheel when the Brightness screen is displayed.

When the power mode is in ON, you can use the left selector wheel to adjust

instrument panel brightness.

Brighten: Roll the left selector wheel up.

Dim: Roll the left selector wheel down.

Press the left selector wheel to exit.

You can turn the VSA® on or off.

Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select

Reduce traction control, then press the left

selector wheel to check or uncheck it.

2 Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®), aka

Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

P. 488

■

Brightness

■

VSA Mode

1Brightness

The brightness of the gauge is automatically adjusted

depending on the ambient brightness.

• The brightness decreases when the ambient light is

dark.

• The brightness increases when the ambient light is

bright.

You can change the setting even when the ambient

lighting is bright, but the brightness of the gauge

won’t change.

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

140

Instrument Panel

You can choose which icons to display on the home screen.

1. Roll the left selector wheel until Gauge

display settings is selected, then press the

left selector wheel.

2. Roll the left selector wheel.

3. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll

between icons, then press the left selector

wheel to check or uncheck them.

You can check if there are any active warning messages.

■

Gauge Display Settings

1Gauge Display Settings

Icons that are gray cannot be removed from the

home screen.

When you customize settings, shift to

(P.

■

Warnings

1Warnings

If there are multiple warnings, you can roll the left

selector wheel to see other warnings.

Continued

141

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

Use the driver information interface to customize certain features.

■

How to customize

Press the (home) button, then select the screen by rolling the left selector

wheel while the power mode is in ON, the vehicle is at a complete stop, and the shift

position is in

(P. Then, press the left selector wheel.

■

Vehicle Settings

1Vehicle Settings

To customize other features, roll the left selector

wheel.

2 List of customizable options P. 142

2 Example of customization settings P. 148

When you customize settings, shift to

(P.

Driver

Information

Interface

Left Selector Wheel

(Home) Button

142

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

■

List of customizable options

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

TPMS

calibration

— Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel/Calibrate

Driver assist

system setup

Forward collision

warning distance

Changes the distance at which CMBS

alerts. Long/Normal

/Short

ACC forward vehicle

detect beep

Causes the system to beep when a vehicle is detected or

when the vehicle is out of ACC with Low Speed Follow

range.

ON/OFF

Road departure

mitigation setting

Changes the setting for the Road Departure Mitigation

system.

Narrow/Normal

/Wide/

Warning only

Lane keeping assist

suspend beep

Switches the LKAS and Traffic Jam Assist suspend alert

beeps on and off.

ON/OFF

Blind spot information Changes the setting for the blind spot information.

Audible and visual

alert

/Visual alert

* Not available on all models

143

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Driver assist

system setup

Traffic sign

recognition system

display setting

Turns the traffic sign recognition system on and off. ON

/OFF

Traffic sign

recognition system

exceeding speed

warning

Turns the traffic sign recognition system over speed

warning on and off.

ON/OFF

Speed limit warning

threshold setting

Changes at which speed the traffic sign recognition

system over speed warning is activated.

Speed limit

Speed limit+3mph/

Speed limit+5mph/

Speed limit+10mph

(When mph is selected)

Speed limit

Speed limit+5km/h/

Speed limit+10km/h/

Speed limit+15km/h

(When km/h is selected)

Driver attention

monitor

Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.

Tactile and audible

alert

/ Tactile alert/OFF

144

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Meter setup

Language selection Changes the displayed language.

English

/Français/

Español

Adjust outside temp.

display

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F

~ +5°F

(U.S.)

-3°C ~ ±0°C

~ +3°C

(Canada)

“Trip A” reset timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,

average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed

time A.

When fully refueled/

IGN OFF/Manually reset

“Trip B” reset timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,

average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed

time B.

When fully refueled/

IGN OFF/Manually reset

Adjust alarm volume

Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers, warnings,

turn signal sound, and so on.

High/Mid

/Low

Fuel efficiency backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON

/OFF

Rear seat reminder Turns the Rear Seat Reminder feature on and off. ON

/OFF

Speed/distance units Selects the speed/distance units.

km/h∙km/mph∙miles

(U.S.)

km/h∙km

/mph∙miles

(Canada)

145

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Keyless access

setup

Door unlock mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver’s

door handle.

Driver door only

/All

doors

Keyless access light

flash

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/

lock the doors.

/OFF

Keyless access beep

Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the

doors.

/OFF

Remote start system

ON/OFF

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON

/OFF

Lighting setup

Auto high-beam Turns the auto high-beam on and off. ON

/OFF

Interior light dimming

time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on

after you close the doors.

60sec/30sec

/15sec

Headlight auto off

timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on

after you close the driver’s door.

60sec/30sec/15sec

/0sec

Auto light sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid

/Low/Min

Auto headlight ON

with wiper ON

Changes the settings for the wiper operation when the

headlights automatically come on while the headlight

switch is in the AUTO position.

/OFF

* Not available on all models

146

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Door setup

Auto door lock

Changes the setting for when the doors and the tailgate

automatically lock.

With vehicle speed

Shift from P/OFF

Auto door unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors and the tailgate

automatically unlock.

All doors when driver’s

door opens

/All doors

when shifted to Park/

All doors when ignition

switched OFF/OFF

Walk away auto lock

Changes the settings for the auto lock function when

you walk away from the vehicle while carrying the

keyless remote.

ON/OFF

Keyless lock answer

back

LOCK/UNLOCK - The exterior lights flash.

LOCK (2nd push) - The beeper sounds.

/OFF

Keyless remote power

window control

Turns remote window control using the keyless remote

on and off.

/OFF

Lockout prevention

Changes the settings for the lockout protection

function.

/OFF

Lock presetting Changes the settings for the lock presetting function. ON

/OFF

147

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Power tailgate

setup

Keyless open mode

Changes the keyless setting for when the power tailgate

opens.

Anytime

/When

unlocked

Power open by outer

handle

Changes the setting to open power tailgate by tailgate

outer handle.

OFF (Manual only)/ON

(Power/Manual)

Climate

control setup

Driver seat automatic

climate control

Turns the driver’s seat automatic climate control on and

off.

/OFF

Passenger seat

automatic climate

control

Turns the passenger’s seat automatic climate control on

and off.

/OFF

Maintenance

reset

—

Resets the Maintenance Minder

display when you

have performed the maintenance service.

(Selects Reset Items)

Default all —

Cancels customized changes you have made or restores

them to their default setting.

Cancel/Set

* Not available on all models

148

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

■

Example of customization settings

The steps for changing the “Trip A” reset timing setting to When fully refueled

are shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” reset timing is Manually reset.

1. Press the (home) button and roll the left

selector wheel to select screen, then

press the left selector wheel.

149

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

2. Roll the left selector wheel until Meter

setup appears on the display.

3. Press the left selector wheel.

4. Roll the left selector wheel until “Trip A”

reset timing appears on the display, then

press the left selector wheel.

u The display switches to the

customization setup screen, where you

can select When fully refueled, IGN

OFF, Manually reset, or Back.

5. Roll the left selector wheel and select

When fully refueled, then press the left

selector wheel.

u The display will return to the

customization menu screen.

150

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

6. Press the left selector wheel after Back

appears on the display.

7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the

normal screen.

151

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Left Side Area (B-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

Driver Information Interface Left Side Area

(B-type Meter)

Shows the current mode for audio and phone information, etc.

2 Audio Remote Controls P. 277

2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 417

2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 430

Shows the clock.

■

Clock

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

1Clock

You can adjust the time manually and change the

clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour

clock.

2 Clock P. 182

You can choose whether the clock is displayed on the

driver information interface.

2 Customize Display P. 152

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Left Side Area (B-type Meter)

152

Instrument Panel

■

Arrange audio source on the left side area

You can choose which sources to display on the audio source screen.

1. Roll the left selector wheel until Customize

display is selected, then press the left

selector wheel.

2. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select

Hide/show, then press the left selector

wheel.

3. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll

between audio sources, then press the left

selector wheel to check or uncheck them.

■

Customize Display

1Arrange audio source on the left side area

When you customize settings, shift to

(P.

153

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Left Side Area (B-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

■

Turn the displaying on the left side area on and off

You can select whether the current audio information and clock appear on the left

side area.

1. Roll the left selector wheel until Customize

display is selected, then press the left

selector wheel.

2. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select

Audio & clock, then press the left selector

wheel.

3. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select

your desired settings, then press the left

selector wheel.

154

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

Driver Information Interface Right Side Area

(B-type Meter)

The driver information interface shows information such as the estimated travelable

distance and fuel economy of the vehicle. It also displays messages such as warnings

and other helpful information.

When a warning message displays, please check the message and contact a dealer

to have the vehicle inspected if necessary. Please refer to the pages below if the

Engine oil pressure low, Engine temperature too hot or Limited stopping

power message is displayed.

2 If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears P. 698

2 Overheating P. 696

2 If the Limited stopping power Warning Appears P. 699

Roll the right selector wheel to view different types of content.

■

Switching the Display

1Switching the Display

You can add or delete the meter contents.

2 Gauge Display Settings P. 169

155

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

Right Selector

Wheel

Warning Messages

P. 170

Range/Fuel/

Trip Meter

P. 158

No Content/

Unit Change

P. 167

Driver Attention

Monitor

P. 162

Navigation

P. 161

Speed/Time/

Trip Meter

P. 160

Brightness

P. 168

Maintenance

P. 165

Safety Support

P. 166

Seat Belts

P. 165

Power Flow

Monitor

P. 156

AWD Torque

Distribution

P. 165

Gauge Display

Settings

P. 169

Vehicle Settings

P. 171

Vehicle Stability

Assist Mode

P. 168

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

156

Instrument Panel

Displays the power flow of the motor and engine, indicating the vehicle’s power

source and whether the battery is being charged.

■

Power Flow Monitor

1Power Flow Monitor

While the vehicle is stationary with the engine

running, the following may appear on the driver

information interface.

2WD models

AWD models

2WD models

The motor is

charging the High

Voltage battery.

Regeneration

Engine OFF

Power Flow

Power is being

supplied by the

engine only.

The engine is running

and the motor is

charging the High

Voltage battery.

Engine ON

Engine

Power is supplied

by the motor and

the engine.

Hybrid (HV)

Power is supplied

by the motor.

Electric Vehicle (EV)

The engine is running

and the motor is

charging the High

Voltage battery.

Engine (Direct Drive)

157

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

AWD models

The motor is

charging the High

Voltage battery.

Regeneration

Engine OFF

Power Flow

Power is being

supplied by the

engine only.

The engine is running

and the motor is

charging the High

Voltage battery.

Engine ON

Engine

Power is supplied

by the motor and

the engine.

Hybrid (HV)

Power is supplied

by the motor.

Electric Vehicle (EV)

The engine is running

and the motor is

charging the High

Voltage battery.

Engine (Direct Drive)

158

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

Press the right selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.

■

Range/Fuel/Trip Meter

Trip Meter A

Range

Average Fuel Economy

Instant Fuel

Economy

Trip Meter B

Continued

159

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

■

Trip meter

Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A

and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

Resetting a trip meter

To reset the trip meter, display it, press and hold the right selector wheel, and then

select Reset.

u The trip meter is reset to 0.0.

■

Average fuel economy

Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km.

The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel

economy is also reset.

■

Instant fuel economy

Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

■

Range

Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining power and fuel. This

estimated distance is based on the vehicle’s current fuel economy.

1Average fuel economy

You can change when to reset the average fuel

economy.

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

1Range

The driving range displayed is only an estimate and

may differ from the actual distance the vehicle can

travel.

* Not available on all models

160

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

Press the right selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.

■

Speed/Time/Trip Meter

Trip Meter A

Elapsed Time

Trip Meter B

Average Speed

Continued

161

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

■

Trip meter

2 Trip meter P. 159

■

Elapsed time

Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

■

Average speed

Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

■

Compass

Shows the compass screen.

■

Turn-by-Turn Directions

When driving guidance is provided by Google Maps

, Apple CarPlay, or Android

Auto, turn-by-turn directions to your destination appear.

2 Apple CarPlay P. 347

2 Android Auto

P. 352

2 Google built-in P. 357

■

Navigation

1Elapsed time

You can change when to reset the elapsed time.

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

1Average speed

You can change when to reset the average speed.

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

1Navigation

You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn

display come on or not during the route guidance.

2 Customized Features P. 396

Navigation features may not be available for all

devices or apps.

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

162

Instrument Panel

The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is

being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it

determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the

degree of the driver’s attention on the driver information interface.

When you select Driver Attention Monitor on

the driver information interface, bars on it

light up in white to indicate the degree of the

driver’s attention.

2 Switching the Display P. 154

■

Driver Attention Monitor

1Driver Attention Monitor

The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if

the driver is tired or inattentive.

Regardless of the system’s feedback, if you are

feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest for as

long as needed.

Right Selector

Wheel

Driver Information Interface

Level

163

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

If two bars light up, the Driver attention

level low message will appear.

If one bar lights up, the Driver attention

level low. Time for a break. message will

appear, a beep will sound, and the steering

wheel will vibrate.

If this message appears, stop in a safe location

and rest for as long as needed.

The message will disappear when the right

selector wheel is rolled or when the system

has determined that the driver is driving

normally.

If the driver does not take a break and the

monitor continues to detect that the driver is

very tired, the message will appear again after

approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a

beep and steering wheel vibrations.

The message does not appear when the

traveling time is 30 minutes or less.

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

164

Instrument Panel

■

The Driver Attention Monitor resets when:

• The power system is turned off.

• The driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.

■

For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:

• The vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h).

• The electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.

■

Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention

Monitor may not function in the following circumstances:

• The steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active.

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 558

• The condition of the road is poor; e.g., the surface is unpaved or bumpy.

• It is windy.

• The driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner, such as

changing lanes or accelerating.

■

Customizing

You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile And Audible

Alert, Tactile Alert, or Off.

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:

The bars on the driver information interface remain

grayed-out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is

functioning.

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

165

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

The indicators on the display show the amount of torque being transferred to the

right front, left front, right rear, and left rear wheels.

2 Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control System

P. 491

Occurs, under specified conditions, when seat belts are latched or unlatched.

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 53

Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance Minder

2 Maintenance Minder

P. 621

■

AWD Torque Distribution Monitor

■

Seat Belts

■

Maintenance

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

166

Instrument Panel

Indicates the status of the Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBS

, Low Speed

Braking Control

, blind spot information system, and parking sensor system

, such

as On, Off, or Failure, by color and letters.

The following colors indicate the status of any of the above-mentioned systems:

• Green: The system is on.

• Gray: The system is off.

• Amber: There is a problem with the system.

■

Safety Support

1Safety Support

If a system is indicated by the color amber, have your

vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

To turn each system on or off, first press the right

selector wheel to switch displays. From the next

display, you can select which system to turn on or off.

2 Road Departure Mitigation System P. 528

2 Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

) P. 509

2 Blind Spot Information System P. 501

2 Low Speed Braking Control

P. 522

2 Parking Sensor System

P. 601

You can also confirm the status of each function by

the color of the safety support indicator.

2 Safety Support Indicator (Amber) P. 119

2 Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray) P. 119

Even when the Low Speed Braking Control icon is

green, if the Rear Sensor Setting is turned off, the

brake assist will not operate when reversing.

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Even when the parking sensor system icon is green, if

the Rear Sensor Setting is turned off, the rear

parking sensor will not operate when reversing.

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Models with parking sensor system

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Area Info for Road Departure

Mitigation System

Area Info for Blind Spot

Information System

Blind Spot

Information

System Icon and

Status Info

Road Departure

Mitigation

System Icon and

Status Info

Area Info for

Low Speed

Braking

Control

and

Parking Sensor

System

Low Speed

Braking Control

Icon and Status

Info

CMBS

Icon and

Status Info

Area Info for

CMBS

Parking Sensor

System Icon and

Status Info

* Not available on all models

167

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

Enables you to show another unit on the driver information interface and audio/

information screen and set the displayed measurements to read in either miles and

mph or km and km/h.

Press and hold the right selector wheel when you select the No content screen on

the driver information interface. Each time you do this, the unit will change from

miles and mph to km and km/h or vice versa. After this, a confirmation screen will

appear for a few seconds.

■

Speed/Distance Units

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

168

Instrument Panel

Press the right selector wheel when the Brightness screen is displayed.

When the power mode is in ON, you can use the right selector wheel to adjust

instrument panel brightness.

Brighten: Roll the right selector wheel up.

Dim: Roll the right selector wheel down.

Press the right selector wheel to exit.

You can turn the VSA® on or off.

Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select

Reduce traction control, then press the right

selector wheel to check or uncheck it.

2 Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®), aka

Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

P. 488

■

Brightness

■

Vehicle Stability Assist Mode

1Brightness

The brightness of the gauge is automatically adjusted

depending on the ambient brightness.

• The brightness decreases when the ambient light is

dark.

• The brightness increases when the ambient light is

bright.

You can change the setting even when the ambient

lighting is bright, but the brightness of the gauge

won’t change.

Continued

169

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

■

Arrange content on the right side area

You can choose which contents to display on the right side area.

1. Press the right selector wheel when you

select the Gauge display settings on the

driver information interface.

2. Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to

select Hide/show, then press the right

selector wheel.

3. Roll the right selector wheel to scroll

between contents, then press the right

selector wheel to check or uncheck them.

■

Gauge Display Settings

1Arrange content on the right side area

Contents that are gray cannot be removed from the

right side area.

When you customize settings, shift to

(P.

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

170

Instrument Panel

■

Change gauge design

You can change the gauge design.

1. Press the right selector wheel when you

select the Gauge display settings on the

driver information interface.

2. Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to

select Gauge design, then press the right

selector wheel.

3. Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to

select your desired settings, then press the

right selector wheel.

You can check if there are any active warning messages.

1Change gauge design

When using the Round minimal or Bar minimal

gauge design, a simplified display is used when ACC

with Low Speed Follow is in operation.

■

Warnings

1Warnings

If there are multiple warnings, you can roll the right

selector wheel to see other warnings.

Continued

171

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

Use the driver information interface to customize certain features.

■

How to customize

Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select screen while the power mode is in

ON, the vehicle is at a complete stop, and the shift position is in

(P. Then, press the

right selector wheel.

■

Vehicle Settings

1Vehicle Settings

To customize other features, roll the right selector

wheel.

2 List of customizable options P. 172

2 Example of customization settings P. 178

When you customize settings, shift to

(P.

Driver

Information

Interface

Right Selector Wheel

* Not available on all models

172

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

■

List of customizable options

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

TPMS

calibration

— Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel/Calibrate

Driver assist

system setup

Forward collision

warning distance

Changes the distance at which CMBS

alerts. Long/Normal

/Short

ACC forward vehicle

detect beep

Causes the system to beep when a vehicle is detected or

when the vehicle is out of ACC with Low Speed Follow

range.

ON/OFF

Road departure

mitigation setting

Changes the setting for the Road Departure Mitigation

system.

Narrow/Normal

/Wide/

Warning only

Lane keeping assist

suspend beep

Switches the LKAS and Traffic Jam Assist suspend alert

beeps on and off.

ON/OFF

Blind spot information Changes the setting for the blind spot information.

Audible and visual

alert

/Visual alert

Traffic sign

recognition system

display setting

Turns the traffic sign recognition system on and off. ON

/OFF

Traffic sign

recognition system

exceeding speed

warning

Turns the traffic sign recognition system over speed

warning on and off.

ON/OFF

* Not available on all models

173

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Driver assist

system setup

Speed limit warning

threshold setting

Changes at which speed the traffic sign recognition

system over speed warning is activated.

Speed limit

Speed limit+3mph/

Speed limit+5mph/

Speed limit+10mph

(When mph is selected)

Speed limit

Speed limit+5km/h/

Speed limit+10km/h/

Speed limit+15km/h

(When km/h is selected)

Driver attention

monitor

Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.

Tactile and audible

alert

/ Tactile alert/OFF

Rear sensor setting

Turns the rear parking sensor system on and off.

2 Parking Sensor System

P. 601

/OFF

Meter setup

Language selection Changes the displayed language.

English

/Français/

Español

Adjust outside temp.

display

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F

~ +5°F

(U.S.)

-3°C ~ ±0°C

~ +3°C

(Canada)

* Not available on all models

174

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Meter setup

“Trip A” reset timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,

average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed

time A.

When fully refueled/

IGN OFF/Manually reset

“Trip B” reset timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,

average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed

time B.

When fully refueled/

IGN OFF/Manually reset

Adjust alarm volume

Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers, warnings,

turn signal sound, and so on.

High/Mid

/Low

Fuel efficiency backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON

/OFF

Rear seat reminder Turns the Rear Seat Reminder feature on and off. ON

/OFF

Speed/distance units Selects the speed/distance units.

km/h∙km/mph∙miles

(U.S.)

km/h∙km

/mph∙miles

(Canada)

Driving

position

setup

Memory position link Turns the driving position memory system on and off. ON

/OFF

Seat position

movement at entry/

exit

Moves the seat rearward when you get in/get out of the

vehicle. Changes the setting for this feature.

/OFF

* Not available on all models

175

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Keyless access

setup

Door unlock mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver’s

door handle.

Driver door only

/All

doors

Keyless access light

flash

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/

lock the doors.

/OFF

Keyless access beep

Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the

doors.

/OFF

Remote start system

ON/OFF

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON

/OFF

Lighting setup

Auto high-beam Turns the auto high-beam on and off. ON

/OFF

Interior light dimming

time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on

after you close the doors.

60sec/30sec

/15sec

Headlight auto off

timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on

after you close the driver’s door.

60sec/30sec/15sec

/0sec

Auto light sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid

/Low/Min

Auto headlight ON

with wiper ON

Changes the settings for the wiper operation when the

headlights automatically come on while the headlight

switch is in the AUTO position.

/OFF

* Not available on all models

176

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Door setup

Auto door lock

Changes the setting for when the doors and the tailgate

automatically lock.

With vehicle speed

Shift from P/OFF

Auto door unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors and the tailgate

automatically unlock.

All doors when driver’s

door opens

/All doors

when shifted to Park/

All doors when ignition

switched OFF/OFF

Walk away auto lock

Changes the settings for the auto lock function when

you walk away from the vehicle while carrying the

keyless remote.

ON/OFF

Keyless lock answer

back

LOCK/UNLOCK - The exterior lights flash.

LOCK (2nd push) - The beeper sounds.

/OFF

Keyless remote power

window control

Turns remote window control using the keyless remote

on and off.

/OFF

Lockout prevention

Changes the settings for the lockout protection

function.

/OFF

Lock presetting Changes the settings for the lock presetting function. ON

/OFF

177

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Continued

Instrument Panel

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Power tailgate

setup

Keyless open mode

Changes the keyless setting for when the power tailgate

opens.

Anytime

/When

unlocked

Power open by outer

handle

Changes the setting to open power tailgate by tailgate

outer handle.

OFF (Manual only)/ON

(Power/Manual)

Climate

control setup

Driver seat automatic

climate control

Turns the driver’s seat automatic climate control on and

off.

/OFF

Passenger seat

automatic climate

control

Turns the passenger’s seat automatic climate control on

and off.

/OFF

Maintenance

reset

—

Resets the Maintenance Minder

display when you

have performed the maintenance service.

(Selects Reset Items)

Default all —

Cancels customized changes you have made or restores

them to their default setting.

Cancel/Set

178

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

■

Example of customization settings

The steps for changing the “Trip A” reset timing setting to When fully refueled

are shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” reset timing is Manually reset.

1. Roll the right selector wheel to select

Vehicle settings, then press the right

selector wheel.

2. Roll the right selector wheel until Meter

setup appears on the display.

3. Press the right selector wheel.

179

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)

Instrument Panel

4. Roll the right selector wheel until “Trip A”

reset timing appears on the display, then

press the right selector wheel.

u The display switches to the

customization setup screen, where you

can select When fully refueled, IGN

OFF, Manually reset, or Back.

5. Roll the right selector wheel and select

When fully refueled, then press the right

selector wheel.

u The display will return to the

customization menu screen.

6. Press the right selector wheel after Back

appears on the display.

7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the

normal screen.

180

This page intentionally left blank.

181

Controls

This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock .................................................. 182

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key .................................................. 184

Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength ...186

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Outside .......................................... 187

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Inside ............................................. 197

Childproof Door Locks ..................... 199

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 200

Tailgate.............................................. 201

Security System

Immobilizer System .......................... 212

Security System Alarm...................... 212

Windows ........................................... 215

Moonroof .......................................... 218

Operating the Switches Around the

Steering Wheel

POWER Button................................. 219

Turn Signals..................................... 221

Lights............................................... 222

Auto High-Beam .............................. 227

Wipers and Washers ........................ 230

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button ... 233

Heated Windshield Button ............... 233

Driving Position Memory System

.... 234

Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 236

Mirrors............................................... 237

Seats .................................................. 239

Interior Convenience Items.............. 250

Climate Control System

Using Automatic Climate Control .... 267

Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 271

Canadian models

* Not available on all models

182

Controls

Clock

Adjusting the Clock

You can adjust the time in the clock display with the power mode in ON.

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select System.

4. Select Date & Time.

5. Select Set Date & Time.

6. Select Automatic Date & Time, then

select Off.

To adjust date:

7. Select Set Date.

8. Select or .

9. Select Back icon to set the date.

To adjust time:

7. Select Set Time.

8. Select or .

9. Select Back icon to set the time.

■

Adjusting the Time

1Adjusting the Clock

The clock is automatically updated through the audio

system.

You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock

displayed in the header area of the audio/information

screen.

1. Touch the clock on the screen.

The clock setting screen appears.

2. Select Set Date & Time.

3. Select Automatic Date & Time, then select Off.

4. Select Set Date or Set Time.

5. Adjusting the dates, hours and minutes by

selecting or .

6. Select Back icon to set the time.

You can customize the clock display to show the 12

hour clock or 24 hour clock.

2 Customized Features P. 389

You can customize the date display.

2 Customized Features P. 389

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

183

uuClockuAdjusting the Clock

Controls

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select System.

4. Select Date & Time.

5. Select Set Date & Time.

6. Select Automatic Date & Time, then

select Off.

To adjust date:

7. Select Set Date.

8. Select or .

9. Press the button to set the date.

To adjust time:

7. Select Set Time.

8. Select or .

9. Press the button to set the time.

1Adjusting the Clock

You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock

displayed in the header area of the audio/information

screen, Clock displayed on the home screen, or

All Apps.

1. Touch the clock on the screen.

The clock screen of the face-type appears.

2. Select Menu.

3. Select Date & Time.

4. Select Set Date & Time.

5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then select Off.

6. Select Set Date or Set Time.

7. Adjusting the dates, hours and minutes by

selecting or .

8. Press the button to set the time.

You can customize the clock display to show the 12

hour clock or 24 hour clock.

2 Customized Features P. 396

You can customize the date display.

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

with Google built-in

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

with Google built-in

184

Controls

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key

This vehicle comes with the following keys:

Use the keys to turn on and off the power

system, lock and unlock all the doors, tailgate,

and fuel fill door.

The built-in key can be used to unlock the

doors when the keyless remote battery

becomes weak and the power door unlock

operation is disabled.

To remove the built-in key, push the release

button and then pull out the key. To reinstall

the built-in key, push the built-in key into the

keyless remote until it clicks.

1Key

All the keys have an immobilizer system. The

immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle

theft.

2 Immobilizer System P. 212

Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the

keys:

• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in

locations with high temperature or high humidity.

• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.

• Keep the keys away from liquids, dust, and sand.

• Do not take the keys apart except to replace the

battery.

If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the power

system may not activate, and the remote transmitter

may not work.

If the keys do not work properly, have them

inspected by a dealer.

You can remotely turn the power system on using the

remote engine start.

2 Remote Engine Start P. 463

■

Built-in Key

Release Button

185

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey

Controls

Contains a number that you will need if you

purchase a replacement key.

■

Key Number Tag

1Key Number Tag

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a

safe place outside of your vehicle.

If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a

dealer.

If you lose your key and you cannot activate the

power system, contact a dealer.

186

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Keyless Remote Signal Strength

Controls

Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength

The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the keyless remote to activate the power

system, and lock and unlock all the doors, tailgate, and fuel fill door.

In the following cases, activating the power system may not work, locking/unlocking

the doors/tailgate/fuel fill door may be inhibited, or operation may be unstable:

• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.

• You are carrying the keyless remote together with telecommunications

equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.

• A metallic object is touching or covering the keyless remote.

1Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength

Communication between the keyless remote and the

vehicle consumes the keyless remote’s battery.

Battery life is about two years, but this varies

depending on regularity of use.

The battery is consumed whenever the keyless

remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing

it near electrical appliances such as televisions and

personal computers.

187

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Continued

Controls

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

When you carry the keyless remote, you can

lock/unlock the doors, tailgate, and fuel fill

door.

You can lock/unlock the doors, fuel fill door,

and tailgate, within a radius of about 32

inches (80 cm) from the outside door handle

or tailgate outer handle.

■

Using the Keyless Access System

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

If the interior light switch is in the door activated

position, the interior light comes on when you unlock

the doors and tailgate.

No doors opened: The light fades out after 30

seconds.

Doors and tailgate relocked: The light goes off

immediately.

2 Interior Lights P. 250

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

188

Controls

■

Locking the doors and tailgate

Touch the door lock sensor on the front door

or press the lock button on the tailgate.

u All the doors and tailgate lock and the

security system sets.

u Some exterior lights flash once and the

beeper sounds once.

1Using the Keyless Access System

If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30

seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the keyless access

system, the doors and tailgate will automatically relock.

You can lock or unlock doors using the keyless access

system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

• Do not leave the keyless remote in the vehicle

when you get out. Carry it with you.

• Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you

can lock/unlock the doors and tailgate while someone

else with the keyless remote is within range.

• The door may be unlocked if the door handle is

covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if

the keyless remote is within range.

• If you grip a front door handle or touch a door lock

sensor wearing gloves, the door sensor may be

slow to respond or may not respond by locking or

unlocking the doors.

• After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds

during which you can pull the door handle to

confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to

unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait

at least 2 seconds before gripping the handle,

otherwise the door will not unlock.

• The door might not open if you pull it immediately

after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle

again and confirm that the door is unlocked before

pulling the handle.

• Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may

not be able to lock/unlock the doors and tailgate

with the keyless remote if it is above or below the

outside handle.

• The keyless remote may not operate if it is too close

to the door, door glass, and tailgate.

Door Lock

Sensor

Lock Button

Continued

189

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Controls

■

Unlocking the doors and tailgate

Grab the driver’s door handle:

u The driver’s door and fuel fill door

unlock.

u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice.

Grab the front passenger’s door handle:

u All the doors and tailgate unlock.

u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice.

Press the tailgate outer handle:

u The tailgate unlocks.

u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice.

2 Opening/Closing the Tailgate P. 202

1Using the Keyless Access System

The light flash, beep, and door unlock mode settings

can be customized using the audio/information

screen or driver information interface.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

You can also unlock and open with the power

tailgate.

2 Using the Tailgate Outer Handle P. 208

Please wipe off any residue such as car shampoo,

groundwater, or anti-freeze in the vicinity of the

outside door handle, as there is a risk that the keyless

access system may not work properly.

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Models with power tailgate

Outer

Handle

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

190

Controls

■

Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk

away auto lock®)

When you walk away from the vehicle with all

doors and tailgate closed while carrying the

keyless remote, the doors, tailgate and fuel fill

door will automatically lock.

The auto lock function activates when all

doors and tailgate are closed, or all doors are

closed and tailgate begins power close

operation

, and the keyless remote is within

about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the outside door

handle or tailgate outer handle.

Exit the vehicle while carrying keyless remote

and close the door(s) and tailgate.

1. While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of

the vehicle.

u The beeper sounds; the auto lock

function will be activated.

2. Carry the keyless remote beyond about 5

feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain

outside this range for 2 or more seconds.

u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper

sounds; all doors, tailgate, and fuel fill

door will then lock.

1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®)

The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory

default setting. The auto lock function can be set to

ON using the audio/information screen or driver

information interface. If you set the auto lock

function to ON using the audio/information screen or

driver information interface, only the remote

transmitter that was used to unlock the driver’s door

prior to the setting change can activate auto lock.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

After the auto lock function has been activated, when

you stay within the locking/unlocking operation range,

the indicator on the keyless remote will continue to flash

until the doors and tailgate are locked.

When you stay beside the vehicle within the

operation range, the doors and tailgate will

automatically lock approximately 30 seconds after

the auto lock function activating beeper sounds.

When you open a door or tailgate after the auto lock

function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock

function will be canceled.

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

The activation range of

the auto lock function is

about 5 feet (1.5 m)

* Not available on all models

Continued

191

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Controls

To temporarily deactivate the function:

1. Set the power mode to OFF.

2. Open the driver’s door.

3. Using the master door lock switch, operate

the lock as follows:

Lock Unlock Lock Unlock.

u The beeper sounds, and the function is

deactivated.

To restore the function:

• Set the power mode to ON.

• Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock

function.

• With the keyless remote on you, move out

of the auto lock function operation range.

• Open any door.

1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®)

Under the following circumstances, the auto lock

function will not activate:

• The keyless remote is inside the vehicle.

uThe beeper will not sound.

• The keyless remote is taken out of its operational

range before all doors and tailgate are closed.

uThe beeper will sound.

The auto lock function does not operate when any of

the following conditions are met.

• The keyless remote is inside the vehicle.

• A door, tailgate or the hood is not closed.

•

The power mode is set to any mode other than OFF.

• The keyless remote is not located within a radius of

about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get

out of the vehicle and close the doors and tailgate.

Auto lock function operation stop beeper

After the auto lock function has been activated, the

auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for

approximately two seconds in the following cases.

• The keyless remote is put inside the vehicle through

a window.

• You are located too close to the vehicle.

• The keyless remote is put inside the tailgate.

If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are

carrying the keyless remote. Then, open/close a door

and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds

once.

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

192

Controls

The vehicle will automatically lock after you

lock the doors in advance then close the doors

and tailgate.

Activate lock presetting after closing the

driver’s door.

1. Touch the door lock sensor on the driver’s

door, press the lock button on the tailgate

or press the lock button on the keyless

remote.

u Alert sounds and lock presetting is

activated.

2. Close all doors and the tailgate.

u Some exterior lights flash and a beeper

sounds when vehicle locks.

Make sure the doors and tailgate are locked

before moving away from the vehicle.

■

Lock Presetting

1Lock Presetting

Lock presetting will be reset if a door or the tailgate is

opened before the vehicle has locked completely.

Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not

inside the vehicle.

You can turn this function on and off.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

WARNING

Opening or closing the power tailgate

someone’s hands or fingers can cause

serious injury. Make sure all hands and

fingers, especially children’s, are clear of

the power tailgate

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Door Lock

Sensor

Lock Button

* Not available on all models

Continued

193

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Controls

■

Locking the doors and tailgate

Press the lock button.

Once:

u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors,

tailgate, and fuel fill door lock, and the

security system sets.

Twice (within five seconds after the first

push):

u The beeper sounds and verifies the

security system is set.

■

Unlocking the doors and tailgate

Press the unlock button.

Once:

u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the

driver’s door and fuel fill door unlock.

Twice:

u The remaining doors and tailgate unlock.

■

Using the Remote Transmitter

1Using the Remote Transmitter

If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30

seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote

transmitter, the doors and tailgate will automatically

relock.

You can lock or unlock doors using the remote

transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE

OFF.

The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so

the operating range may vary depending on the

surroundings.

If the distance at which the remote transmitter works

varies, the battery is probably low.

If the LED does not come on when you press a

button, the battery is dead.

2 Replacing the Remote Battery P. 663

LED

Unlock Button

Lock Button

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

194

Controls

If the unlock button of the keyless remote does not work, use the built-in key

instead. The keyhole is behind the door handle.

Pull and hold the outer handle.

Insert the built-in key into the key cylinder

from below the handle and then turn it.

■

Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

1Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

When unlocking, the driver’s door unlocks first.

Turning the key a second time within a few seconds

does not unlock the remaining doors and the

tailgate.

If you unlock a door with the built-in key while the

security system is activated, the alarm will sound.

If the lock button of the keyless remote does not

work, refer to the following.

2 Locking a Door Without Using a Key P. 195

Continued

195

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Controls

If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using

the key, you can lock the door without it.

■

Locking the front door

Push the lock tab forward

a or push the

master door lock switch in the lock direction

b, and close the door.

■

Locking the rear doors

Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

■

Locking a Door Without Using a Key

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key

When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors,

tailgate, and fuel fill door lock at the same time.

Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not

inside the vehicle.

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

196

Controls

■

Lockout protection function

If the vehicle cannot detect the keyless

remote, lockout protection activates.

u A beeper sounds, some exterior lights

flash, the doors unlock, and a message

appears on the driver information

interface.

u This allows you to open a door in case

the keyless remote is still inside the

vehicle.

If you do not open a door, all doors relock

after 15 seconds.

To avoid non-detection, make sure to keep

the keyless remote away from cell phones and

other devices that may cause signal

interference.

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key

You can change the lockout protection operation

setting.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

197

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Continued

Controls

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

■

Locking a door

Push the lock tab forward.

■

Unlocking a door

Pull the lock tab rearward.

■

Using the Lock Tab

1Using the Lock Tab

When you lock the door using the lock tab on the

driver’s door, all of the other doors, tailgate, and fuel

fill door lock at the same time.

When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the

driver’s door, only the driver’s door and fuel fill door

will unlock.

To unlock

Lock Tab

To lock

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

198

Controls

Pull the front door inner handle.

u The door unlocks and opens in one

motion.

Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other

doors.

To avoid all the doors unlocking, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,

then lock again before opening the door.

u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be

unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock

/Auto door

unlock

setting to Off

/OFF

using the driver information interface or audio/

information screen.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

*1: Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

*2: Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

■

Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle

1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle

The front door inner handles are designed to allow

front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.

However, this feature requires that front seat

occupants never pull a front door inner handle while

the vehicle is in motion.

Children should always ride in a rear seat where

childproof door locks are provided.

2 Childproof Door Locks P. 199

Inner Handle

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

199

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks

Controls

Press the master door lock switch in as shown

to lock or unlock all doors, tailgate, and fuel

fill door.

Childproof Door Locks

The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside

regardless of the position of the lock tab.

Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock

position, and close the door.

■

When opening the door

Open the door using the outside door handle.

■

Using the Master Door Lock Switch

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch

When you lock/unlock either of the front doors using

the master door lock switch, all the other doors,

tailgate, and fuel fill door lock/unlock at the same

time.

To unlock

Master Door Lock Switch

To lock

■

Setting the Childproof Door Locks

1Childproof Door Locks

To open the door from the inside when the

childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the

unlock position, lower the rear window, put your

hand out of the window, and pull the outside door

handle.

Lock

Unlock

200

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

Controls

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met.

■

Drive lock mode

All doors and tailgate lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

■

Driver’s door open mode

All doors and the tailgate unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

■

Auto Door Locking

■

Auto Door Unlocking

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

You can turn off or change to another auto door

locking/unlocking setting using the driver

information interface or audio/information screen.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

201

Controls

Tailgate

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or

closing it.

• Open the tailgate all the way.

u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight.

• Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.

Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:

u Avoid possible damage.

u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.

2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 95

1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to

put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo

area when closing the tailgate.

When you are storing or picking up luggage from the

cargo area, or by using a forward and back kicking

motion under the center of the rear bumper for

hands free access

, while the engine is idling, do not

stand in front of the exhaust pipe. You may get

burned.

Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They

may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden

acceleration, or a crash.

WARNING

Anyone caught in the path of a tailgate

that is being opened or closed can be

seriously injured.

Make sure that all people are clear of the

tailgate before opening or closing it.

Models without power tailgate

All models

* Not available on all models

202

uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate

Controls

Opening/Closing the Tailgate

When all the doors are unlocked or you press

the tailgate unlock button

on the remote

transmitter, the tailgate is unlocked.

Press the outer handle and lift open the

tailgate.

If you are carrying the keyless remote, you do

not have to unlock the tailgate before

opening it.

To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle,

pull the tailgate down, and push it closed

from outside.

If you close the tailgate when all the doors are

locked, the tailgate locks automatically.

u Some exterior lights flash.

1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

Make sure luggage or other items do not touch the

tailgate support struts.

Tailgate Support Struts

1Opening/Closing the Tailgate

• Do not leave the keyless remote, in the vehicle

when you get out. Carry it with you.

• Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you

can unlock the tailgate while someone else with

the keyless remote is within range.

• Do not leave the keyless remote inside the cargo

area and close the tailgate. The beeper sounds and

the tailgate cannot be closed.

Outer

Handle

Inner Handle

* Not available on all models

203

uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate

Controls

Press the tailgate unlock button to unlock the

tailgate.

■

Using the Remote Transmitter

1Using the Remote Transmitter

If you have unlocked and opened the tailgate using

the remote transmitter, when closing, the tailgate

locks automatically.

Tailgate Unlock

Button

* Not available on all models

204

uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate

Controls

Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate

The power tailgate can be operated by pressing the power tailgate button on the

remote transmitter, pressing the power tailgate button on the driver’s side control

panel, pressing the outer handle or inner button on the tailgate, or by raising and

lowering your foot under the center of the rear bumper for hands free access

The power tailgate can be opened/closed when the transmission is in

(P.

1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate

NOTICE

Do not push or pull on the power tailgate when it is

being automatically opened or closed.

Forcibly opening or closing the power tailgate while

in operation can deform the tailgate frame.

When operating the power tailgate, make sure there is

enough space around your vehicle. People near the tailgate

may be seriously hurt if the tailgate hits or closes on their

heads. Be especially cautious if children are around.

The power tailgate may not open or close under the

following conditions:

• You activate the power system while the tailgate is

automatically opening or closing.

• The vehicle is parked on a steep hill.

• The vehicle is swayed in a strong wind.

• The tailgate or the roof is covered with snow or ice.

If you close the power tailgate when all the doors are

locked, the power tailgate locks automatically.

WARNING

Opening or closing a power tailgate while

any part of a passenger is in the tailgate’s

operating path can cause serious injury.

Make sure all passengers or objects are

clear of the tailgate operating range

before opening or closing the tailgate.

* Not available on all models

Continued

205

uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate

Controls

Use a forward and back kicking motion for

about 1 second under the center of the rear

bumper to open or close the power tailgate

while carrying the keyless remote.

u Some exterior lights will flash and a

beeper will sound, then the tailgate

begins to move.

■

Using the Hands Free Access

1Using the Hands Free Access

During rain or in other instances when the vehicle

becomes wet, the sensor may not properly detect

your foot motion.

When performing work on or around the rear section

of the vehicle, you may inadvertently open or close

the tailgate.

To prevent this from happening, select Customized

Features on the audio/information screen and then

select Off for the feature.

2 Customized Features P. 396

If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long

or sweep your foot from side to side, the power

tailgate does not open or close.

This function will not operate if you don’t have the

keyless remote on you. Please make sure you have

the keyless remote on you.

1 sec.

* Not available on all models

uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate

206

Controls

Press the power tailgate button for more than

one second to operate when the power mode

is in VEHICLE OFF.

u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper

sounds.

If you press the button again while the power

tailgate is moving, it will stop.

Press the button for more than one second,

and the power tailgate will reverse direction.

■

Customizing when to open the tailgate

Anytime: The power tailgate unlocks and opens at the same time. This is the

default setting.

When Unlocked

/When unlocked

: The tailgate opens when all doors are

unlocked.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

*1: Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

*2: Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

■

Using the Remote Transmitter

1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate

If you replace the 12-volt battery or the power

tailgate fuse while the tailgate is open, the power

tailgate may be disabled. The power tailgate resumes

once you manually close the tailgate.

Installing aftermarket components other than Honda

Genuine Accessories on the power tailgate may

prevent it from fully opening or closing.

Make sure the power tailgate is fully open before you

get your luggage in and out.

The beeper sounds when you start driving while the

power tailgate is still open, or closing.

Power Tailgate

Button

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

Continued

207

uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate

Controls

To open or close the power tailgate, press the

power tailgate button for about one second.

u Some exterior lights will flash and the

beeper sounds.

If you press the button again while the power

tailgate is moving, it will stop.

Press the button for about one second, and

the power tailgate will reverse direction.

■

Using the Power Tailgate Button

1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate

Do not touch the sensors located on both sides of the

tailgate. The power tailgate does not close if you

touch either sensor when you are trying to close the

tailgate.

Be careful not to scratch the sensors with a sharp

object. If scratched, they can be damaged, and the

power tailgate closing feature malfunctions.

If the power tailgate meets resistance while opening

or closing, the auto reverse feature reverses the

direction. The beeper sounds three times.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the

tailgate is almost closed to make sure that it fully

closes.

* Not available on all models

uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate

208

Controls

If you press the outer handle of the tailgate for

no longer than one second, the tailgate opens

automatically.

u The beeper sounds.

u If you want to open the tailgate

manually, press the outer handle for

more than one second.

2 Opening/Closing the Tailgate P. 202

If you are carrying the keyless remote, you do

not have to unlock the tailgate before

opening it.

If you press the outer handle again while the

power tailgate is moving, it will stop.

Press the outer handle, and the power tailgate

will reverse direction.

■

Using the Tailgate Outer Handle

1Using the Tailgate Outer Handle

• Do not leave the keyless remote in the vehicle

when you get out. Carry it with you.

• Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you

can lock/unlock the tailgate while someone else

with the keyless remote is within range.

• Do not leave the keyless remote inside the cargo

area and close the tailgate. The beeper sounds and

the tailgate cannot be closed.

You can change the power tailgate operation setting

on and off.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Outer

Handle

* Not available on all models

209

uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate

Continued

Controls

Press the tailgate inner button on the tailgate

to close the power tailgate.

u The beeper sounds.

If you press the tailgate inner button again

while the power tailgate is moving, it will stop.

Press and release the tailgate inner button

again, and the power tailgate will reverse

direction.

■

Using the Tailgate Inner Button

Tailgate Inner

Button

uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate

210

Controls

The extent to which the power tailgate

automatically opens can be programmed.

To program:

1. Open the tailgate to the desired position.

2. Press and hold the tailgate inner button.

You will hear one long beep, followed by

two short beeps.

■

Programming Tailgate Position

1Programming Tailgate Position

If the tailgate is only slightly opened, the position

cannot be programmed, even if you push the tailgate

inner button.

If you want to reprogram the power tailgate to open

all the way, manually raise the tailgate to its upper

most position and follow directions for step 2.

Tailgate Inner

Button

211

uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate

Controls

If you manually close the power tailgate, it latches automatically.

Automatically lowers the power tailgate when there is a possibility that the fully

opened power tailgate can fall down by its own weight (for example, with snow on

the tailgate). The beeper sounds while the power tailgate lowers.

■

Auto-Closer

■

Power Tailgate Fall Detection

1Auto-Closer

The auto-closer feature does not activate if you press

the tailgate outer handle while the power tailgate is

closing.

NOTICE

Do not put any force on the tailgate while the power

tailgate is latching.

Keep your hands away from the tailgate when you

manually close the tailgate and let it latch

automatically. It is dangerous to put your hands

around the tailgate as it starts to latch itself.

1Power Tailgate Fall Detection

If you try to manually close the power tailgate

immediately after it fully opens, the power tailgate

fall detection may activate.

Once the power tailgate fall detection activates, wait

until the power tailgate fully closes. Keep away from

the power tailgate when it is in motion.

If the power tailgate fall detection constantly

activates, consult a dealer.

212

Controls

Security System

Immobilizer System

This system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the power

system.

Pay attention to the following when pressing the POWER button:

• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the POWER button.

• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.

• Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the POWER

button.

• Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic devices, such as televisions

and audio systems, emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can

become magnetic.

Security System Alarm

The security system alarm activates when the tailgate, hood, or doors are forcibly

opened. The alarm does not activate if the tailgate or doors are opened with the

remote transmitter or keyless access system.

1Immobilizer System

NOTICE

Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or

accidental movement of the vehicle.

Always take the key with you whenever you leave the

vehicle unattended.

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.

Doing so may damage the system and make your

vehicle inoperable.

Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the

vehicle on the first time after the battery has been

disconnected.

Canadian models

1Security System Alarm

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.

Doing so may damage the system and make your

vehicle inoperable.

The security system alarm continues for a maximum

of two minutes until the security system alarm

deactivates.

Continued

213

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

Controls

■

When the security system alarm activates

The horn sounds intermittently, and some exterior lights flash.

■

To deactivate the security system alarm

Unlock the vehicle using the remote transmitter or keyless access system, or turn the

power mode is set to ON. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is

deactivated.

■

Setting the security system alarm

The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have

been met:

• The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.

• The hood is closed.

• All doors and tailgate are locked from outside with the remote transmitter or

keyless access system.

■

When the security system alarm sets

The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking

interval changes after about 15 seconds.

■

To cancel the security system alarm

The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote

transmitter or keyless access system, or when the power mode is set to ON. The

security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.

1Security System Alarm

Do not set the security system alarm when someone

is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can

accidentally activate when:

• Unlocking the door with the lock tab.

• Opening the hood with the hood release handle.

• Taking the transmission out of (P.

If the 12-volt battery goes dead after you have set the

security system alarm, the security alarm may sound

once the 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced.

If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by

unlocking a door using the remote transmitter or

keyless access system.

If you unlock a door with the built-in key while the

security system is activated, the alarm will sound.

214

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

Controls

■

The panic button on the remote

transmitter

If you press the panic button for

approximately one second, the following will

occur for about 30 seconds:

• The horn sounds.

• Some exterior lights flash.

■

Canceling panic mode

• Press any button on the remote transmitter.

• Set the power mode to ON.

■

Panic Mode

Panic

Button

215

Continued

Controls

Windows

Opening/Closing the Power Windows

The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON,

using the switches on the doors.

The driver's side switches can be used to open and close all the windows. The power

window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off to open and close the

windows from anywhere other than the driver's seat.

When the power window lock button is pressed, the indicator comes on and you

can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on if a

child is in the vehicle.

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

The power windows can be operated for up to 10

minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE

OFF.

Opening either front door cancels this function.

WARNING

Closing a power window on someone’s

hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from

the windows before closing them.

uuWindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

216

Controls

■

Manual operation

To open: Push the switch down lightly, and

hold it until the desired position is reached.

To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it

until the desired position is reached.

■

Automatic operation

To open: Push the switch down firmly.

To close: Pull the switch up firmly.

The window opens or closes completely. To

stop the window at any time, push or pull the

switch briefly.

■

Opening/Closing the Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

Auto Reverse

If a power window senses resistance when closing

automatically, it will stop closing and reverse

direction.

The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled

when you continuously pull up the switch.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the

window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

While driving with any of the windows open, you

may hear a booming, throbbing, or helicopter-type

noise or pressure. This is called wind buffeting. This is

a normal occurrence that can be minimized.

If you hear a wind buffeting noise with any of the

windows open, lower all of the other windows

slightly or open the moonroof.

Power Window

Lock Button

Indicator

Driver’s

Window

Switch

Front

Passenger’s

Window

Switch

Rear Passenger’s

Window Switch

* Not available on all models

217

uuWindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

Controls

To open: Push the switch down.

To close: Pull the switch up.

Release the switch when the window reaches

the desired position.

Press the unlock button, and then within 10

seconds, press it again and hold it.

If the windows stop midway, repeat the

procedure.

■

Opening/Closing the Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function

Open

■

Opening the Windows with the Remote

1Opening the Windows with the Remote

If you open the windows with the remote, the

moonroof will open automatically along with them.

You can change the keyless remote's window

opening setting.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Unlock Button

* Not available on all models

218

Controls

Moonroof

Opening/Closing the Moonroof

You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in

the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.

■

Automatic operation

To open: Pull the switch back firmly.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

The moonroof automatically opens or closes

all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,

pull or push the switch briefly.

■

Manual operation

To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and

hold it until the desired position is reached.

To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and

hold it until the desired position is reached.

■

Tilting the moonroof up

To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof

switch.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then

release.

■

Using the Moonroof Switch

1Using the Moonroof Switch

NOTICE

Opening the moonroof in below freezing

temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice

can damage the moonroof panel or motor.

The moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes

after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.

Opening either front door cancels this function.

When resistance is detected, the auto reverse

function causes the moonroof to change directions,

then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the

moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully

closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,

are clear of the moonroof.

You can use the remote transmitter to operate the

moonroof.

2 Opening the Windows with the Remote

P. 217

WARNING

Opening or closing the moonroof on

someone’s hands or fingers can cause

serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of

the moonroof before opening or closing it.

Open

Tilt

219

Continued

Controls

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel

POWER Button

If you carry the keyless remote and press the

POWER button without depressing the brake

pedal, the power mode will change in this

order: VEHICLE OFFACCESSORYON

VEHICLE OFF.

VEHICLE OFF:

Vehicle power is turned OFF.

ACCESSORY:

The audio system and some accessories can be

used.

ON:

All accessories can be used.

If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in

(P and the

power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to

VEHICLE OFF to avoid draining the 12-volt battery.

If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is in ACCESSORY, a warning

beep sounds.

■

Changing the Power Mode

1POWER Button

If the keyless remote is set in a storage box or another

place where its signal can be interrupted, the power

mode may not change.

When the power mode is set to ON, the power mode

will change to ACCESSORY if the POWER button is

pressed while the transmission is in a position other

than

(P.

■

Automatic Power Off

■

Power Mode Reminder

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluPOWER Button

220

Controls

When the power mode is set to any mode

other than OFF and you remove the keyless

remote from the vehicle and shut the door, an

alarm will sound. If the alarm continues to

sound, place the keyless remote in another

location.

■

When the power mode is in ACCESSORY

The alarm will sound from outside the vehicle.

■

When the power mode is in ON

An alarm will sound both inside and outside the

vehicle. In addition, a warning indicator will

appear on the instrument panel.

■

Keyless Remote Reminder

1Keyless Remote Reminder

When the keyless remote is within the system’s

operational range, and all the doors are closed, the

warning function cancels.

If the keyless remote is taken out of the vehicle after

the power system has been started, you can no

longer change the power mode or restart the power

system. Always make sure that the keyless remote is

in your vehicle when you operate the POWER

button.

Removing the keyless remote from the vehicle

through a window does not activate the warning

buzzer.

Do not put the keyless remote on the dashboard or in

the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to

sound. Under some other conditions that can prevent

the vehicle from locating the keyless remote, the

warning buzzer may also sound even if the keyless

remote is within the system’s operational range.

221

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals

Controls

Turn Signals

The turn signals can be used when the power

mode is in ON.

■

a: Turn signal

Push the lever up or down based on the

direction you want to turn, and the turn signal

will blink.

■

b: One-touch turn signal

When you lightly push the lever up or down

and release it, the turn signal will blink 3

times.

u If you lightly push the lever in the

opposite direction while it is blinking, the

blinking will stop.

1Turn Signals

The turn signal indicator on the instrument panel will

blink when the external turn signal blinks.

2 Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators

P. 110

222

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights

Controls

Lights

The lights will turn on automatically

depending on the ambient brightness. They

can also be switched on and off manually.

The exterior lights will switch on automatically

when the light switch is set to AUTO while

the power mode is in ON.

■

Manual operation

Headlights/parking lights:

Turn the light switch to .

Parking lights:

Turn the light switch to .

Headlight/parking lights off:

Turn the light switch to OFF and release it while the transmission is in

(P or the

parking brake is applied.

u The lights will come back on automatically when:

• The light switch is turned to OFF again and released.

• The transmission is changed out of

(P and the parking brake is released.

■

Headlights/Parking Lights

1Lights

When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the

instrument panel will be on.

2 Lights On Indicator P. 110

1Headlights/Parking Lights

When the parking lights are on, the side marker, tail,

and rear license plate lights will also switch on.

Do not leave the lights on when the power system is

off because it will cause the 12-volt battery to

discharge.

When the light switch is turned to or and

the power is turned to OFF, a beeper sounds when

the driver’s door is opened.

When the light switch is turned to AUTO and the

ambient light levels are low, the headlights and

parking lights will switch on if you unlock a door.

They will switch off when the door is locked.

If you suspect that the headlights are not positioned

properly, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Continued

223

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights

Controls

When the headlights are on, push the lever forward. Pull the lever back to return to

low beams.

■

Flashing the high beams

Pull the lever back to switch on the high

beams.

u Release the lever to return to low beams.

■

High Beams

1Headlights/Parking Lights

The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do

not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise

the automatic lighting system may not work properly.

Light Sensor

Models without automatic

intermittent wipers

Models with automatic

intermittent wipers

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights

224

Controls

1Headlights/Parking Lights

You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Setting

The exterior lights come on

when the ambient light is

Max

High

Mid

Low

Min

U.S. models

Bright

Dark

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

Continued

225

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights

Controls

The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within

a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.

The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.

■

Headlight Integration with Wipers

1Headlight Integration with Wipers

This feature activates while the headlights are off in

AUTO.

The instrument panel brightness does not change

when the headlights come on.

At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting

control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of

the number of wiper sweeps.

You can turn the headlight integration with wipers

function on and off.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights

226

Controls

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15

seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, take the keyless remote with

you, and close the driver’s door.

If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF with the headlight switch on, but do not

open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the

AUTO position).

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock

the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the

driver’s door, you will hear a reminder chime alerting you that the lights are on.

The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have

been met:

• The power mode is in ON.

• The headlight switch is AUTO or .

• The parking brake is released.

The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to

VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.

The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when

the headlight switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.

■

Automatic Lighting Off Feature

■

Daytime Running Lights

1Automatic Lighting Off Feature

You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

227

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel uAuto High-Beam

Continued

Controls

Auto High-Beam

The front sensor camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the

lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at

night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high

beam depending on the situation.

■

Activating the system

When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator

comes on and automatically switches between the high beam and low beam,

depending on the situation.

• The power mode is in ON.

• The light switch is in AUTO.

• The lever is in the low beam position.

• The headlights have been automatically

activated.

• It is dark outside the vehicle.

If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have

been met, carry out either of the procedures below and the indicator will come on.

• Pull the lever towards you and release it.

• Turn the light switch to then turn the light switch to AUTO.

■

How to Use the Auto High-Beam

1Auto High-Beam

The auto high-beam system does not always operate

in every situation. This system is just for assisting the

driver. Always observe your surroundings and

manually switch the headlights between high beam

and low beam if necessary.

If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient

for driving, change the headlight beams manually.

The range and the distance at which the camera can

recognize light sources varies depending on

conditions surrounding your vehicle.

Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to

the inside of the windshield, refer to the following.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 585

For the auto high-beam to work properly:

• Do not place an object that reflects light on the

dashboard.

• Keep the windshield around the camera clean.

• When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to

apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.

• Do not attach an object, sticker, or film to the area

around the camera.

• Do not touch the camera lens.

If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of

the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.

Light Switch

Auto High-Beam

Indicator

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam

228

Controls

■

Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam

When the auto high-beam indicator comes on, the headlights switch between high

beam and low beam based on the following conditions.

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam

In the following cases, the auto high-beam system

may not switch the headlights properly or the

switching timing may be changed. If the automatic

switching operation does not fit for your driving

habits, please switch the headlights manually.

• The brightness of the lights from a preceding or

oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.

• Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,

fog, windshield frost, etc.).

• Surrounding light sources like street lights, electric

billboards, and traffic lights are illuminating the

road ahead.

• The brightness level of the road ahead constantly

changes.

• The road is bumpy or has many curves.

• A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a

vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or

oncoming direction.

• Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear.

• A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object

ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle.

• The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under

roadside trees or behind median barriers.

• The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle,

bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.

The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low

beam on when:

• Windshield wipers are operating at a high speed.

• The camera has detected a dense fog.

High beam

All of the following conditions must

be met before the high beams turn

on.

●

Your vehicle speed is 23 mph

(37 km/h) or more.

●

There are no preceding or

oncoming vehicles with

headlights or taillights turned on.

●

There are few street lights on the

road ahead.

Low beam

One of the following conditions

must be met before the low beams

turn on.

●

Your vehicle speed is 15 mph

(24 km/h) or less.

●

There is a preceding or oncoming

vehicle with headlights or

taillights turned on.

●

There are many street lights on

the road ahead.

229

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel uAuto High-Beam

Controls

■

Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam

If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam,

follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto high-

beam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated.

Using the lever:

Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams and then release it.

u To reactivate the auto high-beam, follow either of the procedures below and

the auto high-beam indicator will come on.

• Pull the lever towards you and release it.

• Turn the light switch to and then to AUTO when the lever is in the low beam

position.

Using the light switch:

Turn the light switch to .

u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the

lever is in the low beam position, and the auto high-beam indicator will come

on.

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam

How to turn off the Auto High-Beam System

You can turn the auto high-beam system on and off.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate:

Camera temperature too high message appears:

• Use the climate control system to cool down the

interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode

with the airflow directed toward the camera.

• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield

temperature, which cools down the area around

the camera.

If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate:

Clean front windshield or poor viewing

condition. message appears:

• Park your vehicle in a safe place, and make sure the

windshield is clean.

Clean the windshield if it is dirty. If the message

does not disappear after driven for a while, have

your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

230

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Controls

Wipers and Washers

The windshield wipers and washers can be

used when the power mode is in ON.

■

MIST

The wipers run at high speed until you release

the lever.

■

Wiper switch (OFF, INT

, AUTO

, LO,

HI)

Move the lever up or down to change the

wiper settings.

■

Adjusting wiper operation

Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper

operation.

■

Washer

Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.

When you release the lever for more than one

second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two

or three more times to clear the windshield,

and then stop.

*1: Models with manual intermittent operation

*2: Models with automatic intermittent operation

■

Windshield Wiper/Washer

1Wipers and Washers

When lifting the front wiper arms, move them into

the maintenance position before lifting them.

2 Lifting the Front Wiper Arms P. 648

NOTICE

Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.

The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber

blades will get damaged.

NOTICE

In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the

windshield.

Operating the wipers in this condition may damage

the wipers. Use the defogger or heated windshield

to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.

NOTICE

Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.

The pump may get damaged.

If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are

operating intermittently, the length of the wipe

interval shortens.

When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s

shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become

the same.

If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such

as the buildup of snow, park the vehicle in a safe

place. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, set the power

mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then remove

the obstacle.

Models with intermittent time adjustment ring

Intermittent Time

Adjustment Ring

MIST

INT

/AUTO

OFF

LO: Low speed wipe

Pull to

use

washer.

HI: High speed wipe

Lower speed, fewer sweeps

Higher speed, more sweeps

* Not available on all models

Continued

231

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Controls

When you push the lever down to AUTO, the

windshield wipers sweep once, and go into

the automatic mode.

The wipers operate intermittently, at low

speed, or at high speed and stop in

accordance with the amount of rainfall the

rainfall sensor detects.

■

AUTO sensitivity adjustment

When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you

can adjust the sensitivity of the rainfall sensor

(using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will

operate in accordance with your preference.

Sensor sensitivity

■

Automatic Intermittent Wipers

1Wipers and Washers

The wiper motor may stop motor operation

temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation

will return to normal within a few minutes.

Adjustment Ring

1Automatic Intermittent Wipers

The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.

NOTICE

AUTO should always be turned OFF before the

following situations in order to prevent severe

damage to the wiper system:

• Cleaning the windshield

• Driving through a car wash

• No rain present

Rainfall Sensor

Low sensitivity

High sensitivity

* Not available on all models

232

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Controls

The rear wiper and washer can be used when

the power mode is in ON.

■

Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON)

Change the wiper switch setting according to

the amount of rain.

■

Washer ( ,

)

Sprays on the rear window and rearview camera

while you rotate the switch to this position.

Hold it to activate the rear wiper and to spray

the washer. Once released, the washer spray

will stop and the rear wiper will return to its

selected switch setting after a few sweeps.

■

Operating in reverse

When you put the transmission into (R with the windshield wipers activated, the

rear wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.

*1: Models with manual intermittent operation

*2: Models with automatic intermittent operation

■

Rear Wiper/Washer

INT: Intermittent

OFF

ON: Continuous wipe

Washer

Front Wiper Position Rear Wiper Operation

INT

(Intermittent)

AUTO

(Intermittent)

Intermittent

LO (Low speed wipe)

HI (High speed wipe)

Continuous

* Not available on all models

233

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button

Controls

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button

Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window

and mirrors when the power mode is in ON.

The rear defogger and heated door mirror

automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes

depending on the outside temperature.

However, if the outside temperature is 32°F

(0°C) or below, it does not automatically

switch off.

Heated Windshield Button

Press the heated windshield button to deice

the windshield at the wiper park area and

along the driver side edge of the windshield

when the power mode is in ON.

The heated windshield will automatically

switch off after 15 minutes.

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off

when the window has been defogged. Also, do not

use the system for a long time while the power

system is stopped. This may weaken the 12-volt

battery, making it difficult to turn the power system

on.

When the power mode is set to ON and the outside

temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the heated door

mirror may automatically activate for 10 minutes.

Canadian models

1Heated Windshield Button

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off

when the window has been deiced. Also, do not use

the system for a long period when the power system

is stopped. This may weaken the 12-volt battery,

making it difficult to turn the power system on.

234

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System

Controls

Driving Position Memory System

You can store two driver’s seat positions (except for power lumbar) with the driving

position memory system.

When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a keyless remote or keyless access

system, the seat adjusts automatically to one of the two preset positions.

• DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.

• DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.

The driver’s seat moves rearward depending

on the set seating position once you.

• Stop the vehicle.

• Put the transmission in

(P.

• Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.

• Open the driver’s door.

Once the power mode is in the ACCESSORY

position, the driver’s seat moves forward to

the DRIVER 1 or 2 preset position.

1Driving Position Memory System

Using the driver information interface or audio/

information screen, you can disable the automatic

seat adjustment function.

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

The driver's seat easy exit feature can be turned ON/

OFF.

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

System Operation

The system will not operate if:

• The transmission is out of the (P position.

• Either memory button is pressed while the seat is in

motion.

• The seat position is adjusted while in operation.

• Either of the memorized positions is set fully to the

rear.

The system may not recognize a key if:

• The key is in close proximity to a cell phone or other

wireless device.

• Both keys are in the vehicle at the same time.

• The Driving Position Memory System is disabled in

customized features.

• Opening driver’s door without fully grabbing the

door handle.

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

DRIVER 1

DRIVER 2

* Not available on all models

235

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System

Controls

1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the

driver’s seat to the desired position.

2. Press the SET button.

u The SET button indicator light will come

on.

3. Press memory button

(1 or (2 within five

seconds of pressing the SET button.

u You will hear the beeper, and the SET

button indicator light goes off.

1. Put the transmission into

(P.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Press a memory button (

(1 or (2).

The seat will automatically move to the

memorized position.

■

Storing a Position in Memory

1Storing a Position in Memory

After you press the SET button, the storing operation

will be canceled when:

• You do not press the memory button within five

seconds.

• You readjust the seat position before the double-

beep.

• You set the power mode to any position except

ON.

SET Button

Indicator

light

Memory

Button 2

Memory

Button 1

■

Recalling the Stored Position

1Recalling the Stored Position

The seat will stop moving if you:

• Press the SET button, or a memory button ((1 or

(2).

• Adjust the seat position.

• Put the transmission into a position other than (P.

Memory

Button 1

Memory

Button 2

236

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

Controls

Adjusting the Steering Wheel

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you

can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.

1. While the vehicle is stopped, push the

steering wheel adjustment lever down.

u The steering wheel adjustment lever is

under the steering column.

2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and

in or out.

u Make sure you can see the instrument

panel gauges and indicators.

3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up

to lock the steering wheel in position.

u After adjusting the position, make sure

you have securely locked the steering

wheel in place by trying to move it up,

down, in, and out.

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

WARNING

Adjusting the steering wheel position while

driving may cause you to lose control of the

vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the

vehicle is stopped.

To lock

Lever

To adjust

237

Controls

Mirrors

Interior Rearview Mirror

Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving

position.

Flip the tab to switch the position.

The night position will help to reduce the glare

from headlights behind you when driving

after dark.

When you are driving after dark, the

automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces

the glare from headlights behind you. Press

the AUTO button to turn this function on and

off. When activated, the AUTO indicator

comes on.

■

Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions

1Mirrors

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and

adjusted for best visibility.

Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.

2 Front Seats P. 239

Tab

Daytime

Position

Night

Position

■

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

Auto Button

Sensor

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

The auto dimming function cancels when the

transmission is in

(R.

* Not available on all models

238

uuMirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

Controls

Power Door Mirrors

You can adjust the door mirrors when the

power mode is in ON.

■

Mirror position adjustment

L/R selector switch: Select the left or right

mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the

switch to the center position.

Mirror position adjustment switch: Press

the switch left, right, up, or down to move the

mirror.

Adjustment

Switch

Selector

Switch

239

Continued

Controls

Seats

Front Seats

Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible

while allowing you to maintain full control of

the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,

well back in the seat and be able to

adequately press the pedals without leaning

forward, and grip the steering wheel

comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be

adjusted in a similar manner so that it is as far

back from the front airbag in the dashboard

as possible.

■

Adjusting the front power seat(s)

1Seats

Always make seat adjustments before driving.

1Front Seats

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow

at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the

steering wheel and the chest.

WARNING

Sitting too close to a front airbag can result

in serious injury or death if the front

airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the front

airbags as possible while maintaining

control of the vehicle.

Move back.

Allow sufficient

space.

■

Adjusting the Seat Positions

Horizontal Position

Adjustment

Height Adjustment

(Driver’s seat only)

Seat-back

Angle

Adjustment

Driver’s seat is shown.

240

uuSeatsuFront Seats

Controls

■

Lumbar support adjustment switch

(Driver’s seat only)

Press the front: To increase the entire

lumbar support.

Press the rear: To decrease the entire lumbar

support.

Lumbar

Support

Adjustment

Switch

Continued

241

uuSeatsuFront Seats

Controls

■

Adjusting the front manual seat

1Adjusting the front manual seat

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and

forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Seat-back Angle

Adjustment

Pull up the lever to

change the angle.

Horizontal Position

Adjustment

Pull up on the bar to move the

seat, then release the bar.

* Not available on all models

uuSeatsuFront Seats

242

Controls

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable,

upright position, leaving ample space

between your chest and the airbag cover in

the center of the steering wheel.

The front seat passenger should also adjust

their seat-back to a comfortable, upright

position.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the

occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the

chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a

seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

■

Adjusting the Seat-Backs

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the

seat-back and your back.

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag

operation.

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering

wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend

that you investigate whether some type of adaptive

equipment may help.

WARNING

Reclining the seat-back too far can result in

serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,

and sit well back in the seat.

243

uuSeatsuRear Seats

Continued

Controls

Rear Seats

■

Adjusting the Seat Positions

1Rear Seats

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and

forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Lever

Seat-back Angle Adjustment

Pull up the lever to change the angle.

uuSeatsuRear Seats

244

Controls

The rear seats can be folded down separately to allow for additional storage space.

1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the

latch plate into the slot on the side of the

anchor buckle.

2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the

ceiling.

2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 58

3. Lower the rear seat head restraint to its

lowest position. Put the armrest back into

the seat-back.

4. Pull the release lever and fold down the

seat.

When returning the seat-back to its original

position, push it firmly back. Also, make sure

all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front

of the seat-back.

Make sure the seat-back, head restraints, and

seat cushion are securely latched back into

place before driving.

■

Folding Down the Rear Seats

Latch

Plate

Anchor Buckle

1Folding Down the Rear Seats

The rear seat-backs can be folded down to

accommodate bulkier items in the cargo area.

Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and

floor before you fold down the rear seat.

Make sure all items in the cargo area or items

extending to the rear seats are properly

secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have

to brake hard.

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press

against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the

weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work

improperly.

2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 78

Release Lever

245

uuSeatsuRear Seat Reminder

Controls

Rear Seat Reminder

This feature alerts you of the possible presence of passengers or items in the rear

seats before you exit the vehicle. It activates when the power mode is set to VEHICLE

OFF if the rear doors were opened shortly before or after the power mode was set

to ON.

A reminder appears on the driver information

interface and an alert will sound when the

power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.

1Rear Seat Reminder

When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF, the

reminder comes on briefly, then the function is

deactivated.

The reminder will not work if the power mode has

not been set to ON within 10 minutes of operating

the rear doors.

The system does not detect passengers in the rear

seats. Instead, it can detect when a rear door is

opened and closed, indicating that there may be

something in the rear seats.

You can turn off the notification setting.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

246

uuSeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position

Controls

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their

seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their

seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the power

system is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if

an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or

sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly

increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or

fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an

inflating front airbag.

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

WARNING

Sitting improperly or out of position can

result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat,

with your feet on the floor.

247

uuSeatsuHead Restraints

Continued

Controls

Head Restraints

Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.

Head restraints are most effective for

protection against whiplash and other rear-

impact crash injuries when the center of the

back of the occupant’s head rests against the

center of the restraint. The tops of the

occupant’s ears should be level with the

center height of the restraint.

To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.

To lower the head restraint: Push it down

while pressing the release button.

■

Adjusting the Front Head Restraint Positions

1Head Restraints

In order for the head restraint system to work

properly:

• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or

from the restraint legs.

• Do not place any objects between an occupant and

the seat-back.

• Install each restraint in its proper location.

The front seat head restraints cannot be removed.

WARNING

Improperly positioning head restraints

reduces their effectiveness and increases

the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and

positioned properly before driving.

Position head in the center of the

head restraint.

uuSeatsuHead Restraints

248

Controls

A passenger sitting in the rear seat should

adjust the height of their head restraint to an

appropriate position before the vehicle begins

moving.

To raise the head restraint:

Pull it upward.

To lower the head restraint:

Push it down while pressing the release

button.

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.

To remove a head restraint:

Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then, push the release button and pull the

restraint up and out.

To reinstall a head restraint:

Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height

while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked

in position.

■

Changing the Rear Seat Head Restraint Positions

■

Removing and Reinstalling the Rear Seat Head Restraints

1Removing and Reinstalling the Rear Seat Head Restraints

WARNING

Failure to reinstall or correctly reinstall the

head restraints can result in severe injury

during a crash.

Always replace the head restraints before

driving.

249

uuSeatsuArmrest

Controls

Armrest

The console compartment can be used as an

armrest.

Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.

■

Using the Front Seat Armrest

■

Using the Rear Seat Armrest

250

Controls

Interior Convenience Items

Interior Lights

■

The interior lights come on regardless of

whether the doors are open or closed.

■

Door activated

The interior lights come on in the following

situations:

• When any doors are opened.

• When the driver's door is unlocked.

• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE

OFF.

■

OFF

The interior lights remain off regardless of

whether the doors are open or closed.

■

Interior Light Switches

1Interior Light Switches

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade

out and turn off about 30 seconds after the doors are

closed.

The lights turn off after about 30 seconds in the

following situations:

• When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open

it.

• When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF but

do not open a door.

You can change the interior lights dimming time.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

The interior lights turn off immediately in the

following situations:

• When you lock the driver’s door.

• When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY

mode.

• When you set the power mode to ON.

To avoid draining the battery, do not leave the

interior light on for an extended length of time when

the power system is off.

If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF

mode, the interior lights turn off after about 15

minutes.

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Door Activated

Position

Door Activated

Position

OFF

Front

Rear

* Not available on all models

251

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

Controls

The map lights can be turned on and off by

pressing the switches.

The cargo area lights come on when you open

the tailgate.

■

Map Light Switches

1Map Light Switches

When the front interior light switch is in the door

activated position and any door is open, the map

light will not turn off when you press the switches.

■

Cargo Area Lights

252

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

Controls

Storage Items

Pull the handle to open the glove box.

You can lock the glove box with the built-in

key.

■

Glove Box

1Glove Box

WARNING

An open glove box can cause serious injury

to your passenger in a crash, even if the

passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while

driving.

Glove Box

Handle

To Lock

253

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

Continued

Controls

Pull the handle to open the console

compartment.

■

Removable tray

The tray can be removed and stored on the

bottom surface of the armrest.

■

Console Compartment

* Not available on all models

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

254

Controls

■

Front seat beverage holders

Located in the console between the front

seats.

■

Rear seat beverage holders

Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat

beverage holders.

■

Beverage Holders

1Beverage Holders

NOTICE

Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting,

and electrical components in the interior.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.

Hot liquid can scald you.

255

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

Continued

Controls

■

Door beverage holders

Located on both of the front and rear door

side pockets.

Front seat

Rear seat

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

256

Controls

There is a coat hook on the rear left grab

handle.

The tie-down anchors on the cargo area floor

can be used to install a net for securing items.

■

Coat Hook

1Coat Hook

The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy

items.

■

Tie-down Anchors

1Tie-down Anchors

Do not let anyone access items in the cargo area

while driving. Loose items can cause injury if you have

to brake hard.

Anchor

257

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

Controls

The cargo hooks on the both of the cargo area

can be used to hang a light items.

To open the sunglasses holder, push and

release the indent. To close, push it again until

it latches.

You can store eyeglasses and other small

items in this holder.

■

Cargo Hooks

1Cargo Hooks

Do not hang a large object or an object that weighs

more than 6 lbs (3 kg) on the side cargo hooks.

Hanging heavy or large objects may damage the

hooks.

Hook

■

Sunglasses Holder

1Sunglasses Holder

Keep the holder closed while driving except when

accessing stored items.

Push

258

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

Controls

Other Interior Convenience Items

The accessory power sockets can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY

or ON.

■

Console panel

Open the cover to use it.

■

Cargo area

Open the cover to use it.

■

Accessory Power Sockets

1Accessory Power Sockets

NOTICE

Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter

element. This can overheat the accessory power

socket.

The accessory power socket is designed to supply

power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180

watts (15 amps) or less.

To prevent battery drain, only use the accessory

power socket with the power system on.

When the accessory power socket is not in use, close

the cover to prevent any small foreign objects from

getting into the accessory power socket.

Continued

259

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

Controls

To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

Charge any devices compatible with Qi wireless charging on the area indicated by

the mark as follows:

1. To turn the system on and off, press and

hold the (power) button.

u When the system is activated, the green

indicator light comes on.

2. Place the device you want to charge on the

charging area.

u The system will automatically start

charging the device, and the amber

indicator light will come on.

u Make sure that the device is compatible

with the system and placed with the

chargeable side in the center of the

charging area.

3. When charging is completed, the green

indicator light will come on.

u Depending on the device, the amber

indicator light will stay on.

■

Wireless Charger

1Wireless Charger

RF Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation

exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment.

This device and its antenna must not be co-located or

operating in conjunction with any other antenna or

transmitter.

This equipment complies with ISED RF Radiation

exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment.

This device and its antenna must not be co-located or

operating in conjunction with any other antenna or

transmitter.

In order to use safely:

• Remove any metal objects from the charge pad

before charging a device.

• Do not open the charger case.

• Do not use the charger if it malfunctions. Contact

your dealer.

If the charger interferes with radio communications,

attempt to correct the interference:

• Press and hold the switch on the charger for a few

seconds to turn off the charger.

appears on the audio/information screen when

the device is being charged by the wireless charger.

U.S. models

Canadian models

Green Indicator

Charging Area

(Power) Button

Amber Indicator

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

260

Controls

■

When charging does not start

Perform one of the solutions in the following table.

Indicator Cause Solution

Green

Amber

Blinking

simulta-

neously

There is an obstacle(s) between

the charging area and the

device.

Remove the

obstacle(s).

The device is not within the

charging area.

Pick up and reset the

device to the center of

the charging area

where is located.

The temperature of the wireless

charger pad increases.

Temporarily suspend

charging the device.

Wait for the

temperature to drop

and attempt to charge

the device again.

Amber Blinking The wireless charger is faulty.

Contact a dealer for

repairs.

1Wireless Charger

This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the

system for a long time when the power system is off.

This may weaken the 12-volt battery, making it

difficult to turn the power system on.

When using the wireless charger, check the user’s

manual that came with the compatible device you

want to charge.

CAUTION

Metal objects between the charge pad and

the device to be charged will get hot and

can burn you.

• Always remove foreign objects from the

charge pad before charging the device.

• Be sure the surface is clear of dust and

other debris before charging.

• Do not spill liquids (e.g., water, drinks,

etc.) on the charger and the device.

• Do not use oil, grease, alcohol, benzine,

or thinner for cleaning the charge pad.

• Do not cover the system with towels,

clothing, or other objects while charging

etc.

• Avoid spraying aerosols which may come

in contact with the charge pad surface.

Continued

261

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

Controls

1Wireless Charger

The wireless charger can support up to 15 W, but the

charging rate varies based on the device and other

conditions.

NOTICE

Do not place any magnetic recording media or

precision machines within the charging area while

charging.

The data on your cards such as credit cards can be

lost because of the magnetic effect. Also, precision

machines such as watches can be affected.

“Qi” and marks are the registered trademarks

owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).

In the following cases, charging may stop or not start:

• The device is already fully charged.

• The temperature of the device is extremely high

while charging.

• You are at a place that emits strong

electromagnetic waves or noises, such as a TV

station, electric power plant, or gas station.

• The device has a cover, case, or accessories which

are not compatible with wireless charging.

A device may not charge if the size or shape of its

chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the

charging area.

Not all devices are compatible with the system.

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

262

Controls

1Wireless Charger

During the charging phase, it is normal for the

charging area and device to heat up.

Charging may be briefly interrupted when:

• All the doors and the tailgate are closed

- to avoid interference with the proper functioning

of the keyless access system.

• The position of the device is altered.

Do not charge more than one device at a time on a

charging area.

If the device becomes too hot and its battery

protection function activates, it may charge

extremely slowly or no longer charge.

The temperature at which the battery protection

function activates depends on the device.

Continued

263

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

Controls

The heated steering wheel can be used when

the power mode is in ON.

Press the button on the lower side of the

steering wheel.

When a comfortable temperature is reached,

press the button again to turn it off.

The heated steering wheel is turned off every

time you activate the power system, even if

you turned it on the last time you drove the

vehicle.

■

Heated Steering Wheel

1Heated Steering Wheel

Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously

when the power system is off. Under such conditions,

the 12-volt battery may be weakened, making the

power system difficult to start.

* Not available on all models

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

264

Controls

The seat heaters can be used when the power

mode is in ON.

Press the seat heater button:

Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)

Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)

Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on)

Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)

When the power mode is turned on after it is

turned off, the previous setting is maintained.

Press the AUTO button:

Both the air conditioner and seat temperature

will automatically change to the setting most

suitable to the ambient environment.

u When any seat heater button is pressed,

settings will switch to manual mode.

■

Front Seat Heaters

1Front Seat Heaters

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the

power system is off. Under such conditions, the 12-

volt battery may be weakened, making the power

system difficult to start.

After a certain period of time, the strength setting for

the front seat heaters will automatically be reduced

by one level at a time until the front seat heaters shut

off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior

environment.

As time passes, the set temperature will fall, and

eventually the seat heater will shut off.

The seat heater may turn on if sensors detect weight

on the passenger seat due to luggage, etc.

WARNING

Heat induced burns are possible when

using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense

temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,

lower limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or

with sensitive skin should not use seat

heaters.

AUTO Button

Continued

265

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

Controls

The seat heaters can be used when the power

mode is in ON.

There is no heater in the rear center seating

position.

Press the seat heater button:

Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)

Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)

Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on)

Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)

1Front Seat Heaters

To prevent automatic activation, you can turn off

automatic climate control for the front seat.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

■

Rear Seat Heaters

Canadian models

1Rear Seat Heaters

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the

power system is off. Under such conditions, the 12-

volt battery may be weakened, making the power

system difficult to start.

After a certain period of time, the strength setting for

the rear seat heaters will automatically be reduced by

one level at a time until the rear seat heaters shut off.

The elapsed time varies according to the interior

environment.

WARNING

Heat induced burns are possible when

using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense

temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,

lower limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or

with sensitive skin should not use seat

heaters.

* Not available on all models

266

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

Controls

The sun visor can be extended horizontally.

■

Sun Visor

267

Continued

Controls

Climate Control System

Using Automatic Climate Control

The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.

The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers

the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.

Use the system when the power system is on.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side

temperature control dial.

3. Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.

1Using Automatic Climate Control

If any buttons are pressed while using the climate

control system in auto, the function of the button

that was pressed will take priority.

The auto button indicator will go off, but functions

unrelated to the button that was pressed will be

controlled automatically.

To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the

fan may not start immediately when the AUTO

button is pressed.

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down

more rapidly by partially opening the windows,

turning the system on auto, and setting the

temperature to low. Change the fresh air mode to

recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.

When you set the temperature to the lower or upper

limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

For directions on the proper handling of the front

seat heaters, refer to the following page.

2 Front Seat Heaters P. 264

Dashboard

vents

Dashboard

and floor

vents

Floor vents Floor and

defroster

vents

AUTO Button

SYNC Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

(Recirculation) Button

(ON/OFF) Button

Fan Control Dial

Driver’s Side

Temperature

Control Dial

Passenger’s Side

Temperature

Control Dial

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

268

Controls

■

Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes

Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on

environmental conditions.

Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through

the system.

Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in

fresh air mode in normal situations.

1Using Automatic Climate Control

Pressing the button switches the climate control

system between on and off. When turned on, the

system returns to your last selection.

While ECON mode is active, the climate control

system may have reduced cooling performance.

Continued

269

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

Controls

Pressing the (windshield defroster) button

turns the air conditioning system on and

automatically switches the system to fresh air

mode.

Press the button again to turn off. The

system returns to the previous settings.

■

To rapidly defrost the windows

1. Press the button.

2. Press the button.

■

Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view

through all the windows before driving.

Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower

limit.

When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the

windshield may fog up.

1To rapidly defrost the windows

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air

mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,

the windows may fog up from humidity. This

impedes visibility.

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

270

Controls

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver’s side and the passenger’s

side in synchronization mode.

1. Press the SYNC button.

u The system switches to synchronization mode.

2. Adjust the temperature using the driver’s side temperature control dial.

Press the SYNC button or adjust the interior temperature using the passenger’s side

temperature control dial to return to dual mode.

■

Synchronization Mode

1Synchronization Mode

When the system is in dual mode, the driver’s side

temperature and the passenger’s side temperature

can be set separately.

When you press the button, the system changes

to synchronization mode.

Driver’s Side

Temperature

Control Dial

Passenger’s

Side

Temperature

Control Dial

SYNC Button

271

uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Controls

Automatic Climate Control Sensors

The automatic climate control system is

equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill

any liquid on them.

Sensor

272

This page intentionally left blank.

273

Features

This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System.................................... 274

9" Color Touchscreen ....................... 280

9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-

in ...................................................... 304

Audio Error Messages ...................... 367

General Information on the Audio

System ............................................. 369

Customized Features................ 389, 396

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 417, 430

274

Features

Audio System

About Your Audio System

The audio system features AM/FM radio. It can also play USB flash drives, iPod,

iPhone, and Bluetooth® devices.

You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the

remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface.

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

1About Your Audio System

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of

handheld electronic devices while operating a

vehicle.

Remote Controls

Device

USB Flash

Drive

275

uuAudio SystemuUSB Ports

Features

USB Ports

■

USB charging/connector port ( )

The USB port is for charging devices, playing

audio files, and connecting compatible

phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

u To prevent any potential issues, be sure

to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning

Connector for Apple CarPlay. USB cables

should be certified by USB-IF to be

compliant with USB 2.0 Standard.

■

USB charging port on the front panel

()

The USB port is only for charging devices.

u You cannot play music even if you have

connected music players to it.

■

USB charging port on the back of the

console compartment ( )

The USB ports (3.0A) are only for charging

devices.

u The USB port can supply up to 3.0A of

power. It does not output 3.0A unless

requested by the device.

u You cannot play music even if you have

connected music players to it.

1USB Ports

• Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the

vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may

damage it.

• We recommend that you use a USB cable if you are

attaching a USB flash drive to the USB port.

• Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a

hub.

• Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard

disk drive, as the device or your files may be

damaged.

• We recommend backing up your data before using

the device in your vehicle.

• Displayed messages may vary depending on the

device model and software version.

• Some devices may not work even if they are

connected to the USB ports.

Supplementary information about USB Charging:

• The USB ports on the front panel support USB

Power Delivery.

• USB standard output

When using 1 port: 5V/3A(15W), 9V/3A(27W),

15V/3A(45W), 20V/3A(60W)

When using both ports: 5V/3A(15W), 9V/3A(27W),

20V/2.25A(45W), Max 60W in total

For amperage details, read the operating manual of

the device that needs to be charged.

• The USB port also supports PPS (Programmable

Power Supply). PPS 5.0V-21V (Max 60W).

• Charging may not start or may operate slowly

depending on the connected devices and cables.

Using only one port while not connecting anything

(including cables) to the other port may solve the

issue.

On the front panel

On the back of the console

compartment

276

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection

Features

Audio System Theft Protection

The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as

when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system

may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.

■

Reactivating the audio system

1. Set the power mode to ON.

2. Turn on the audio system.

3. Press and hold the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob for more than two

seconds.

u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a

connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize

the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.

277

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Continued

Features

Audio Remote Controls

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on

the driver information interface.

VOL

(+/VOL(- (Volume) Switch

Press Up: To increase the volume.

Press Down: To decrease the volume.

1Audio Remote Controls

Some modes appear only when an appropriate

device or medium is used.

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,

some functions may not be available.

Press the (Home) button to go back to the home

screen of the driver information interface.

Models with A-type meter

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Left Selector Wheel

VOL

(+/VOL(- (Volume) Switch

Models with A-type meter

(Home) Button

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Left Selector

Wheel

VOL(+/VOL(-

(Volume) Switch

Models with B-type meter

278

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Features

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

• When listening to the radio

Press : To select the next preset radio station.

Press : To select the previous preset radio station.

Press and hold : To select the next strong station.

Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.

• When listening to a wired connection, USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio, or

Smartphone Connection

u Depending on a connected device, operations may be changed.

Press : To skip to the next song.

Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.

• When listening to a USB flash drive

Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.

Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.

Left Selector Wheel

• When selecting the audio mode

Press the (home) button, then roll up or down to select Audio on the driver

information interface, and then press the left selector wheel.

Roll up or down:

To cycle through the audio modes, roll up or down and then press the left selector

wheel:

FM/AM/iPod/USB/Bluetooth/Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

u Depending on a connected device, the displayed modes may be changed.

Models with A-type meter

279

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Features

Left Selector Wheel

Roll up or down:

To cycle through the audio modes, roll up or down and then press the left selector

wheel:

Back/Phone/FM/AM/USB/Bluetooth/Apple CarPlay/Android Auto/Alexa

/Customize

display

u Depending on a connected device, the displayed modes may be changed.

Models with B-type meter

* Not available on all models

280

Features

9" Color Touchscreen

To use the audio system, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

(Home) button:Press to go to the home

screen.

2 Using the audio/information screen

P. 282

(Connect) button:Press to operate

Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob:

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

VOL/ AUDIO

(Volume/Power) Knob

(Connect) Button

(Home) Button

281

uu9" Color TouchscreenuStart Up

Features

Start Up

The 9" Color Touchscreen starts automatically when you set the power mode to

ACCESSORY or ON. At start-up, the following screen about the disclaimer will be

displayed.

Select OK.

u If you want to change the settings for

data upload, select Data Sharing with

Honda, then select the ON/OFF settings

on the Data Sharing Setting screen.

u If you do not select OK within 5 seconds,

the home screen will be displayed.

Reboot Audio

You can reboot the audio system.

1. Press and hold the button for a certain period of time.

2. Select Reboot.

1Start Up

Data Sharing with Honda

Enable: Data communication available.

Disable: Data communication unavailable.

282

uu9" Color TouchscreenuAudio/Information Screen

Features

Audio/Information Screen

Displays the audio status. From this display, you can go to various setup options.

■

Using the audio/information screen

Press the button to go to the home screen.

Select the following zones or icons on the home screen.

■

Audio zone

Displays the audio information for each.

2 Playing AM/FM Radio P. 286

2 Music Playback via Wired Connection P. 289

2 Music Playback via USB Flash Drive P. 291

2 Playing Bluetooth® Audio P. 293

■

Phone zone

Displays the HFL information.

2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 417

■

Switching the Display

1Using the audio/information screen

Touchscreen operation

• Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping

and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions.

• Some items may be grayed-out during driving to

reduce the potential for distraction.

• You can select them when the vehicle is stopped.

• Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen

response.

You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.

2 Customized Features P. 389

Audio Zone

Phone Zone

283

uu9" Color TouchscreenuAudio/Information Screen

Features

■

Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Displays Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

2 Apple CarPlay P. 296

2 Android Auto

P. 300

■

General Settings

Enters the customizing menu screen.

2 Customized Features P. 389

1. Select the system status bar.

u The status area appears.

2. Select an item to see the details.

3. Select Back to close the area.

■

Status Bar

System Status Icon

Status Area

284

uu9" Color TouchscreenuAdjusting the Sound

Features

Adjusting the Sound

1. Press the button.

2. Select Sound.

Select an item from the following choices:

• Bass / Mid / Treble: Bass, Midrange, Treble

• Balance / Fader: Balance, Fader

• Speed Volume Compensation: Sets the amount of volume increase.

1Adjusting the Sound

The Speed Volume Compensation (SVC) adjusts the

volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go

faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down,

audio volume decreases.

You can also adjust the sound by the following

procedure.

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select Sound.

To reset each setting for Bass / Mid / Treble and

Balance / Fader, select Reset to Default on each

setting screen.

285

uu9" Color TouchscreenuDisplay Setup

Features

Display Setup

You can change the brightness of the audio/information screen.

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select Display.

4. Select the setting you want.

u Select Display Off to turn off the screen. To turn on the screen, press the

or button.

Select Audio Source in the home screen, then select an icon on the source list to

switch the audio source.

■

Changing the Screen Brightness

■

Selecting an Audio Source

1Changing the Screen Brightness

You can adjust the screen brightness by sliding or

tapping on the brightness bar.

You can change the Contrast and Black Level

settings in the same manner.

To reset the settings, select Reset to Default.

Select Audio Source

Source Select Screen

Source List Icons

286

uu9" Color TouchscreenuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Features

Playing AM/FM Radio

Seek Icons

Select or to search the

selected band up or down for a station

with a strong signal.

Menu Icon

Select to display the menu screen.

Audio/Information Screen

Tune Icon

Select to use the on-screen keyboard for entering

the radio frequency directly.

Favorite Station Icons

Tune the radio frequency for a favorite station.

Select and hold the icon to store the station. Swipe

left or right on the screen to move to the next or

previous favorite station list.

Scan Icon

Select to scan each station with a

strong signal.

Continued

287

uu9" Color TouchscreenuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Features

To store a station:

1. Tune to the selected station.

2. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station.

u Selecting Press & Hold to Add can set a new preset station.

■

Editing a favorite station

Select and hold the desired favorite station icon.

The following items are available:

u Remove Favorite: Delete the favorite station icon from the favorite station

list.

u Replace with (number): Replace the stored favorite station icon.

Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.

To turn off scan, select Stop.

■

Favorite Station

■

Scan

1Playing AM/FM Radio

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode

Roll the left selector wheel or select Audio Source

on the screen.

2 Audio Remote Controls P. 277

You can store 12 AM/FM stations to Favorites.

uu9" Color TouchscreenuPlaying AM/FM Radio

288

Features

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■

To find an RDS station from Station List

1. Select Station List while listening to an FM station.

2. Select the station.

■

Update List

Updates your available station list at any time.

1. Select Station List while listening to an FM station.

2. Select Refresh.

Change the FM settings.

1. Select Menu.

2. Select an option.

• Sound Settings: Adjust the sound.

2 Adjusting the Sound P. 284

• Program Service Name: Sets whether to display the program service name.

■

Radio Data System (RDS)

■

FM Settings

1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS

automatically turns on, and the frequency display

changes to the station name. When the signal of that

station becomes weak, the display continues to show

the last displayed station name.

289

uu9" Color TouchscreenuMusic Playback via Wired Connection

Continued

Features

Music Playback via Wired Connection

Using your USB connector, connect the device to the USB port, then select Audio

Source and USB icon.

2 USB Ports P. 275

Cover Art Audio/Information Screen

Track Icons

Select or

to change

songs.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a song.

Shuffle Icon

Select to play all songs in the

current category in random order.

Play/Pause Icon

Repeat Icon

Select to repeat the current song.

Music Library Icon

Select to display the music search

screen.

uu9" Color TouchscreenuMusic Playback via Wired Connection

290

Features

1. Select Music Library.

2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists, Albums, etc.).

3. Continue making selections until you find the song of your choice.

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.

■

Shuffle/Repeat

Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of your

preference.

Play Mode Menu Items

Shuffle

Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off.

Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in a selected list in random order.

Repeat

Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.

Repeat all: Repeats all songs.

Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.

■

How to Select a Song from the Device Music List

■

How to Select a Play Mode

1Music Playback via Wired Connection

Available operating functions vary on models or

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle’s audio system.

While an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay,

audio files on the iPhone can only be played using

Apple CarPlay.

291

uu9" Color TouchscreenuMusic Playback via USB Flash Drive

Continued

Features

Music Playback via USB Flash Drive

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,

WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select Audio Source and USB

icon.

2 USB Ports P. 275

Audio/Information Screen

Play/Pause Icon

Track Icons

Select or to change files.

Select and hold to move rapidly within a

file.

Random Icon

Select to play all files in the current

category in random order.

Repeat Icon

Select to repeat the current file.

Music Library Icon

Select to display the music search screen.

uu9" Color TouchscreenuMusic Playback via USB Flash Drive

292

Features

1. Select Music Library.

2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists, Albums, etc.).

3. Continue making selections until you find the song of your choice.

You can select repeat and random modes when playing a song.

■

Random/Repeat

Select random or repeat icon.

Play Mode Menu Items

Random

Random All Tracks: Plays all songs in random order.

Repeat

Repeat track: Repeats the current song.

■

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

■

How to Select a Play Mode

1Music Playback via USB Flash Drive

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

2 General Information on the Audio System

P. 369

WMA files protected by digital rights management

(DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays File Error, and then skips

to the next song.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 367

293

uu9" Color TouchscreenuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Continued

Features

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible

phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 422

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming

audio capabilities are compatible with the system.

For a list of compatible phones:

• U.S.: Visit https://mygarage.honda.com/s/honda-

handsfreelink-compatibility-check, or call 1-888-

528-7876.

• Canada: Call 1-855-490-7351.

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data

device functions while driving.

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.

When there is more than one paired phone in the

vehicle, the system automatically connects to the

prioritized phone. You can assign priority to a phone

in the Priority Device menu.

2 HFL Menus P. 420

If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or

Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone is

unavailable.

2 Phone Setup P. 422

Audio/Information Screen

Bluetooth Indicator

ppears when your phone

is connected to HFL.

Play/Pause Icon

Track Icons

Select o

r to

change track.

Repeat Icon

Select to repeat the current track.

Shuffle Icon

Select to play all tracks in the

current category in random order.

Music Library Icon

Select to display the

music search screen.

uu9" Color TouchscreenuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

294

Features

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL.

2. Select Audio Source and then Bluetooth Audio.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-compatible phone, which is not

compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.

■

To pause or resume a file

Select the play/pause icon.

1. Select Music Library.

2. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).

3. Select an item.

u Select an item repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen to is displayed.

■

To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

■

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your

phone. If so, follow the phone manufacturer's

operating instructions.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing

from your phone.

If any audio device is connected to the USB port, you

may need to select Audio Source to select

Bluetooth Audio.

You can change the connected phone by selecting

Change Devices.

2 Phone Setup P. 422

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,

some or all of the categories may not be displayed.

295

uu9" Color TouchscreenuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Features

You can select the repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.

■

Shuffle/Repeat

Repeatedly select shuffle or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of your

preference.

Play Mode Menu Items

Shuffle

Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off.

Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in a selected list in random order.

Repeat

Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.

Repeat all: Repeats all songs.

Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.

■

How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,

some or all of the functions may not be displayed.

296

uu9" Color TouchscreenuApple CarPlay

Features

Apple CarPlay

If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the front USB

port or wirelessly, and the (Connect) button is pressed or the Apple Carplay

icon is selected, you can operate Apple CarPlay on the audio/information screen.

2 USB Ports P. 275

For details on available applications, please refer to the Apple CarPlay homepage.

Apps displayed on your screen can be changed with your iPhone.

Select the Honda icon on the Apple CarPlay menu screen to go back to the home

screen.

1Apple CarPlay

Only iPhone 6S or newer versions with iOS 10.0.2 or

later are compatible with Apple CarPlay.

We recommend using the latest OS.

Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to

Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible

apps.

When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is

not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. Music playback or calls

will be handled exclusively through Apple CarPlay. If

you want to make a call with Bluetooth®

HandsFreeLink®, turn Apple CarPlay OFF. Other

previously paired phones can also use the Bluetooth®

Audio.

2 Phone Setup P. 422

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the

same time.

For details on countries and regions where Apple

CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining

to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of

certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle

location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to

enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need

to consent to the sharing of this information on the

audio/information screen.

Apple CarPlay Icon

■

Apple CarPlay Menu

Continued

297

uu9" Color TouchscreenuApple CarPlay

Features

1Apple CarPlay

Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements &

Limitations

Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an

active cellular connection and data plan. Your

carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,

and other technology integral to providing Apple

CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised

governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or

cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services.

Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or

guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or

functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are

compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple

homepage for information on compatible apps.

uu9" Color TouchscreenuApple CarPlay

298

Features

1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port using the USB cable.

2 USB Ports P. 275

u The confirmation screen will be displayed.

2. Select Yes.

u If you do not want to connect Apple CarPlay, select No.

You may change the consent settings under the Connections menu.

1. Press the button.

2. Select Apple CarPlay.

3. Select Connect New Device.

4. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 422

5. Select Yes.

u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,

accept to connect.

■

Connecting Apple CarPlay Using the USB Cable

■

Connecting Apple CarPlay Wirelessly

1Apple CarPlay

Only initialize Apple CarPlay when you are safely

parked.

When Apple CarPlay first detects your iPhone, you

will need to set up your iPhone. Refer to the

instruction manual that came with your iPhone.

You can use the following procedure to disconnect or

delete the devices connecting Apple CarPlay:

Press the button  Select General Settings 

Connections  Select device.

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information

transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is

governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and

Apple’s Privacy Policy.

299

uu9" Color TouchscreenuApple CarPlay

Features

Press the (talk) button to activate Siri.

Press again to deactivate Siri.

■

Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri

1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri

Below are examples of questions and commands for

Siri.

• What movies are playing today?

• Call dad at work.

• What song is this?

• How’s the weather tomorrow?

• Read my latest email.

• Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.

For more information, please visit

www.apple.com/ios/siri.

300

uu9" Color TouchscreenuAndroid Auto

Features

Android Auto

If you connect an Android

phone to the system, via USB port or wirelessly, and the

(Connect) button is pressed or the Android Auto icon is selected, you can

operate Android Auto on the audio/information screen.

We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using

Android Auto.

2 USB Ports P. 275

1Android Auto

We recommend that you update Android OS to the

latest version when using Android Auto.

Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is

connected to Android Auto.

To use Android Auto on a smartphone with Android

9.0 (Pie) or earlier, you need to download the

Android Auto app from Google Play to your

smartphone.

Park in a safe place before connecting your Android

phone to Android Auto and when launching any

compatible apps.

When your Android phone is connected to Android

Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other

previously paired phones can stream audio via

Bluetooth® while Android Auto is connected.

2 Phone Setup P. 422

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the

same time.

Android and Android Auto are trademarks of Google

LLC.

Android Auto Icon

Continued

301

uu9" Color TouchscreenuAndroid Auto

Features

For details on available applications, please refer to the Android Auto homepage.

Apps displayed on your screen can be changed with your smartphone.

Select the Honda icon on the Android Auto menu screen to go back to the home

screen.

■

Android Auto Menu

1Android Auto

For details on countries and regions where Android

Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to

function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.

Screens may differ depending on the version of the

Android Auto app you are using.

Android Auto Operating Requirements &

Limitations

Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone

with an active mobile connection and data plan. Your

carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,

and other technology integral to providing Android

Auto functionality, as well as new or revised

governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or

cessation of Android Auto functionality and services.

Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or

guarantee of future Android Auto performance or

functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are

compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android

Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.

uu9" Color TouchscreenuAndroid Auto

302

Features

1. Connect the Android phone to the USB port using the USB cable.

2 USB Ports P. 275

u The confirmation screen will be displayed.

2. Select Yes.

u If you do not want to connect Android Auto, select No.

You may change the consent settings under the Connections menu.

1. Press the button.

2. Select Android Auto.

3. Select Connect New Device.

4. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 422

5. Select Yes.

u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto

connection, accept to connect.

■

Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable

■

Connecting Android Auto Wirelessly

1Android Auto

Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely

parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone,

you will need to set up your phone so that auto

pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual

that came with your phone.

You can use the following procedure to disconnect or

delete the devices connecting Android Auto after you

have completed the initial setup:

Press the button  Select General Settings 

Connections  Select device.

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information

transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is

governed by Google’s Privacy Policy.

303

uu9" Color TouchscreenuAndroid Auto

Features

Press the (talk) button to talk to Google Assistant.

Press again to deactivate voice recognition.

■

Operating Android Auto with Google Assistant

1Operating Android Auto with Google Assistant

Below are examples of commands you can give with

voice recognition:

• Reply to text.

• Call my wife.

• Navigate to Honda.

• Play my music.

• Send a text message to my wife.

• Call flower shop.

For more information, please refer to the Android

Auto homepage.

304

Features

9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

(Home) button: Press to go to the home

screen.

2 Audio/Information Screen P. 308

(Back) button: Press to go back to the

previous screen.

/ (Seek/Track) buttons: Press to

change songs.

(Home) Button

(Back) Button

/ (Seek/Track) Buttons

305

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuStart Up

Continued

Features

Start Up

The 9 inch Color Touchscreen starts automatically when you set the power mode to

ACCESSORY or ON. At start-up, the following screen about the data upload will be

displayed. When adding a new user, entry of user information is required at start-up.

Select OK.

u If you want to change the settings for

data upload, select Data Sharing with

Honda, then select the ON/OFF settings

on the Data Sharing with Honda

screen.

u If you do not select OK, the system will

automatically be switched to the home

screen, or the top screen of the last

executed application, after a certain

period of time.

u If there is no registered device, select OK

and the Bluetooth® pairing screen will be

displayed.

u If you check the box with Do not show

this again, this screen will not be

displayed.

1Start Up

Data Sharing with Honda

ON: Data communication available.

OFF: Data communication unavailable.

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuStart Up

306

Features

■

Registering new user information

1. Read the disclaimer screen and select OK.

2. Select Set up profile.

u If you want to change the language,

select English (United States).

3. Name your profile and select Next.

4. You can view the terms and conditions of

the Google Services agreement.

5. On the System-wide permission Settings

screen, select the data you give permission

for the system to access, and select Accept.

6. Select Done for now.

u By selecting Profile lock, you can set

security settings for your profile.

u By selecting Set up Google Assistant

and apps, you can customize settings

related to Google.

An internet connection is required to

change settings.

2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 343

1Registering new user information

Refer to the Google Homepage for more information

on set up profile.

Additional information for Google Apps and Services

is available at mygarage.honda.com (US) or honda.ca

(Canada).

Specifications may be changed via system updates,

etc.

307

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuReboot Audio

Features

Reboot Audio

You can reboot the audio system.

1. Press and hold the button for a certain period of time.

2. Select Reboot.

u If Safe Mode is selected, the audio system will be rebooted with third-party

applications turned off.

After the power mode has been turned off once, third-party applications can

be used again.

308

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAudio/Information Screen

Features

Audio/Information Screen

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various

setup options.

Press the button to go to the home screen.

Select the following icons on the home screen or after selecting All Apps.

1Audio/Information Screen

Touchscreen Operation

• Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping,

and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions.

• Some items may be grayed-out during driving to

reduce the potential for distraction.

• You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or

use voice commands.

• Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen

response.

You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.

2 Customized Features P. 396

Mode Change Switch Bar

You can also select any application from the Mode

Change Switch bar. Shortcuts can be edited to open

other applications; however, Google Assistant or

Alexa cannot be edited.

2 To shortcut icons on the home screen

P. 318

You can change Google Assistant to Alexa.

2 Customized Features P. 396

• Phone

2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 430

All Apps

Mode Change Switch Bar

Status Bar

Continued

309

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAudio/Information Screen

Features

■

Trip Computer

Displays the trip computer information.

• Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.

• Trip A/Trip B tab: Displays information for the current and three previous drives.

The information is stored every time you reset Trip A/B.

To reset the Trip A/B, select Menu, then select Delete Trip History.

To change the setting of how to reset Trip A/B, select Menu, then select “Trip A”

Reset Timing or “Trip B” Reset Timing.

■

Compass

Displays the compass screen.

1Audio/Information Screen

• Clock

2 Customized Features P. 396

• System Updates

2 System Updates P. 320

• FM/AM/USB/Bluetooth Audio

2 Playing AM/FM Radio P. 326

2 Music Playback via Wired Connection

P. 330

2 Music Playback via USB Flash Drive

P. 332

2 Playing Bluetooth® Audio P. 334

• Profile Settings

2 User Information P. 361

• Vehicle Settings

2 Customized Features P. 396

• General Settings

2 Customized Features P. 396

• Google Assistant / Google Maps / Google Play

2 Google built-in P. 357

• HondaLink

2 HondaLink® P. 337

• Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

2 Apple CarPlay P. 347

2 Android Auto

P. 352

• Wi-Fi Hotspot

2 AT&T Hotspot P. 345

• Alexa

2 Alexa Built-In P. 325

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAudio/Information Screen

310

Features

■

Power Flow

Displays the motor and engine power flow, average fuel economy, and range.

1Audio/Information Screen

The power flow monitor is also displayed on the

driver information interface.

2 Power Flow Monitor P. 156

Engine ON

Engine OFF

Engine

Average Fuel Economy

(Current Drive)

Power Flow Driving Range

High Voltage Battery Level Gauge

Continued

311

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAudio/Information Screen

Features

Displays the power flow, indicating what is supplying power to the vehicle and/or

charging the battery.

u The indicator for the power transmission appears in blue, and for the battery

charging operation, in green.

Display Color of indicators Vehicle’s Condition

Blue

Power is being supplied by

the High Voltage battery

and the engine-driven

generator.

Blue

Power is being supplied by

the High Voltage battery.

Blue

Power is being supplied by

the engine-driven

generator.

1Audio/Information Screen

While the engine provides propulsion directly to the

wheels, the icon appears in the power flow

monitor on the screen.

312

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAudio/Information Screen

Features

Display Color of indicators Vehicle’s Condition

Blue and Green

Power is being supplied

directly by the engine and

the High Voltage battery is

being charged by the

engine-driven generator.

Green

The High Voltage battery is

being charged through

regenerative braking.

Green

The High Voltage battery is

being charged by the

engine-driven generator.

Continued

313

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAudio/Information Screen

Features

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■

Import wallpaper

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.

2 USB Ports P. 275

2. Select Clock.

3. Select Menu.

4. Select Clock Faces.

5. Select Add More.

6. Import a desired picture.

u Multiple pictures can be imported at the same time.

7. Select Select Files.

8. Select Add Files.

u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.

■

Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

The wallpaper you set up on Clock Faces cannot be

displayed on the driver information interface.

• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be

in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a

folder cannot be imported.

• The file name must be fewer than 64 bytes.

• The file format of the image that can be imported

is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).

• Up to 21 pictures can be imported.

• The maximum image size is 4,096 × 2,304 pixels. If

the image size is less, the image is displayed in the

middle of the screen with the extra area appearing

in black.

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAudio/Information Screen

314

Features

■

Select wallpaper

1. Select Clock.

2. Select Menu.

3. Select Clock Faces.

4. Select a desired wallpaper.

5. Select Save.

u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.

■

Delete wallpaper

1. Select Clock.

2. Select Menu.

3. Select Clock Faces.

4. Select Delete Files.

5. Select Select Files to Delete.

u If you want to delete all wallpapers, select Delete All Files.

6. Select a desired wallpaper.

7. Select Select Files.

8. Select Delete Files.

u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.

1Delete wallpaper

You cannot delete the initially imported wallpapers.

Continued

315

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAudio/Information Screen

Features

■

To move to the next screen

Swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.

■

Home Screen

1Home Screen

You can add up to six pages to the home screen.

Press the button to go directly back to the first

page of the home screen from any page.

Current page position

Swipe

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAudio/Information Screen

316

Features

■

To add/remove app icons on the home screen

App icons can be added or deleted on the home screen.

1. Press the button.

2. Select All Apps.

3. Select an app to check or uncheck it.

1To add/remove app icons on the home screen

Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the

home screen.

Continued

317

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAudio/Information Screen

Features

■

To move/remove icons on the home screen

You can change location on the home screen.

1. Select and hold an icon.

u The screen switches to the customization

screen.

2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want

it to be.

u Drag and drop the icon to Hide to

remove from the home screen.

3. Press the or button.

u The screen will return to the home

screen.

1To move/remove icons on the home screen

Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the

home screen.

Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

Hide

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAudio/Information Screen

318

Features

■

To shortcut icons on the home screen

You can store up to five icons on the mode change switch bar.

1. Select and hold an icon.

u The screen switches to the customization

screen.

2. Select Edit Shortcuts.

3. Drag and drop the icon you want to store to

the left of the home screen.

u The icon is stored as a shortcut.

4. Press the or button.

u The screen will return to the home

screen.

1To shortcut icons on the home screen

Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

You can also store icons on the mode change switch

bar by the following procedure.

1. Select and hold an icon.

2. Select Edit Shortcuts.

3. Select an icon.

4. Select shortcut location.

5. Press the or button.

Drag and drop to

preset icon.

319

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAudio/Information Screen

Features

Shows the indicators of the information for the vehicle, connected phones, etc. in

the header area. You can confirm the detail information shown in the status area by

selecting the status bar.

■

Status Bar

Status Area

320

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuSystem Updates

Features

System Updates

System Updates uses the telematics control unit (TCU) or Wi-Fi communication

capability to operate.

When an update for your system becomes available, a screen prompting you to

update your system will be displayed on the audio/information screen.

1. Select System Updates.

2. Select Agree to Update while power

mode is OFF to give permission for the

update.

u The installation progress screen will be

displayed.

u While the power mode is set to OFF, an

update started notification appears for a

few seconds.

3. The next time the power mode is turned to

ON, the system update results screen will be

displayed.

u System update results can also be viewed

from SettingsUpdate History within

System Update.

■

Performing System Updates

1System Updates

If new software has been released, perform an

update as soon as possible.

If a system update fails, please consult a dealer.

System updates that change specifications may result

in some discrepancies with the information in this

owner’s manual. For the most up-to-date

information, please refer to the Honda homepage.

Certain features may not be available during system

updates.

1Performing System Updates

Make sure your vehicle is stopped in a safe location

before starting a system update.

321

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuSystem Updates

Features

You can change or confirm system update settings.

1. Press the button.

2. Select System Updates.

3. Select Settings.

4. Select the option you want to change or confirm.

The following settings can be set.

• Automatic Update

• Automatic Download

• Control Unit Versions

• Connection Setup

2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 343

• Update History

■

System Updates Settings

1Performing System Updates

If you have pressed Agree to Update while power

mode is OFF on the agreement screen when an

update is being offered, or Automatic Update

set to ON, and the update started notification is not

displayed even though the power mode is set to OFF,

it may be due to one or more of the conditions listed

below. For more information, consult a dealer.

• The shift position is not in (P.

• The vehicle is providing one or more emergency

notifications.

• The 12-Volt Battery is depleted.

If the system is being updated via Wi-Fi, you will not

be able to use this feature in some situations based

on Wi-Fi authentication methods.

For example:

• The connection requires you to log in.

• Agreement to terms of use is required.

If you are disconnected from the network, the

download will be stopped.

Download is resumed when a new network

connection is established.

1System Updates Settings

To perform a System Update via Wi-Fi, check the box

next to your desired network in

General Settings  Connections  Wi-Fi 

Options  Add Network or Saved Networks.

* Not available on all models

322

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAdjusting the Sound

Features

Adjusting the Sound

1. Press the button.

2. Select an audio source icon.

3. Select Menu.

4. Select Sound Settings.

5. Select the setting you want.

3. Select Sound.

4. Select the setting you want.

Select an item from the following choices:

• Bass / Mid / Treble: Treble, Midrange, Bass

• Audio Zones & Balance / Fader: Driver Only, Front Only, Rear Only, Full Vehicle,

Balance, Fader

• Bose Centerpoint Surround: Turns the Bose Centerpoint ON and OFF.

• Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation: Sets the amount of volume increase.

1Adjusting the Sound

The Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation adjusts

the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you

go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down,

audio volume decreases.

You can also adjust the sound by the following

procedure.

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select Sound.

To reset each setting for Bass / Mid / Treble, Audio

Zones & Balance / Fader select Reset to Default in

each setting item.

AM/FM Radio mode

USB Audio, Bluetooth Audio mode

323

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuDisplay Setup

Continued

Features

Display Setup

You can change the brightness of the audio/information screen.

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select Display.

4. Select the setting you want.

■

Changing the Screen Brightness

1Changing the Screen Brightness

You can change the Contrast and Black Level

settings in the same manner.

To reset the settings, select Reset to Default.

324

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuDisplay Setup

Features

You can select an audio source on the audio/information screen.

1. Select application icon of the audio/

information screen.

2. Select an icon on the source list to switch

the audio source.

■

Selecting an Audio Source

Application Icon

Source List

325

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAlexa Built-In

Features

Alexa Built-In

You can talk to Amazon Alexa through the audio system. With Alexa, you can:

• Stream music

• Check the weather

• Answer questions

• Control smart home devices

• And more with supported Alexa skills

Once you sign into Alexa in the vehicle, you can use Alexa without opening the app.

You can trigger Alexa by doing any of the following:

• Say the wake word “Alexa” from anywhere in the audio system.

• Press the (Talk) button on the steering wheel.

• Select the Alexa icon from inside the app.

■

Using Alexa

1Alexa Built-In

Support Resources

For more information or client support:

• Call Honda Customer Services at 1 (800) 999-1009.

• Go to https://www.amazon.com/alexasupport.

You can change the voice recognition from Alexa to

Google Assistant.

2 Customized Features P. 396

1Using Alexa

Troubleshooting Tips:

• Make sure you are connected to Alexa via Wi-Fi

network, AT&T Vehicle Data Plan, or HondaLink.

• If using an AT&T Vehicle Data Plan, confirm that

your subscription is active.

• Make sure you are logged into your Amazon

account.

Deleting Your Alexa Settings from the Vehicle

For your privacy and security, if you transfer the

vehicle to a third-party, reset all vehicle settings to

default and delete all personal data. Also, remove the

vehicle from the list of devices in your phone’s Alexa

app.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 416

326

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Features

Playing AM/FM Radio

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

Seek Buttons

Press or to search the selected band up

or down for a station with a strong signal.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and

off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Menu Icon

Select whether to tune to HD

Radio

automatically.

Audio/Information Screen

Tune Icon

Select to use the on-screen keyboard for entering

the radio frequency directly.

Favorite Station Icons

Tune the radio frequency for a favorite station.

Select and hold the icon to store the station. Swipe

left or right on the screen to move to the next or

previous favorite station list.

Scan Icon

Select to scan each station with a

strong signal.

Continued

327

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Features

To add a station:

1. Tune to the selected station.

2. Select and hold Press & Hold to Add.

■

Editing a favorite station

Select and hold the desired favorite station icon.

The following items are available:

• Remove Favorite: Delete the favorite station icon from the favorite station list.

• Replace with (number): Replace the stored favorite station icon.

• Add to Home: Add the shortcut icon of the stored favorite station to the home

screen.

Lists the strongest stations on the selected band.

1. Select Station List to display a list.

2. Select the station.

■

Manual update

Updates your available station list at any time.

1. Select Station List to display a list.

2. Select Refresh.

■

Favorite Station

■

Station List

1Favorite Station

Switching the Audio Mode

Roll the left selector wheel or select the audio source

icon on the screen.

2 Audio Remote Controls P. 277

You can store 12 AM/FM stations into preset

memory.

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuPlaying AM/FM Radio

328

Features

Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn

off scan, select Stop or press the button.

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■

To find an RDS station from Station List

1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.

2. Select the station.

■

Manual update

Updates your available station list at any time.

1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.

2. Select Refresh.

■

Scan

■

Radio Data System (RDS)

1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS

automatically turns on, and the frequency display

changes to the station name. However, when the

signals of that station become weak, the display

changes from the station name to the frequency.

329

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Features

Displays the subchannel list when an HD Radio

station is selected while listening to

an FM station.

1. Select Station List.

2. Select the channel number.

Changes the AM/FM settings.

1. Select Menu.

2. Select HD Radio.

3. Select Auto or Analog Only.

■

HD Subchannel

■

AM/FM Settings

330

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuMusic Playback via Wired Connection

Features

Music Playback via Wired Connection

Using your USB connector, connect the device to the USB port, then select the USB

icon.

2 USB Ports P. 275

Cover Art Audio/Information Screen

(Back) Button

Pres

s to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Track Buttons

Press or to change songs.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.

Track Icons

Select or to change

songs.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a song.

Shuffle Icon

Select to play all songs in the

current category in random order.

Play/Pause Icon

Repeat Icon

Select to repeat the current song.

Music Library Icon

Select to display the music search

screen.

331

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuMusic Playback via Wired Connection

Features

1. Select Music Library.

2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists, Albums, etc.).

3. Continue making selections until you find the song of your choice.

You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.

■

Shuffle/Repeat

Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of your

preference.

Play Mode Menu Items

Shuffle

Shuffle off: Shuffle mode turns off.

Shuffle all songs: Plays all available songs in a selected list in random order.

Repeat

Repeat off: Repeat mode turns off.

Repeat song: Repeats the current song.

Repeat all: Repeats all available songs in a selected list.

■

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

■

How to Select a Play Mode

1Music Playback via Wired Connection

Available operating functions vary on models or

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle’s audio system.

If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the USB

source will be unavailable and audio files on the

phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay.

332

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuMusic Playback via USB Flash Drive

Features

Music Playback via USB Flash Drive

Your audio system reads and plays audio files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,

WMA, AAC

, FLAC or WAV format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB icon.

2 USB Ports P. 275

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

Track Buttons

Press or to change files.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a track.

Audio/Information Screen

(Back) Button

Press to

go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Play/Pause Icon

Track Icons

Select or to change files.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a file.

Random Icon

Select to play all files in the current

category in random order.

Repeat Icon

Select to repeat the current file.

Music Library Icon

Select to display the music search

screen.

333

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuMusic Playback via USB Flash Drive

Features

1. Select Music Library.

2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists, Albums, etc.).

3. Continue making selections until you find the song of your choice.

You can select random and repeat modes when playing a file.

■

Random/Repeat

Repeatedly select the random or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of

your preference.

Play Mode Menu Items

Random

Random off: Random mode turns off.

Random all tracks: Plays all files in random order.

Random in folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order.

Repeat

Repeat off: Repeat mode turns off.

Repeat track: Repeats the current playing file.

Repeat in folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.

■

How to Select a File from the Music Search List

■

How to Select a Play Mode

1Music Playback via USB Flash Drive

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

2 General Information on the Audio System

P. 369

WMA files protected by digital rights management

(DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays The selected file cannot

be played on this system, then skips to the next

file.

334

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Features

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible

phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 435

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming

audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For

a list of compatible phones:

• U.S.: Visit https://mygarage.honda.com/s/honda-

handsfreelink-compatibility-check, or call 1-888-

528-7876.

• Canada: Call 1-855-490-7351.

It may be illegal to perform some data device

functions while driving.

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.

When there is more than one paired phone in the

vehicle, the system automatically connects to the

prioritized phone. You can assign priority to a phone

in the Bluetooth® device list.

2 Phone Setup P. 435

The connected phone for Bluetooth® Audio can be

different.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,

there may be a delay before the system begins to play.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track

may not appear correctly.

Some functions may not be available on some devices.

If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or

Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone

will be unavailable.

2 Phone Setup P. 435

Audio/Information Screen

Bluetooth Indic

ator

Appears when your phone

is connected to HFL.

(Back) Button

Press to go back

to the previous

display.

VOL/ AUDIO

(Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio

system on and off.

Turn to adjust the

volume.

Play/Pause Icon

Track Icons

Select o

r to

change track.

Select and hold to

move rapidly within a

track.

Repeat Icon

Select to repeat the current track.

Shuffle Icon

Select to play all tracks in the

current category in random order.

Music Library Icon

Select to display the

music search screen.

Continued

335

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Features

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to the system.

2 Phone Setup P. 435

2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-compatible phone, which is not

compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.

■

To play or pause a file

Select the play/pause icon.

1. Select Music Library.

2. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).

3. Select an item.

u The selection begins playing.

■

To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

■

Searching for Music

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your

phone. If so, follow the phone manufacturer's

operating instructions.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing

from your phone.

You can change the connected phone by selecting

Change Devices.

2 Phone Setup P. 435

1Searching for Music

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,

some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

336

Features

You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.

■

Shuffle/Repeat

Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of your

preference.

Play Mode Menu Items

Shuffle

Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off.

Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in a selected list in random order.

Repeat

Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.

Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.

Repeat Group: Repeats the current group.

Repeat all: Repeats all songs.

■

How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,

some or all of the functions may not be displayed.

337

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in uHondaLink®

Continued

Features

HondaLink®

HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect

your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.

2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 343

2 Phone Setup P. 435

Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink®.

■

To enable the HondaLink® service

You must consent to location sharing to enable the HondaLink® service.

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select Privacy.

4. Select Data Sharing with Honda.

5. Select Enable.

■

To Connect to HondaLink®

1HondaLink®

If your vehicle has a telematics control unit (TCU), you

can use HondaLink® without connecting the phone.

The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most

iPhone and Android phones.

If the system is connected to the HondaLink® connect

app through Bluetooth® and another Bluetooth®

audio device is connected, the Bluetooth®

connection to the HondaLink® connect app will be

severed.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and

smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data

subscription package.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or

Android Auto, HondaLink® can only be connected

through Wi-Fi.

338

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuHondaLink®

Features

■

To link with HondaLink®

You can see the connection guide screen after

launching HondaLink® when there is no

connection to a network. If you do not need

this guide, select check-box and select OK.

■

Vehicle Notifications

Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.

■

Connect Honda

Displays tips for vehicle usage and gets support via roadside assistance or the

customer service center.

■

HondaLink® Menu

339

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in uHondaLink®

Features

■

Connect

Displays your phone connection status and HondaLink® subscription status.

You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation.

1. A notification appears and notifies you of a new message in the header area.

2. Select the system status icon to see the messages.

u A notification is continuously displayed in the header area until the new

message is read.

3. Select a new message to open.

■

Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips

340

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuHondaLink® Service

Features

HondaLink® Service

Is a subscription-based service that provides convenient features such as voice

communication in case of emergency, online security, and one-on-one operator

assistance.

1HondaLink® Service

HondaLink® also provides services you can operate

from the Internet or your smartphone.

To subscribe to HondaLink®, or to get more

information about all of its features, contact a Honda

dealer, or visit:

U.S.: https://mygarage.honda.com/s/hondalink-

marketing

Canada: https://www.honda.ca/en/hondalink

(English)

https://www.honda.ca/fr/hondalink (French)

Continued

341

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuHondaLink® Service

Features

Your subscribed telematics service provider can track your vehicle’s location,

remotely lock or unlock doors, and help you find your vehicle.

To use these features, you need your user ID and personal identification number

(PIN).

■

Stolen vehicle tracking

This feature searches and tracks down your vehicle position even if it is on the move.

If you believe that your vehicle has been stolen, contact the police as well as the

provider.

■

Remote door lock/unlock

The provider can remotely lock or unlock doors upon your request.

■

Vehicle finder

This feature is convenient to use when trying to locate your vehicle in large areas,

such as a crowded parking lot. If you cannot locate your vehicle after using the

remote transmitter’s answer back function, you can contact your provider, which

can flash your vehicle's exterior lights, sound the horn, and send your vehicle's

location via web/Smartphone.

■

Security alarm notification

If the security system in your vehicle detects an abnormal condition, such as

someone tampering with the lock on your vehicle, the provider notifies you by email.

■

Security Features

1Security Features

The contact information of your provider, your user

ID, and PIN will be given when you subscribe to

HondaLink®. If you forget any of the above, contact a

Honda dealer, or visit:

U.S.: https://mygarage.honda.com/s/hondalink-

marketing

Canada: https://www.honda.ca/en/hondalink

(English)

https://www.honda.ca/fr/hondalink (French)

You can also activate the remote door lock/unlock

and vehicle finder features from the Internet or by

using your smartphone app. Ask a dealer, or visit:

U.S.: https://mygarage.honda.com/s/hondalink-

marketing

Canada: https://www.honda.ca/en/hondalink

(English)

https://www.honda.ca/fr/hondalink (French)

1Vehicle finder

The lights will stop flashing and horn will stop

sounding under the following:

• When 30 seconds have elapsed.

• You unlock the doors using the remote transmitter.

• You unlock the doors using the keyless access

system.

• You unlock the doors using the built-in key.

• The power mode is set to ACCESSORY or ON.

342

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuHondaLink® Service

Features

Your subscribed telematics service provider can check your vehicle’s condition.

■

Virtual Dashboard

You can remotely check the mileage, fuel range, and oil life in your app.

■

Remote start and stop the engine

You can remotely turn the power system on and off using your app the same way

as the keyless remote.

■

Geofence Alert

You can receive a notification anytime your vehicle enters or leaves a region set by

you.

■

Speed Alert

You can receive a notification when your vehicle has exceeded a speed limit set by

you.

■

Personal Data Wipe

You can reset your audio and navigation system settings to factory defaults with the

app.

■

Wi-Fi hotspot

Vehicle provides a 4G LTE network environment as a Wi-Fi router to use a tablet or

a smartphone in your vehicle.

■

Convenient Features

343

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuWi-Fi Connection

Continued

Features

Wi-Fi Connection

This vehicle is equipped with Wi-Fi connectivity. You can connect to an external Wi-

Fi hotspot or communication device. In addition, the vehicle can be used by other

communication devices as a Wi-Fi hotspot via the telematics unit (TCU).

• Connect the vehicle to a Wi-Fi hotspot

• Use Wi-Fi inside the vehicle

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select Connections.

4. Select Wi-Fi.

u To change the Wi-Fi settings, select Options.

5. Select the access point you want to connect to the system.

6. Select Connect.

u When the connection is successful, the status text Connected next to the

network name is displayed on the list.

7. Press the button to go back to the home screen.

■

Connect the vehicle to a Wi-Fi hotspot

1Wi-Fi Connection

Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are registered trademarks of

Wi-Fi Alliance®.

1Connect the vehicle to a Wi-Fi hotspot

You cannot go through the setting procedure while

the vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to set the

audio system in Wi-Fi mode.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and

smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data

subscription package.

Check your phone manual to find out if the phone

has Wi-Fi connectivity.

You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or

off with the icon on the Wi-Fi network list.

Transmission speed and others will not be displayed

on this screen.

In case of Wi-Fi connection with your phone, make

sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point

(tethering) mode.

When you select Access Point, you can set up a

Wireless connection from the phone to the vehicle.

2 Customized Features P. 396

344

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuWi-Fi Connection

Features

You can set the network as a Wi-Fi hotspot of this audio system.

Use the following steps to set up.

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select Connections.

4. Select Data Connection Options.

5. Select Set Up Wi-Fi.

6. Select Options.

7. Select Add Network.

The following options are available for the setup.

• Network SSID: Set this network name.

• Security: Set a password to be required when connecting a Wi-Fi device to this

network.

■

Use Wi-Fi inside the vehicle

345

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAT&T Hotspot

Continued

Features

AT&T Hotspot

If you have subscribed to AT&T hotspot services, your vehicle will provide data to

connect your mobile devices to the Internet. You can use the AT&T Hotspot app to

turn vehicle data on/off and monitor data usage left on your subscription.

a Hotspot Enable

Turn AT&T Hotspot on/off.

b Data Usage Bar

Check the current status of your data plan. This Usage Bar will show your current

plan and how much data remains on your plan. Subscription plans for AT&T Hotspot

can be added/modified at:

■

AT&T Hotspot Menu

1AT&T Hotspot

To use AT&T Hotspot services, your vehicle must be

subscribed to a data plan. If your vehicle is not

subscribed to a data plan, you can add vehicle data

services at:

U.S.: www.att.com/honda

Canada: https://myvehicle.att.com/#/honda/

learn?country=CA&language=en (English)

https://myvehicle.att.com/#/honda/

learn?country=CA&language=fr (French)

Hotspot network SSID and password can be changed

in the Settings of the AT&T Hotspot app. Settings

cannot be accessed while driving. Park in a safe place

to adjust Hotspot settings.

Alternatively, you can use your mobile hotspot to

connect the vehicle and other mobile devices to the

Internet.

2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 343

U.S.: www.att.com/honda

Canada: https://myvehicle.att.com/#/honda/learn?country=CA&language=en

(English)

https://myvehicle.att.com/#/honda/learn?country=CA&language=fr

(French)

346

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAT&T Hotspot

Features

c Plan Info

Shows your current AT&T subscription plan for the vehicle.

d Settings

Shows the current network SSID and password for vehicle Hotspot. Settings can be

changed while the vehicle is not in motion.

e Help

347

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuApple CarPlay

Continued

Features

Apple CarPlay

If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the USB port

or wirelessly, and the Apple CarPlay icon is selected, you can use Apple CarPlay on

the audio/information screen.

2 USB Ports P. 275

1Apple CarPlay

Only iPhone 5s or newer versions with iOS 11.3 or

later are compatible with Apple CarPlay.

We recommend using the latest OS.

Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to

Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible

apps.

While connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible

to use the Bluetooth® Audio or HandsFreeLink®.

Music playback or calls are only made through Apple

CarPlay. Other previously paired phones can use the

Bluetooth® Audio.

When using Hands Free, you can only control it with

Siri.

2 Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri P. 351

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the

same time.

For details on countries and regions where Apple

CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining

to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of

certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle

location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to

enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need

to consent to the sharing of this information on the

audio/information screen.

Apple CarPlay Icon

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuApple CarPlay

348

Features

The following items are only representative examples. Applications displayed on the

screen can be changed on your iPhone.

• Phone

Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voicemail.

• Messages

Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.

• Music

Play music stored on your iPhone.

• Maps

Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your

iPhone.

Only one navigation system (Google built-in or Apple CarPlay) can give directions

at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set

on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will

direct you to your destination.

• Honda

Select the Honda icon to go back to the home screen.

■

Apple CarPlay Menu

1Apple CarPlay

Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements &

Limitations

Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an

active cellular connection and data plan. Your

carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,

and other technology integral to providing Apple

CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised

governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or

cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services.

Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or

guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or

functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are

compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple

homepage for information on compatible apps.

Continued

349

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuApple CarPlay

Features

1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port using the USB cable.

2 USB Ports P. 275

u The confirmation screen will be displayed.

2. Select Yes.

u If you do not allow this consent, select No.

You may change the consent settings under the Connections settings menu.

■

Connecting Apple CarPlay Using the USB Cable to the USB

Port

1Apple CarPlay

Only initialize Apple CarPlay when you are safely

parked.

When Apple CarPlay first detects your iPhone, you

will need to set up your iPhone. Refer to the

instruction manual that came with your iPhone.

You can also use the method below to set up Apple

CarPlay:

Press the button  General Settings 

Connections  Manage Device Connections 

Select Device.

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information

transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is

governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and

Apple’s Privacy Policy.

Wireless Apple CarPlay and AT&T Hotspot cannot be

used at the same time. When using Apple CarPlay

and AT&T Hotspot at the same time, connect to

Apple CarPlay with a USB cable.

If there is a problem with the connection of your

iPhone, an error code will be displayed.

2 Customized Features P. 396

350

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuApple CarPlay

Features

■

Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the home screen

1. Press the button.

2. Select Apple CarPlay.

3. Select Connect Phone or Search for Device.

4. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 435

5. Select Yes.

■

Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the Bluetooth® device list

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select Connections.

4. Select Manage Device Connections.

5. Select + Connect New Device.

6. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 435

7. Select Yes.

u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,

accept to connect.

■

Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly with the steering wheel

1. Press and hold the (Talk) button on the steering wheel.

2. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 435

3. Select Yes.

u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,

accept to connect.

■

Connect Apple CarPlay Wirelessly

351

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuApple CarPlay

Features

Press and hold the (Talk) button to activate Siri.

Press again to deactivate Siri.

Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

■

Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri

1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri

Below are examples of questions and commands for

Siri:

• What movies are playing today?

• Call dad at work.

• What song is this?

• How’s the weather tomorrow?

• Read my latest email.

• Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.

For more information, please visit

www.apple.com/ios/siri.

352

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAndroid Auto

Features

Android Auto

When you connect an Android

phone to the audio system via the USB port or

wirelessly, and the Android Auto icon is selected, you can use Android Auto on the

audio/information screen.

We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using

Android Auto.

2 USB Ports P. 275

2 Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port P. 354

1Android Auto

We recommend that you update Android OS to the

latest version when using Android Auto.

Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is

connected to Android Auto.

To use Android Auto on a smartphone with Android

9.0 (Pie) or earlier, you need to download the

Android Auto app from Google Play to your

smartphone.

Park in a safe place before connecting your Android

phone to Android Auto and when launching any

compatible apps.

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the

same time.

Android and Android Auto are trademarks of Google

LLC.

To use each of Android Auto's features, to get

started just say, "Hey Google" while the Android

Auto screen is displayed, or press and hold the

(talk) button to activate Google Assistant.

2 Operating Android Auto with Voice

Control P. 356

Android Auto Icon

Continued

353

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAndroid Auto

Features

The following items are only representative examples. Applications displayed on the

screen can be changed on your smartphone.

• Maps

Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your

Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard

entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other

inputs.

Only one navigation system (Google built-in or Android Auto) can give directions

at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set

on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will

direct you to your destination.

The audio/information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your

destination.

• Phone

Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.

• Honda

Select the Honda icon to go back to the home screen.

■

Android Auto Menu

1Android Auto

For details on countries and regions where Android

Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to

function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.

Screens may differ depending on the version of the

Android Auto app you are using.

Android Auto Operating Requirements &

Limitations

Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone

with an active cellular connection and data plan.

Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,

and other technology integral to providing Android

Auto functionality, as well as new or revised

governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or

cessation of Android Auto functionality and services.

Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or

guarantee of future Android Auto performance or

functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are

compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android

Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAndroid Auto

354

Features

1. Connect the Android phone to the USB port using the USB cable.

2 USB Ports P. 275

u The confirmation screen will be displayed.

2. Select Yes.

u If you do not allow this consent, select No.

You may change the consent settings under the Connections settings menu.

■

Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the home screen

1. Press the button.

2. Select Android Auto.

3. Select Connect Phone or Search for Device.

4. Pair the device to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 435

5. Select Yes.

■

Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB

Port

■

Connect Android Auto Wirelessly

1Android Auto

Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely

parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone,

you will need to set up your phone so that auto

pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual

that came with your phone.

You can use the method below to change Android

Auto settings after you have completed the initial

setup:

Press the button  General Settings 

Connections  Manage Device Connections 

Select Device.

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information

transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is

governed by Google’s Privacy Policy.

Wireless Android Auto and AT&T Hotspot cannot be

used at the same time. When using Android Auto

and AT&T Hotspot at the same time, connect to

Android Auto with a USB cable.

If there is a problem with the connection of your

smartphone, an error code will be displayed.

2 Customized Features P. 396

355

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAndroid Auto

Continued

Features

■

Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the Bluetooth® device list

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select Connections.

4. Select Manage Device Connections.

5. Select + Connect New Device.

6. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 435

7. Select Yes.

u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto

connection, accept to connect.

■

Connect Android Auto wirelessly with the steering wheel

1. Press and hold the (Talk) button on the steering wheel.

2. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 435

3. Select Yes.

u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto

connection, accept to connect.

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuAndroid Auto

356

Features

Press and hold the (Talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice.

Press and release to activate the standard voice recognition system.

■

Operating Android Auto with Voice Control

1Operating Android Auto with Voice Control

Below are examples of commands you can give with

voice recognition:

• Reply to text.

• Call my wife.

• Navigate to Honda.

• Play my music.

• Send a text message to my wife.

• Call flower shop.

For more information, please refer to the Android

Auto homepage.

357

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuGoogle built-in

Continued

Features

Google built-in

You can use the features available with Google built-in on the audio screen.

a Google Assistant

b Google Maps

c Google Play

1Google built-in

• Google, Google Play, and Google Maps are

trademarks of Google LLC.

• For more details on Google Apps and Services’

features, visit the Google homepage.

Additional information for Google Apps and Services

is available at mygarage.honda.com (US) or honda.ca

(Canada).

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuGoogle built-in

358

Features

You can operate features with hands-free help from Google Assistant.

You can activate Google Assistant by:

• Using wake words, "Hey Google."

• Pressing the (Talk) button on the steering wheel.

• Selecting the Google Assistant icon on the audio/information screen.

■

Google Assistant

1Google Assistant

Below are example voice commands that can be used

once Google Assistant is activated:

• Play music.

• Play radio.

Refer to the Google homepage for more information.

You can customize language and other settings

regarding Google Assistant.

2 Customized Features P. 396

Continued

359

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuGoogle built-in

Features

Google Maps helps you reach your next destination faster with real-time traffic info,

automatic rerouting, and voice control.

■

Google Maps

1Google Maps

Operate when vehicle is stopped in a safe location.

When your Google Account is linked with a valid

user, destinations stored on other devices (home,

work, favorites, previous searches, etc.) can be

displayed. When the device and the vehicle are

logged into the same Google Account, changing

information on the device will change it on Google

Maps as well.

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuGoogle built-in

360

Features

Download your favorite apps on Google Play.

■

Google Play

1Google Play

The vehicle must be stopped in order to download an

app.

Operate when vehicle is stopped in a safe location.

361

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuUser Information

Continued

Features

User Information

a User Information

1User Information

This feature cannot be used while driving.

You can customize settings individually for each user.

2 Profile Settings P. 365

You can customize security settings for each user. If

you have forgotten security settings, you will need to

delete the user and create a new one. If you have

forgotten security settings for the Owner user, please

contact a dealer or Honda Customer Services.

2 Customer Service Information P. 733

Certain features are unavailable when using a newly

created user or the Guest user.

362

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuUser Information

Features

You can add and change users, as well as customize user settings.

By registering a user, you can personalize your vehicle settings.

You can select a user when the audio/information screen loads, even when the

doors are open or unlocked.

By linking your profile with your Google Account, you can enjoy a more personalized

experience with Google built-in. For more assistance on account linking, visit the

Google homepage.

Continued

363

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuUser Information

Features

1. Select User Info.

u You can also add users by selecting

Profile Settings.

2 Profile Settings P. 365

u You can add users even when the doors

are open or unlocked.

2. Select Change Profile.

3. Select Add profile.

4. Enter User Information.

2 Start Up P. 305

1. Select User Info.

u You can also change users by selecting Profile Settings.

2 Profile Settings P. 365

u You can switch users even when the doors are open or unlocked.

2. Select Change Profile.

3. Select the User you want to use.

■

Registering a User

1Registering a User

Profile can be changed only when the vehicle is

parked.

You can add up to 4 users other than the Owner user

and the Guest user.

When you add a user, the audio/information screen is

loaded under that user.

■

Switching Users

1Switching Users

Profile can be changed only when the vehicle is

parked.

Users with customized security settings can restrict

screen operations by selecting the Screen Lock

shortcut.

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuUser Information

364

Features

1. Select Profile Settings.

2. Select Manage Profile.

3. Select Profiles & accounts.

4. Select Delete your profile.

■

Deleting Users

1Deleting Users

When the profile currently being used is deleted, the

audio/information screen is loaded under the Guest

user.

While using the Owner user, you can delete other

users via General Settings  Advanced Settings.

2 Customized Features P. 396

Depending on the version of your OS, the steps for

deleting a user may differ from the instructions on

this page. Follow the on-screen prompts.

365

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuProfile Settings

Continued

Features

Profile Settings

You can add and change users, as well as customize user settings.

Press the button, select Profile Settings, and select a setting item you want.

a Profile Settings

■

How to Customize the Profile Settings

1Profile Settings

When you customize settings:

• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.

• Shift to (P.

• Set the parking brake.

To customize features detail, refer to the following.

2 Change Profile P. 366

2 Manage Profile P. 366

366

uu9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-inuProfile Settings

Features

■

Change Profile

You can change and add users.

2 User Information P. 361

■

Manage Profile

Use Manage Profile to change profile settings. Please confirm the details on the audio/information screen.

Specifications are subject to change via system updates, etc.

367

Continued

Features

Audio Error Messages

The following error messages are just examples. If you see an error message not

listed below, follow the on-screen instructions to clear it.

iPod/USB Flash Drive

If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following

error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

*1:Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

*2:Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Error Message Solution

File Error

The selected file cannot be played on this

system

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are copyright protected or an unsupported

format. This error message appears for about a few seconds, then plays the next file.

No Data

*1, *2

Appears when the iPod is empty.

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or

WAV files in the USB flash drive.

Check that compatible files are stored on the device.

iPod

USB flash drive

iPod and USB flash drive

368

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive

Features

*1:Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

*2:Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Error Message Solution

Unsupported Device

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported

device is connected, reconnect the device.

Error

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported

device is connected, reconnect the device.

Appears when unsupported formats are in the device. Check that compatible files are

stored on the device.

USB not responding

Appears when the system does not communicate with a connected device. If it appears

when a device is connected, contact your place of device purchase.

USB Hub Unsupported

*1, *2

Appears when only a HUB is connected. If it appears, connect a USB flash drive to the

HUB.

Error found in USB port.

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn

the audio system off and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the

error.

369

Features

General Information on the Audio System

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

• Please use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher formatted with

FAT16 or FAT32.

• Some digital audio players may not be compatible.

• Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.

• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.

• Some versions of MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV formats may be unsupported.

■

iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

Model

Made for iPod touch (7th generation) released 2019

Made for iPhone 6S/iPhone 6S Plus/iPhone SE/iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/

iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/iPhone XS/iPhone XS Max/iPhone XR/iPhone 11/iPhone 11

Pro/iPhone 11 Pro Max /iPhone SE (2nd generation)/iPhone 12/iPhone 12 Pro/iPhone

12 Pro Max/iPhone 12 mini/iPhone 13/iPhone 13 Pro/iPhone 13 Pro Max/iPhone 13

mini/iPhone 14/iPhone 14 Plus/iPhone 14 Pro/iPhone 14 Pro Max/iPhone SE (3rd

generation)/iPhone 15/iPhone 15 Plus/iPhone 15 Pro/iPhone 15 Pro Max

Model

Made for iPod touch (6th generation)/iPod touch (7th generation)

Made for iPhone 5s/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6s/iPhone 6s Plus/iPhone SE/

iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/iPhone XS/iPhone XS Max/

iPhone XR/iPhone 11/iPhone 11 Pro/iPhone 11 Pro Max/iPhone SE (2nd generation)/

iPhone 12 mini/iPhone 12/iPhone 12 Pro/iPhone 12 Pro Max/iPhone 13/iPhone 13

Pro/iPhone 13 Pro Max/iPhone 13 mini/iPhone SE (3rd generation)

■

USB Flash Drives

1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

This system may not work with all software versions

of these devices.

The Lightning connector works with iPhone 5s,

iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6S, iPhone 6S Plus,

iPhone SE, iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 8, iPhone

8 Plus, iPhone X, iPhone XS, iPhone XS Max, iPhone

XR, iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone 11 Pro Max,

iPhone SE (2nd generation), iPhone 12, iPhone 12

Pro, iPhone 12 Pro Max, iPhone 12 mini, iPhone 13,

iPhone 13 Pro, iPhone 13 Pro Max, iPhone 13 mini,

iPhone 14, iPhone 14 Plus, iPhone 14 Pro, iPhone 14

Pro Max, iPhone SE (3rd generation), iPod touch (6th,

7th generation).

USB works with iPhone 5s, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus,

iPhone 6S, iPhone 6S Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 7,

iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone X,

iPhone XS, iPhone XS Max, iPhone XR, iPhone 11,

iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone 11 Pro Max, iPhone SE (2nd

generation), iPhone 12, iPhone 12 Pro, iPhone 12 Pro

Max, iPhone 12 mini, iPhone 13, iPhone 13 Pro,

iPhone 13 Pro Max, iPhone 13 mini, iPhone 14,

iPhone 14 Plus, iPhone 14 Pro, iPhone 14 Pro Max,

iPhone SE (3rd generation), iPhone 15, iPhone 15

Plus, iPhone 15 Pro, iPhone 15 Pro Max, iPod touch

(6th, 7th generation).

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

1USB Flash Drives

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored

order. This order may be different from the order

displayed on your PC or device.

370

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement

Features

Honda App License Agreement

PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE

INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND

CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL

SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR

OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919

TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND

ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A

THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S

PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.

A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE

during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The

SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content

provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through

the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.

B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property.

1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a)

as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a

DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.

2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA

SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the

“HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your

VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be

specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while

you are using the SOFTWARE.

■

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

371

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement

Continued

Features

3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source

licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors

of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such

software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone.

Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual

or within the SOFTWARE.

4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER

SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER

TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or

permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants,

conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information,

targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any

applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.

5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use.

(a) Limited License.

You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance

with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA

(any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to

you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under

the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.

372

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement

Features

(b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device

other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:

6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying

DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This

AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors,

affiliates, or suppliers.

(1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the

SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation,

HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or

any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER

TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION;

(2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES

or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES;

(3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE

or SERVICES in any way;

(4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights;

(5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver

distraction laws, rules or regulations;

(6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions,

and privacy policies; or

(7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile,

or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is

expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software

licenses.

373

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement

Continued

Features

7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export

jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including

the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other

governments.

C. SOFTWARE Operation

1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in

violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.

2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation.

The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their

jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by

their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any

information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal

information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.

3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE.

Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require

that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER

SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control

over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the

inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER

SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER

SERVICES.

4. Links to Third Party Sites:

The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the

SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable,

directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of

such websites and content.

374

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement

Features

5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and

SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge

and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and

PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the

SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any

fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such

measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.

6. SOFTWARE Updates.

The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the-

air, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be

updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or

SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other

applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.

7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE.

Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not

provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and

VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.

D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings

1. Vehicle Geolocation Information.

You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The

traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude),

travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION

INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to

provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts,

or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.

375

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement

Continued

Features

2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls,

routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route

suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would

be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency

services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such

navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately

responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any

navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing

traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or

SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.

3. Speech Recognition:

You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands

when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a)

consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA

and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors

are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address

any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.

4. Distraction Hazards.

Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert

data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such

interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of

the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in

a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume

excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable

to hear these sounds could result in a crash.

376

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement

Features

E. Information Collection and Storage

1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data:

You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may

collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services.

HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services

suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you.

HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others,

but not in a form that personally identifies you.

2. Information Storage.

Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease

of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved

destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.

(a) Vehicle Health Information.

Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE

(“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and

malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows,

battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes,

diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA

for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period

of time necessary to fulfill these goals.

(b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based).

If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data

(latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.

(c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is

at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information

uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and

safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility.

377

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement

Continued

Features

F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you

will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result

from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS

WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES

OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the

SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non-

infringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your

use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE

or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely

on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We

do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES

is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via

the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the

accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via

the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may

not apply to you.

G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights.

1. Limitations on YOUR liability.

HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s

fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW

ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.

378

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement

Features

2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential,

indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE

or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including,

without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does

not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such

states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for

any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or

SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you,

and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA

or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES

interruptions of any length.

(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS

For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA,

PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in

connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the

total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence,

strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE

or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN

DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS

LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND

AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO

ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR

USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.

H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has

ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone

making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your

VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.

379

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement

Continued

Features

I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia

system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within

the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission

limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of

or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any

portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance

degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given

location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy

shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.

J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA

instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact

HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.

K. Termination and Transfer.

1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason,

and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to

comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.

2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided

you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed

materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or

transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.

380

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement

Features

L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless

explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall

respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from

time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion

thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification,

suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.

M. ARBITRATION:

PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU

MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE

HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE

MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION.

Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to

court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and

conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the

Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration.

YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third

party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any

representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek

remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the

contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction.

YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact

these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written

submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers,

HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator

may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.

381

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uHonda App License Agreement

Features

N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional

HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this

AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole

remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the

balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as

explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of

California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of

another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of

the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not

prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included

for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.

Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow

substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of

this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall

include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA.

This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is

unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely

unenforceable. You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at

American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Service Mail Stop CHI-5, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746.

HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.

382

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Features

Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE

APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE

SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER

LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND

VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS

ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR

DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.

USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN

THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE

DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED,

STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING,

FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS

SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE

POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF

DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.

■

OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS

383

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Features

YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR

SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE

MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS

PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY

DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS,

EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF

MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-

INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED

REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY

REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED

TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR

AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST

AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE

PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE,

SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC.,

SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY

TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.

TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY

INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR

LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY

OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO

USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY

(CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND

JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY

NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED

BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING

LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

■

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY

384

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uAbout Open Source Licenses

Features

About Open Source Licenses

To see the open source license information, follow these steps.

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select System.

4. Select Legal Information.

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select Advanced Settings.

4. Select System.

5. Select Legal Information.

6. Select System WebView licenses.

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

385

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uLicense Information

Continued

Features

License Information

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by ALPS ALPINE CO., LTD. is under license. Other

trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Faurecia Clarion Electronics Co., Ltd. is under

license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

https://www.bluetooth.com/develop-with-bluetooth/marketing-branding/

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or

distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a

license from Microsoft.

■

Bluetooth

■

Windows Media

386

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uLicense Information

Features

“Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone,” mean that an electronic accessory has

been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been

certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not

responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and

regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone,

may affect wireless performance.

Apple, the Apple Logo, iPhone, iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered

in the U.S. and other countries. Apple CarPlay, iPod, iPhone, iTunes, Siri and

Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

■

Apple

387

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uLicense Information

Continued

Features

Mpeg4 Visual

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO

LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR

(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUALA STANDARD

(“MPEG-4 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED

BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY

AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO

PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY

OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO

PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE

OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC.

SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

AVC/H.264

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE

PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN

COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE

AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL

AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO

PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL

BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE

HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

■

MPEG

388

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uLicense Information

Features

HD Radio

Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital

Corporation, a subsidiary of Xperi Inc., U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see

https://xperi.com/hd-radio-patents/. Xperi, HD Radio, HD, and 'ARC' logos and their

respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Xperi Inc. and its

subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

■

HD Radio

389

Continued

Features

Customized Features

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

With the power mode in ON, press the button, select General Settings, and

select a setting item.

■

How to Customize the Settings

1Customized Features

When you customize settings:

• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.

• Shift to (P.

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

390

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

■

System

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Date & Time

Time Format Changes the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H

/24H

Set Date &

Time

Automatic

Date & Time

Select ON to have the GPS automatically adjust

the clock. Select OFF to cancel this function.

/Off

Auto

Daylight

Saving Time

Select ON to have the GPS automatically adjust

the clock to daylight savings time. Select OFF to

cancel this function.

/Off

Set Date

Adjusts date.

2 Adjusting the Clock P. 182

—

Set Time

Adjusts clock.

2 Adjusting the Clock P. 182

—

Time Zone

(Select time

zone)

Changes the time zone manually. —

Date Format Sets the date format.

MM/DD/YYYY

YYYY/MM/DD

Language Changes the display language. English

/Español/Français

Factory Data

Reset

Resets all the settings to their factory default.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 395

Cancel/Continue

Touch Panel

Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. Low

/High

Legal

Information

Displays the legal information. —

391

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

Features

■

Connections

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Options

Priority Device Sets a device as the priority device. —

Name

Changes vehicle name for Bluetooth® connection

setting.

—

MAC Address Displays the MAC address. —

Wi-Fi Settings

Displays the password for Wi-Fi connection. You

can also change this at random.

—

+ Connect New Device

Pairs a new phone to HFL.

2 Phone Setup P. 422

—

(Saved Devices)

Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired

phone.

2 Phone Setup P. 422

—

392

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

■

Display

*1:When the AID sensor is disabled.

■

Data Sharing with Honda

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/information

screen.

—

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/information

screen.

—

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/information

screen.

—

Day Mode

Changes between the daytime mode and night

mode.

—

Night Mode

Display Off

Turns the audio/information screen brightness

off.

—

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Data Sharing

with Honda

Turns the data sharing setting on and off. Enable

/Disable

393

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

Features

■

Sound

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Bass/Mid/

Treble

Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’

sound.

2 Adjusting the Sound P. 284

—

Midrange

Bass

Balance / Fader

Speed Volume Compensation

394

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

■

Sound Volume

*1:Default Setting

■

Rear Camera

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System Sounds

Adjusts the sounds' volume settings.

0~2

Voice Recognition 0~6

~11

Navigation Guidance 0~6

~11

Ringtone 0~20

~40

Phone Calls 0~20

~40

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Fixed Guideline

Shows the guideline that does not move with the

steering wheel.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 610

/Off

Dynamic Guideline

Shows the guideline that moves with the steering

wheel.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 610

/Off

Cross Traffic Monitor

Shows arrows on the rear camera image to

indicate vehicles approaching from the sides.

2 Cross Traffic Monitor P. 606

/Off

395

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Features

Defaulting All the Settings

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select System.

4. Select Factory Data Reset.

u A confirmation message appears on the screen.

5. Select Continue to reset the settings.

6. Select Continue again to reset the settings.

u The system will reboot.

1Defaulting All the Settings

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset

all settings to default and delete all personal data.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the

preinstalled apps to their factory default.

396

Features

Customized Features

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

With the power mode in ON, select General Settings, then select a setting item.

■

How to Customize the General Settings

1Customized Features

When you customize settings:

• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.

• Put the transmission into (P.

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

397

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

Features

■

System

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Date & Time

Set Date &

Time

Automatic

Date &

Time

Select ON to have the GPS automatically adjust

the clock. Select OFF to cancel this function.

/Off

Set Date

Adjusts date.

2 Adjusting the Clock P. 182

—

Set Time

Adjusts clock.

2 Adjusting the Clock P. 182

—

Time Zone

Automatic

Time Zone

Sets the navigation system to automatically

adjust the clock when driving through different

time zones.

/Off

(Select time

zone)

Changes the time zone manually. —

Auto Daylight Saving

Time

Select ON to have the GPS automatically adjust

the clock to daylight savings time. Select OFF to

cancel this function.

/Off

Date Format Sets the date format.

Day-of-week, MM DD, YYYY

YYYY.MM.DD Day-of-week/

YYYY.MM.DD (Day-of-week)/

Day-of-week DD.MM.YYYY/

DD.MM.YYYY

Time Format Changes the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H

/24H

398

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Language Changes the display language.

English (United States)

Español/Français

Touch Panel

Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. Low

/High

About

IP Address

Displays the Android setting items. —

Wi-Fi MAC Address

Bluetooth MAC Address

Serial Number

Up Time

Model Number

Android Version

Kernel Version

Build Number

Software Version

Factory Data

Reset

Resets all the settings to their factory default.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 416

Cancel/Continue

399

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

Features

■

Connections

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Manage

Device

Connections

Options

Bluetooth Turns Bluetooth® on and off. On

/Off

Priority

Device

Information

Displays the priority device. —

Change

Name

Changes vehicle name for Bluetooth® connection

setting.

—

Smartphone

Projection

Screen Size

Changes the screen size of the smartphone

projection.

Normal/Wide

Smartphone

Projection

Error Code

Displays the error codes of the smartphone

projection.

—

+ Connect New Device

Pairs a new phone to HFL.

2 Phone Setup P. 435

—

(Saved Devices)

Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired

phone.

2 Phone Setup P. 435

—

400

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Wi-Fi Options

Wi-Fi Allow vehicle to connect to Wi-Fi. Off/On

Add

Network

Allows you to connect to a new external

network.

—

Saved

Networks

Delete a saved network or change update

permission settings for the selected network.

—

Access Point Options

Access

Point

Allow wireless connection from the phone to the

vehicle. This feature must be turned on for

wireless Apple CarPlay or Android Auto to work.

Off

/On

Edit Access

Point

Settings

Allows you to confirm hotspot settings and edit

hotspot connection information.

—

Data

Connection

Options

Set Up Wi-Fi

Sets personal hotspot (phone tethering).

2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 343

Set Up Vehicle Data Plan

Sets AT&T vehicle data plan.

2 AT&T Hotspot P. 345

401

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

Features

■

Privacy

*1:Default Setting

*2:Please confirm the details on the audio/information screen. Specifications are subject to change via system updates, etc.

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Data Sharing with Honda Turns the data sharing on and off. Disable/Enable

Microphone

Turns the microphone on and off. eCall can still

be used regardless of settings.

Location

Sets the data sharing permission for each

function.

Infotainment system data

App permissions

System-wide Permission Settings

Data sharing with Google

Ads

Google legal

Google Terms of

Service

Displays the Google URL. —

Google Privacy Policy

402

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

■

Display

*1:When the AID sensor is disabled.

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/information

screen.

—

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/information

screen.

—

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/information

screen.

—

Day Mode

Changes between the daytime mode and night

mode.

—

Night Mode

Display Off

Turns the audio/information screen brightness

off.

—

403

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

Features

■

Sound

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Bass/Mid/

Treble

Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’

sound.

2 Adjusting the Sound P. 322

—

Midrange

Bass

Bose Centerpoint Surround

Audio Zones & Balance / Fader

Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation

404

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

■

Sound Volume

*1:Default Setting

■

Camera

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System Sounds

Adjusts the sounds' volume settings.

0~2

Voice Recognition 1~2

~11

Navigation Guidance 0~6

~11

Phone Calls 0~20

~40

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Rear Wide

Camera

Guidelines

Fixed

Guideline

Shows the guideline that does not move with the

steering wheel.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 610

/Off

Dynamic

Guideline

Shows the guideline that moves with the steering

wheel.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 610

/Off

Cross Traffic Monitor

Shows arrows on the rear camera image to

indicate vehicles approaching from the sides.

2 Cross Traffic Monitor P. 606

/Off

405

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

Features

■

Voice Control

*1:Default Setting

*2:Activates when the iPhone is connected.

*3:Default Setting (When Apple CarPlay is launched, the setting will be switched to On.)

■

Security

You can customize security settings. Please confirm the details on the audio/information screen.

Specifications are subject to change via system updates, etc.

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Default Assist App Selects the assistant apps.

None/Alexa/Google

Assistant

Listen for “Hey Siri”

Toggles Siri activation when you say “Hey Siri.” On/Off

Google Assistant Sets the functions of Google Assistant. —

406

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

■

Google

You can customize Google settings. Please confirm the details on the audio/information screen.

Specifications are subject to change via system updates, etc.

■

Advanced Settings

You can customize advanced system settings. Please confirm the details on the audio/information screen.

Specifications may be changed via system updates, etc.

407

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

Features

With the power mode in ON, press the button, and then select Vehicle Settings

and select a setting item.

■

How to Customize the Vehicle Settings

408

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

■

TPMS Calibration

■

Driver Assist System Setup

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

TPMS Calibration

Calibrates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).

2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) P. 492

Calibrate

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Forward Collision Warning

Distance

Changes the distance at which Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS) alerts.

2 Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

) P. 509

Long/Normal

/Short

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect

Beep

Turns audible notification On/Off when vehicle has moved in/out of

Adaptive Cruise Control with Low Speed Follow range.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 536

On/Off

Road Departure Mitigation

Setting

Selects operating mode of the Road Departure Mitigation system.

2 Road Departure Mitigation System P. 528

Narrow/Normal

/Wide/

Warning Only

Lane Keeping Assist

Suspend Beep

Switches the LKAS and Traffic Jam Assist suspend alert beeps on

and off.

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 558

2 Traffic Jam Assist P. 569

On/Off

Blind Spot Information

Turns the blind spot information system audible alert On/Off.

2 Blind Spot Information System P. 501

Audible And Visual Alert

Visual Alert

* Not available on all models

409

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

Features

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Traffic Sign Recognition

System Display Setting

Displays the traffic sign recognition system on instrument panel.

2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 578

/Off

Traffic Sign Recognition

System Speed Limit

Warning

Enables over speed limit warning when speed limit is exceeded.

2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 578

On/Off

Speed Limit Warning

Threshold Setting

When Traffic Sign Recognition System Speed Limit Warning

setting is on, select speed limit warning threshold based on personal

preference.

2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 578

Speed Limit

Speed Limit+3mph/

Speed Limit+5mph/

Speed Limit+10mph

(When mph is selected)

Speed Limit

Speed Limit+5km/h/

Speed Limit+10km/h/

Speed Limit+15km/h

(When km/h is selected)

Driver Attention Monitor

Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.

2 Driver Attention Monitor P. 162

Tactile And Audible Alert

Tactile Alert/Off

Rear Sensor Setting

Turns the Rear Parking Sensor ON or OFF. This selection will also

affect the rear Low Speed Braking Control

2 Parking Sensor System

P. 601

2 Low Speed Braking Control

P. 522

/Off

* Not available on all models

410

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

■

Meter Setup

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Adjust Outside Temp.

Display

Adjusts outside temperature reading by a few degrees.

2 Outside Temperature P. 122

-5°F ~ ±0°F

~ +5°F (U.S.)

-3°C ~ ±0°C

~ +3°C (Canada)

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Selects the timing to reset Trip A.

2 Range/Fuel/Trip Meter P. 129

2 Speed/Time/Trip Meter P. 131

When Fully Refueled/IGN Off/

Manually Reset

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Selects the timing to reset Trip B.

2 Range/Fuel/Trip Meter P. 158

2 Speed/Time/Trip Meter P. 160

When Fully Refueled/IGN Off/

Manually Reset

Adjust Alarm Volume

Changes volume level of all system warnings, door opening

warning, and indicator.

High/Mid

/Low

Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On

/Off

Turn by Turn Auto Display

Turns the pop-up information on/off in the turn-by-turn

navigation in the driver information interface.

2 Turn-by-Turn Directions P. 161

/Off

Rear Seat Reminder Turns the Rear Seat Reminder feature on and off. On

/Off

Speed/Distance Units

Selects the speed/distance units.

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 167

km/h · km/mph · miles

(U.S.)

km/h · km

/mph · miles

(Canada)

411

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

Features

■

Driving Position Setup

*1:Default Setting

■

Keyless Access Setup

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Memory Position Link Turns the driving position memory system on and off. On

/Off

Seat Position Movement At

Entry/Exit

Moves the seat rearward when you get in/get out of the vehicle.

Changes the setting for this feature.

/Off

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Door Unlock Mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver’s door

handle.

Driver Door Only

/All

Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/lock the

doors.

/Off

Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors. On

/Off

Remote Start System On/Off Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. On

/Off

Lockout Prevention Changes the settings for the lockout protection function. On

/Off

412

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

■

Lighting Setup

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Auto High-Beam Turns the auto high-beam on and off. On

/Off

Interior Light Dimming Time

Selects the length of time the interior lights stay on after doors are

closed.

2 Interior Lights P. 250

60sec/30sec

/15sec

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Selects the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close

the driver's door.

2 Automatic Lighting Off Feature P. 226

60sec/30sec/15sec

/0sec

Auto Light Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid

/Low/Min

Auto Headlight On with

Wiper On

Turns headlight function at wiper operation On/Off when the

headlight is in AUTO setting.

2 Headlight Integration with Wipers P. 225

/Off

* Not available on all models

413

uuCustomized Featuresu

Continued

Features

■

Door Setup

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for the automatic locking feature. With Vehicle Speed

/Shift From P/Off

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors unlock

automatically.

All Doors When Driver’s Door Opens

All Doors With Shift To P/All Doors

When Ignition Switched Off/Off

Walk Away Auto Lock

Changes the settings for the auto lock function when

you walk away from the vehicle.

On/Off

Keyless Lock Answer Back

Turns flash of exterior lights on/off when doors are

locked/unlocked by keyless remote.

2 Using the Remote Transmitter P. 206

/Off

Keyless Remote Power

Window Control

Turns the remote window control on and off. On

/Off

Lock Presetting Changes the settings for the lock presetting function. On

/Off

414

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

■

Power Tailgate Setup

*1:Default Setting

■

Climate Control Setup

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Keyless Open Mode Changes the keyless setting for when the power tailgate opens. Anytime

/When Unlocked

Power Open By Outer

Handle

Changes the setting to open power tailgate by tailgate outer handle.

On (Power/Manual)

Off (Manual Only)

Hands Free Access Function

Changes the setting to open power tailgate by a swift forward in and

out kicking motion under the rear bumper.

/Off

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Driver Seat automatic

Climate Control

Automatic climate control of Driver Seat with automatic air

conditioner. Changes the interlocking control setting.

/Off

Passenger Seat automatic

Climate Control

Automatic climate control of Passenger Seat with automatic air

conditioner. Changes the interlocking control setting.

/Off

415

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

■

INDIVIDUAL Settings

*1:Default Setting

■

Maintenance Info.

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Powertrain

Selects the responsiveness of the powertrain.

2 Customizing the INDIVIDUAL Settings P. 485

ECON/NORMAL

/SPORT

Steering

Selects the level of steering effort.

2 Customizing the INDIVIDUAL Settings P. 485

NORMAL

/SPORT

Engine Sound

Selects the effect of engine sound.

2 Customizing the INDIVIDUAL Settings P. 485

NORMAL

/SPORT

Gauge

Selects the gauges to be displayed in the Driver Information

Interface.

2 Customizing the INDIVIDUAL Settings P. 485

NORMAL

/SPORT

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Maintenance Info.

Resets the maintenance information.

2 Maintenance Minder

P. 621

Select Reset Items

416

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Features

Defaulting All the Settings

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

Only the Owner user can execute this command.

If current profile is not the Owner user, please switch users.

2 Switching Users P. 363

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select System.

4. Select Factory Data Reset.

u A confirmation message appears on the screen.

5. Select Continue to reset the settings.

6. Select Reset again to reset the settings.

u The system will reboot.

1. Press the button.

2. Select Vehicle Settings.

3. Select Default All.

4. Select Yes.

■

Defaulting System Settings

■

Defaulting Vehicle Settings

1Defaulting All the Settings

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset

all settings to default and delete all personal data.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the

preinstalled apps to their factory default.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use

the HondaLink® because it goes offline.

2 HondaLink® P. 337

417

Continued

Features

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using

your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone. Select the phone

zone when your phone is connected to the system wirelessly.

Using HFL

■

HFL Buttons

1Bluet ooth® HandsFreeLink®

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell

phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing

procedures, and special feature capabilities:

• U.S.: Visit https://mygarage.honda.com/s/honda-

handsfreelink-compatibility-check, or call 1-888-

528-7876.

• Canada: Call 1-855-490-7351.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or

Android Auto, HFL is unavailable.

Voice control tips

• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere

with the microphone.

• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,

the command may be misinterpreted.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of

handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

Up to 16 favorite contacts can be stored. If there is no

entry in the system, the pop-up notification appears

on the screen.

2 Favorite Contacts P. 425

Up to 100 call histories can be stored. If there is no

call history, Call History is disabled.

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Left Selector Wheel

VOL

(+/VOL (-

(Volume) Switch

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

418

Features

(Home) button

: Press to go back to the home screen of the driver information

interface.

Left Selector Wheel: Press the (Home) button

. Roll up or down to select

Phone on the driver information interface, and then press the left selector wheel.

u You can select Favorite Contacts or Recent Calls by rolling up or down the

left selector wheel.

While receiving a call, the incoming call screen is displayed on the driver

information interface. You can pick up the call using the left selector wheel.

2 Receiving a Call P. 428

To go to the phone screen:

1. Press the button.

2. Select the phone zone to switch the display to the phone screen.

*1: Models with A-type meter

1Bluet ooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any

use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under

license. Other trademarks and trade names are those

of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio

system when it is playing. It will resume when the call

is ended.

419

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uUsing HFL

Features

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

■

HFL Status Display

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/

information screen varies between phone models.

■

Limitations for Manual Operation

Battery Level Status

Signal Strength

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your

phone is connected

to HFL.

Caller’s Name (If

registered)/

Caller’s Number

(If not registered)

420

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

HFL Menus

The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.

■

Phone menu screen

1. Press the button.

2. Select the phone zone.

3. Select Menu.

1HFL Menus

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-

compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle

is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving. A message

appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving

and the operation is canceled.

Auto Sync Phone Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

Using Enter Number Enter a phone number to dial.

Latest Call History

Set whether the history shortcut is displayed in the phone screen.

421

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■

Phone screen

1. Press the button.

2. Select the phone zone.

Display the last outgoing, incoming, and missed calls.

Recents All

Dialed

Received

Display the last outgoing calls.

Display the last incoming calls.

Missed

Display the last missed calls.

(Existing entry list)

Dial the selected number in the favorite contacts list.

Contacts

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

(Existing entry list)

+ Connect New Device

Pair a new phone to the system.

Connect, disconnect, or delete a paired device.

Press & Hold to

Add

From Recents

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a

favorite contact number.

From Contacts

Using Enter

Number

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a

favorite contact number.

Enter a phone number to store as a favorite contact number.

Change Devices

Display the phone menu screen.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

422

Features

■

Bluetooth® setup

The Bluetooth® function is always ON.

■

To pair a cell phone (when there is no

phone paired to the system)

1. Press the button.

2. Select the phone zone.

3. Select Connect New Device.

4. Make sure your phone is in search or

discoverable mode, then select Search for

Devices.

u HFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth® device.

5. Select your phone when it appears on the

list.

u If your phone still does not appear,

search for Bluetooth® devices using your

phone.

From your phone, search for Vehicle

Name.

u Confirm if the pairing code on the audio/

information screen and your phone

matches.

This may vary by phone.

6. Select Yes.

■

Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to

the system before you can make and receive hands-

free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is

moving.

• Up to six phones can be paired.

• Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is

paired to the system.

Once you have paired a phone, you can see it

displayed on the screen with one or more icons on

the right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

: The phone is compatible with HFL.

: The phone is compatible with Apple CarPlay.

: The phone is compatible with Android Auto.

Continued

423

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus

Features

■

To change the currently paired phone

1. Go to the phone screen.

2 Phone screen P. 421

2. Select Change Devices.

3. Select the function icon for the phone you

want to connect.

■

To delete a paired phone

1. Go to the phone screen.

2 Phone screen P. 421

2. Select Change Devices.

3. Select a phone you want to delete.

4. Select Delete.

5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Delete.

1To change the currently paired phone

If no other phones are found or paired when trying to

switch to another phone, the original phone is

connected again.

To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device

from the Connections screen.

You can also switch the connection with the ,

icon, or icon in the device list.

When or is selected, , cannot be

selected.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

424

Features

■

When Auto Sync Phone is set to On:

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are

automatically imported to HFL.

■

Changing the Auto Sync Phone setting

1. Go to the phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 420

2. Select Auto Sync Phone.

3. Select On or Off.

■

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

When you select a person from the list in the cellular

phonebook, you can see up to five category icons.

The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored

for that name.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the

category icons to HFL.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Home

Mobile Work

Other

Pref

425

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

To store a number as a favorite contact:

1. Press the button.

2. Select the phone zone.

3. Select and hold Press & Hold to Add.

4. Select From Recents, From Contacts, or Using Enter Number.

5. Select the phone number.

5. Input number, and select OK.

■

To edit a favorite contact

1. Press the button.

2. Select the phone zone.

3. Select and hold a favorite contact.

4. Select Edit Favorites.

5. Select a setting you want.

6. Select Enter or select type.

■

To delete a favorite contact

1. Press the button.

2. Select the phone zone.

3. Select and hold a favorite contact.

4. Select Remove Favorite.

■

Favorite Contacts

From Recents, From Contacts

Using Enter Number

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

426

Features

You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported

phonebook, call history, or favorite contact entries.

■

To make a call using the imported phonebook

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically

imported to HFL.

1. Press the button.

2. Select Contacts.

3. Select a name. If more than one number is registered, select a number.

u Dialing starts automatically.

u The phonebook is stored alphabetically.

u You can sort by First Name or Last Name. Select the icon on the upper right

of the screen.

■

Making a Call

1Making a Call

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of

the person you are calling through the audio

speakers.

Continued

427

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus

Features

■

To make a call using a phone number

1. Press the button.

2. Select the phone zone.

3. Select Menu.

4. Select Using Enter Number.

5. Select a number.

6. Select Call.

u Dialing starts automatically.

■

To make a call using the call history

Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received.

1. Press the button.

2. Select Recents.

u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received. Select the icon on the

upper right of the screen.

3. Select a number.

u Dialing starts automatically.

■

To make a call using a favorite contact

1. Press the button.

2. Select the phone zone.

3. Select desired favorite contact.

u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the call history

The call history appears only when a phone is

connected to HFL, and displays the last 100 dialed,

received, or missed calls.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

428

Features

When there is an incoming call, an audible

notification sounds and the Incoming Call...

screen appears.

You can answer the call using the left selector

wheel.

To pick up the call, roll up or down to select

Answer on the driver information interface

and then press the left selector wheel.

u If you want to decline or end the call,

select Ignore on the driver information

interface using the left selector wheel.

■

Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting

Select Answer using the left selector wheel to put

the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Select Swap calls using the left selector wheel to

return to the current call.

Select Ignore using the left selector wheel to ignore

the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.

Select Hang up using the left selector wheel if you

want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information

screen instead of the icons on the driver information

interface.

429

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus

Features

The following options are available during a call.

Swap Calls: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Use Handheld: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.

Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven

phone system.

The available options are shown on the lower

half of the screen.

Select the option.

u Select Mute again to turn it off.

■

Options During a Call

1Options During a Call

Keypad: Available on some phones.

430

Features

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using

your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

■

HFL Buttons

1Bluet ooth® HandsFreeLink®

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell

phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing

procedures, and special feature capabilities:

• U.S.: Visit https://mygarage.honda.com/s/honda-

handsfreelink-compatibility-check, or call 1-888-

528-7876.

• Canada: Call 1-855-490-7351.

To use the system, the Bluetooth setting must be

ON. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay,

HFL is unavailable.

2 Phone Setup P. 435

Voice control tips

• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere

with the microphones.

• If the microphones pick up voices other than yours,

the command may be misinterpreted.

• To change the volume level, use the audio system’s

volume.

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Switch

Left Selector Wheel

Continued

431

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uUsing HFL

Features

Left Selector Wheel: Roll up or down to select Phone on the driver information

interface, and then press the left selector wheel.

1Bluet ooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any

use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under

license. Other trademarks and trade names are those

of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio

system when it is playing. It will resume when the call

is ended.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

432

Features

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

■

HFL Status Display

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/

information screen varies between phone models.

■

Limitations for Manual Operation

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your phone is

connected to HFL.

Signal Strength

Battery Level Status

Caller’s Name (If registered)/

Caller’s Number (If not registered)

433

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

HFL Menus

The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.

■

Phone menu screen

1. Press the button.

2. Select Phone.

3. Select Menu.

1HFL Menus

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-

compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle

is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving.

Ringtone

Select a fixed ringtone or the one from the connected cell phone.

Auto Sync Phone Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

Auto Phone Call Transfer

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

Keypad Enter a phone number to dial.

Latest Call History

Set whether the history shortcut is displayed in the phone screen.

434

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■

Phone screen

1. Press the button.

2. Select Phone.

Display the last outgoing, incoming, and missed calls.

Recents All

Dialed

Received

Display the last outgoing calls.

Display the last incoming calls.

Missed

Display the last missed calls.

(Existing entry list)

Dial the selected number in the favorite contacts list.

Contacts

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Go to Device List

Connect New Device

Pair a new phone to the system.

Connect, disconnect, or delete a paired device.

Press & Hold to

Add

From Recents

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a

favorite contact number.

From Contacts

Using Enter

Number

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a

favorite contact number.

Enter a phone number to store as a favorite contact number.

Change Devices

Display the phone menu screen.

435

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■

Bluetooth® setup

You can turn Bluetooth® function on and off.

1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select Connections.

4. Select Manage Device Connections.

5. Select Options.

6. Set Bluetooth to ON.

■

Phone Setup

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

436

Features

■

To pair a cell phone (when there is no

phone paired to the system)

1. Press the button.

2. Select Phone.

3. Select Connect New Device.

4. Make sure your phone is in search or

discoverable mode, then select Search for

Devices.

u HFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth® device.

5. Select your phone when it appears on the

list.

u If your phone still does not appear,

search for Bluetooth® devices using your

phone.

From your phone, search for Vehicle

Name.

u Confirm if the pairing code on the audio/

information screen and your phone

matches.

This may vary by phone.

6. Select Yes.

1Phone Setup

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to

the system before you can make and receive hands-

free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is

moving.

• Up to six phones can be paired.

• Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is

paired to the system.

Once you have paired a phone, you can see it

displayed on the screen with one or more icons on

the right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio

and HFL.

: The phone is compatible with Apple CarPlay.

: The phone is compatible with Android Auto.

Continued

437

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus

Features

■

To change the currently paired phone

1. Go to the phone screen.

2 Phone screen P. 434

2. Select Change Devices.

3. Select Go to Device List.

4. Select a phone to connect.

u HFL disconnects the connected phone

and starts searching for another paired

phone.

5. Select or , .

6. Select Yes.

■

To delete a paired phone

1. Go to the phone screen.

2 Phone screen P. 434

2. Select Change Devices.

3. Select Go to Device List.

4. Select a phone you want to delete.

5. Select Delete Device.

6. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Delete.

1To change the currently paired phone

If no other phones are found or paired when trying to

switch to another phone, the original phone is

connected again.

To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device

from the Bluetooth screen.

You can also switch the connection with the icon,

or icon in the device list.

When or is selected, cannot be selected.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

438

Features

You can change the ringtone setting.

1. Go to the phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 433

2. Select Ringtone.

3. Select Vehicle or Phone.

If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically

transferred to HFL.

1. Go to the phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 433

2. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer.

3. Select On or Off.

■

Ringtone

■

Automatic Transferring

1Ringtone

Vehicle: The fixed ringtone sounds from the

speakers.

Phone: Depending on the make and model of the

cell phone, the ringtone stored in the phone will

sound if the phone is connected.

Continued

439

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus

Features

■

When Auto Sync Phone is set to ON:

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are

automatically imported to the system.

■

Changing the Auto Sync Phone setting

1. Go to the phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 433

2. Select Auto Sync Phone.

3. Select On or Off.

■

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

On some phones, you will be asked to allow your

cellular phonebook to be imported.

When you select a name from the list in the cellular

phonebook, you can see a category icon. The icons

indicate what types of numbers are stored for that

name.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the

category icons to the system.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Home

Mobile Work

Other

Pref

440

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

To store a number as a favorite contact:

1. Press the button.

2. Select Phone.

3. Select and hold Press & Hold to Add.

4. Select From Recents, From Contacts, or

Using Enter Number.

5. Select the phone number.

5. Input number, and select Enter.

■

Favorite Contacts

From Recents screen

From Contacts screen

Using Enter Number screen

From Recents, From Contacts

Using Enter Number

441

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■

To edit a favorite contact

1. Press the button.

2. Select Phone.

3. Select and hold a favorite contact.

4. Select Edit Favorites.

5. Select a setting you want.

6. Select Enter or select type.

■

Add a favorite contact to the home screen

1. Press the button.

2. Select Phone.

3. Select and hold a favorite contact.

4. Select Add to Home.

■

To delete a favorite contact

1. Press the button.

2. Select Phone.

3. Select and hold a favorite contact.

4. Select Remove Favorite.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

442

Features

You can make calls by inputting any phone

number, or by using the imported

phonebook, call history, or favorite contact

entries.

■

Making a Call

1Making a Call

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of

the person you are calling through the audio

speakers.

While there is an active connection with Apple

CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with

HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple

CarPlay.

Phone screen

Phone menu screen

443

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■

To make a call using the imported phonebook

1. Go to the phone screen.

2 Phone screen P. 434

2. Select Contacts.

3. Select a name.

u You can sort by First Name or Last Name. Select the icon on the upper right

of the screen.

4. Select a number.

u Dialing starts automatically.

■

To make a call using a phone number

1. Go to the phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 433

2. Select Keypad.

3. Select a number.

u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering numbers.

4. Select Call.

u Dialing starts automatically.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

444

Features

■

To make a call using the call history

Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, and Received.

1. Go to the phone screen.

2 Phone screen P. 434

2. Select Recents.

u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received. Select the icon on the

upper right of the screen.

3. Select a number.

u Dialing starts automatically.

■

To make a call using a favorite contact entry

1. Go to the phone screen.

2 Phone screen P. 434

2. Select desired favorite contact.

u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the call history

The call history appears only when a phone is

connected to the system.

Continued

445

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus

Features

When there is an incoming call, an audible

notification sounds (if activated) and the

Incoming Call... screen appears.

You can answer the call using the left selector

wheel.

To answer the call, roll up or down to select

(answer) on the driver information

interface and then press the left selector

wheel.

u If you want to decline or end the call,

select (ignore) on the driver

information interface using the left

selector wheel.

■

Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting

Select (answer) to put the current call on hold to

answer the incoming call.

Select using the left selector wheel to return to

the current call.

Select (ignore) to ignore the incoming call if you

do not want to answer it.

Select if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information

screen instead of the and on the driver

information interface.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

446

Features

The following options are available during a call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Transfer to Mobile: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.

Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven

phone system.

The available options are shown on the lower

half of the screen.

Select the option.

u The mute icon appears when Mute is

selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

■

Options During a Call

1Options During a Call

You can select the icons on the audio/information

screen.

447

Driving

This chapter discusses driving and refueling.

Before Driving................................... 448

Towing a Trailer................................ 453

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ..... 459

When Driving

Turning on the Power ...................... 461

Precautions While Driving................. 468

Transmission........................................ 469

Shifting............................................ 470

Deceleration Paddle Selector ............ 472

Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System...... 475

Drive Mode System .................. 476, 480

Hill Descent Control System ............. 486

Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA

), aka Electronic

Stability Control (ESC), System .............. 488

Agile Handling Assist ....................... 490

Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control

System

...................................... 491

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....492

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -

Required Federal Explanation ......... 499

Blind Spot Information System ......... 501

High Voltage Battery........................ 505

Honda Sensing® ................................ 506

Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

) ....................................... 509

Low Speed Braking Control

............ 522

Road Departure Mitigation System... 528

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Speed Follow ................................. 536

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).... 558

Traffic Jam Assist ............................. 569

Traffic Sign Recognition System ....... 578

Front Sensor Camera ....................... 585

Radar Sensor ................................... 587

Sonar Sensors

................................ 588

Braking .............................................. 589

Parking Your Vehicle........................ 599

Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 610

Refueling........................................... 612

Fuel Economy and CO

Emissions.... 615

* Not available on all models

448

Driving

Before Driving

Driving Preparation

Check the following items before you start driving.

• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior

lights, or other parts of the vehicle.

u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.

u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of

vision while driving or fall off and impact other road users. If frozen solid,

remove ice once it has softened.

u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel

or wheel components.

• Make sure the hood is securely closed.

u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.

• Make sure the tires are in good condition.

u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 652

• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.

u There are blind spots from the inside.

■

Exterior Checks

1Exterior Checks

NOTICE

When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around

the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force

them open, as this can damage the rubber trim

around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid

further freezing.

Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.

You will be unable to insert the key if the water

freezes in the hole.

Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite

flammable materials left under the hood, causing a

fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended

period, inspect and remove any debris that may have

collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have

fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a

small animal. Also, check under the hood for leftover

flammable materials after you or someone else has

performed maintenance on your vehicle.

Continued

449

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

Driving

• Store or secure all items on board properly.

u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s

handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 451

• Do not pile items higher than the seatback height.

u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden

braking.

• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor

mat.

u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator

pedal operation while driving.

• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.

u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.

• Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.

2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 197

• Adjust your seating position properly.

u Adjust the head restraint, too.

2 Seats P. 239

2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraint Positions P. 247

• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly.

u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.

2 Mirrors P. 237

2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 236

■

Interior Checks

1Interior Checks

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not

need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry

heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have

the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified

technician.

450

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

Driving

• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the

seats.

u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation

of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.

• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.

2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 56

• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the

vehicle, and go off soon after.

u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.

2 Indicators P. 100

451

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Continued

Driving

Maximum Load Limit

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the

Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s

doorjamb.

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and

accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your

vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers

that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers

from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount

equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in

your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load

capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

1Maximum Load Limit

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all

occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue

load.

2 Specifications P. 720

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.

2 Specifications P. 720

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading

can affect handling and stability

and cause a crash in which you

can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other

loading guidelines in this manual.

Label Example

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

452

Driving

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to

determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage

load capacity of your vehicle.

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,

accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

1Maximum Load Limit

Towing a Trailer:

See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your

vehicle is designed to tow a trailer.

2 Towing a Trailer P. 453

Load Limits Example

Example1

Max Load

850 lbs

(385 kg)

Passenger Weight

150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs

(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight

550 lbs

(249 kg)

Example2

Max Load

850 lbs

(385 kg)

Passenger Weight

150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs

(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight

100 lbs

(45 kg)

453

Continued

Driving

Towing a Trailer

Towing Preparation

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper

equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.

■

Total trailer weight

Maximum allowable weight of the trailer,

cargo, and everything in or on it must not

exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing loads in

excess of this can seriously affect vehicle

handling and performance and can damage

the engine and drivetrain.

■

Tongue load

The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded

trailer on the hitch should be approximately

10% of the total trailer weight.

• Excessive tongue load reduces front tire

traction and steering control. Too little

tongue load can make the trailer unstable

and cause it to sway.

• To achieve a proper tongue load, start by

loading 60% of the load toward the front

of the trailer and 40% toward the rear.

Readjust the load as needed.

■

Towing Load Limits

1Towing Load Limits

Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.

If a public scale is not available, add the estimated

weight of your cargo load to the weight of your

trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the

tongue load.

Break-in Period.

Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600

miles (1,000 km).

Never exceed the gross weight ratings.

Gross weight information

2 Specifications P. 720

WARNING

Exceeding any load limit or improperly

loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a

crash in which you can be seriously hurt or

killed.

Check the loading of your vehicle and

trailer carefully before starting to drive.

Total Load

Tongue Load

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

454

Driving

Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing,

and where you are towing.

■

Hitches

The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.

■

Safety chains

Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the

trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.

■

Trailer brakes

If you are thinking of getting a trailer that has brakes, be sure they are electronically

actuated. Do not attempt to tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system. No matter how

successful it may seem, any attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle's

hydraulic system will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard.

■

Additional towing equipment

Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a

trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special

mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.

■

Towing Equipment and Accessories

1Towing Equipment and Accessories

Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and

maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/

territory, and local regulations.

Consult your trailer maker for proper installation and

setup of the equipment.

Improper installation and setup can affect the

electrical components, handling, stability, and

braking performance of your vehicle.

Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other

items are recommended or required for your towing

situation.

The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type

and brand. If a connector is required, it should only

be installed by a qualified technician.

Trailer packages and products:

• Ball mount, hitch plug, hitch pin etc.

• Wiring harness kit

• Trailer hitch kit

Are available at a dealer.

455

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

Driving

■

Trailer light

Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and

local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the

requirements in the area where you plan to tow.

We recommend that you have a dealer install a Honda wiring harness and converter.

They are designed for your vehicle.

The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is

required, it should only be installed by a qualified technician.

1Trailer light

The trailer lighting connector is located behind the

left side panel in the cargo area.

Even if you are planning to use the non-Honda trailer

lighting harness and converter, ask a dealer for the

correct connector and pins.

Right Turn Signal (Green)

Left Turn Signal (Light Blue)

Small (Gray)

Brake Light (Green)

+B Trailer (Light Violet/Red)

Grand (Black)

456

uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer

Driving

Driving Safely with a Trailer

• Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.

• Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.

2 Towing Load Limits P. 453

• Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.

• Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while

driving.

• Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.

• Check the pressure of the trailer tires, including the spare.

• Turn off the rear parking sensor system. It may alert if it detects the towed object

as an obstacle.

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

• Turn off the rear Low Speed Braking Control system through the rear sensor

setting. It may activate if it detects the towed object as an obstacle.

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

■

Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer

1Driving Safely with a Trailer

Operating speed when towing a trailer must not

exceed 62 mph (100 km/h).

Parking

In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel

chocks at each of the trailer's tires.

When towing a trailer, we recommend that you carry

a full-size spare wheel and tire for both your vehicle

and trailer.

Remember to unhitch the trailer before changing a

flat tire. Ask the trailer sales or rental agency where

and how to store the trailer’s spare tire.

Models with parking sensor system

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

457

uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer

Driving

• Drive slower than normal.

• Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.

• Use the

(D position when towing a trailer on level roads.

• Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.

• Allow more time and distance for braking.

• Do not brake or turn suddenly.

• If the Engine temperature near limit. Avoid heavy acceleration and high

speed. message appears on the driver information interface, turn off the climate

control system and reduce speed.

• If the Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool.

message appears on the driver information interface, pull to the side of the road

safely to cool down the engine.

• If the Power system temperature high. Power may be reduced. message

appears on the driver information interface, pull to the side of the road safely to

cool down the power system.

■

Towing Speeds and Shift Position

■

Turning and Braking

■

Driving in Hilly Terrain

1Towing Speeds and Shift Position

When towing a fixed-sided trailer (e.g., camper), do

not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). At higher speeds, the

trailer may sway or affect vehicle handling.

458

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Behind a Motorhome

Driving

Towing Behind a Motorhome

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs

to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.

2 Emergency Towing P. 711

459

Driving

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

General Information

Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement; however, its higher

ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not

designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-highway activities.

If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat

different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it

does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get

acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.

Important Safety Precautions

To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and

recommendations:

• Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 451

• Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.

• Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow.

• It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.

1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result

in a crash or a rollover.

2 Important Handling Information P. 48

2 Precautions While Driving P. 468

WARNING

Improperly operating this vehicle on or off-

pavement can cause a crash or rollover in

which you and your passengers could be

seriously injured or killed.

• Follow all instructions and guidelines in

this owner’s manual.

• Keep your speed low, and don’t drive

faster than conditions permit.

460

uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble

Driving

Avoiding Trouble

• Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all

scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the

condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.

• Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have

limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and

power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in

a hazardous situation.

• Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start

or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.

• Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover

or damage to your suspension or other components.

• Driving on Slopes increases your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to

drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight up or down a slope is usually

the safest. If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it

before you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don’t try it.

Find another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around.

Back down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.

• Crossing a Stream - Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water

in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully

before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground

underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find

another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The

water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and

causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.

• If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you

unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could

damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need

to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose.

461

Continued

Driving

When Driving

Turning on the Power

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) comes on for 30 seconds

when you pull up the electric parking

brake switch.

2. Check that the transmission is in

(P, then

depress the brake pedal.

u Although it is possible to start the vehicle

(N, it is safer to start it in (P.

3. Without depressing the accelerator pedal,

press the POWER button while depressing

the brake pedal.

1Turning on the Power

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when

turning the power system on.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in

thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400

meters).

When turning the power system on in cold weather,

turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights,

climate control system, and rear defogger in order to

reduce 12-volt battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,

an engine block heater will improve starting and

warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can

smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle

checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with

the engine or exhaust system.

Bring the keyless remote close to the POWER button

if the battery in the keyless remote is weak.

2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak

P. 690

Electric Parking Brake Switch

Brake Pedal

uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power

462

Driving

4. Check the READY indicator.

u Keep depressing the brake pedal until

the READY indicator comes on.

u The READY indicator comes on when

the power system is on and you can start

driving.

u If the outside temperature is extremely

low, you cannot drive until conditions are

improved. In this case, the READY

indicator does not come on and a

warning message appears on the driver

information interface.

1Turning on the Power

The power system may not activate if the keyless

remote is subjected to strong radio waves.

Do not hold the POWER button to turn the power

system on. If the power system does not start, wait at

least 30 seconds before trying again.

The engine may not run when the vehicle is ready for

driving.

You can start driving with the READY indicator on.

If you press the POWER button while depressing the

brake pedal with the READY indicator on, the power

mode is set to VEHICLE OFF and you cannot start

driving.

2 READY Indicator P. 106

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from

theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the

power system does not activate.

2 Immobilizer System P. 212

When you set the power mode to ON, you may feel

the brake pedal slightly sink down. This is normal.

READY Indicator

Continued

463

uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power

Driving

You can remotely turn the power system on using the keyless remote.

■

To turn the power system on

Press the button, then press and hold

the button.

u Some exterior lights flash once.

If the power system is turned on successfully,

some exterior lights flash six times.

■

Remote Engine Start

1Remote Engine Start

The remote engine start may violate local laws.

Before using the remote engine start, check your

local laws.

If there are buildings and obstacles between your

vehicle and the keyless remote, the range will be

reduced.

This distance may vary by external electrical

interference.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can

rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly

enclosed areas.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and

even kill you.

Never use the remote engine starter with

the vehicle parked in a garage or other

areas with limited ventilation.

LED: Blinks when any

button is pressed.

uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power

464

Driving

If the power system is not turned on, exterior

lights will not flash.

u Go within the range, and try again.

The power system is on for up to 10 minutes without you starting the vehicle.

To extend the time for another 10 minutes during the first 10 minutes, press the

button, then press and hold the button.

u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was

transmitted successfully.

1Remote Engine Start

The power system may not be turned on by the

remote engine start if:

• You have disabled a remote engine start setting.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

• The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF.

• The transmission is in a position other than (P.

• The hood is open, or any door or the tailgate is

unlocked.

• You have already used the remote twice to turn the

power system on.

• Another registered keyless remote is in the vehicle.

• There is any antenna failure.

• The door is unlocked with the built-in key.

• The engine oil pressure is low.

• The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.

• The telematics unit malfunctions.

• The security system alarm is not set.

• The 12-volt battery charge is too low.

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

Continued

465

uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power

Driving

■

To turn the power system off

Press and hold the button for one

second.

If the power system is turned off successfully,

the exterior lights flash once.

When the remote is out of the keyless access

system range, the exterior lights will not flash.

The power system will not be turned off.

u Go within the range, and try again.

1Remote Engine Start

The power system may be turned off while it is on if:

• You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of

turning the power system on with the keyless

remote.

• The power system is turned off by using the keyless

remote.

• The security system alarm is not set.

• The door is unlocked with the built-in key.

• The hood is open, or any door, or the tailgate is

unlocked.

• You press the shift lever release button.

• The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.

• The 12-volt battery is low.

• The engine oil pressure is low.

• The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if there is

a problem with the emissions control systems.

While the power system is on, the vehicle will

automatically precondition inside the vehicle.

When it is warm outside:

• The climate control system is activated in

recirculation mode.

When it is cold outside:

• The defroster is activated at a moderately warm

temperature.

• The rear defogger, heated door mirrors, seat

heaters and heated steering wheel

are activated.

2 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror

Button P. 233

2 Heated Steering Wheel

P. 263

2 Front Seat Heaters P. 264

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power

466

Driving

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal, then press the POWER button.

2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, check that the READY indicator is on,

then put the transmission into

(D. Select (R when reversing.

3. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the

accelerator pedal.

u Make sure the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off.

2 Parking Brake P. 589

■

Hill start assist system

Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from

rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

Put the transmission into

(D or when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,

then release the brake pedal.

■

Starting to Drive

1Starting to Drive

The power system is turned off when the transmission

is taken out of

(P before the POWER button is

pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to drive.

You can also release the parking brake by pressing

the electric parking brake switch while depressing the

brake pedal.

When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle

more smoothly by manually releasing it with the

electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with

the accelerator pedal.

As a hybrid vehicle, the sounds and vibrations from

the engine may be absent even though the vehicle is

ready for driving. It also makes you fail to recognize

that you can start.

Make sure to check if the READY indicator is on

before you start to drive.

When the power system was turned on using the

button on the keyless remote

When the power system was turned on using the button on the keyless remote

When the power system was turned on in any case

1Hill start assist system

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from

rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and

will not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking

brake.

Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is

switched off.

467

uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power

Driving

You can turn the power system off when the vehicle is completely stopped.

1. Put the transmission into

(P.

2. Press the POWER button.

■

Stopping the Power System

1Stopping the Power System

The power mode will automatically turn to VEHICLE

OFF about 20 minutes after the following conditions

have been met:

• A door has been opened, such as when leaving the

vehicle.

• The transmission is in (P.

• The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

468

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

Driving

Precautions While Driving

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

To prevent rollovers or loss of control:

• Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle.

• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible.

• Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity.

• Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof.

Never carry more than 165 lbs (75 kg) of cargo on the roof rack (Honda accessory).

Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or

driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.

Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

■

Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle

■

In Rain

■

Other Precautions

1Precautions While Driving

NOTICE

Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the

accelerator pedal. You could damage the

transmission.

NOTICE

If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an

extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in

the full left or right position for a while, the electric

power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system

goes into a protective mode, and limits its

performance. The steering wheel becomes harder

and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,

the EPS system is restored.

Repeated operation under these conditions can

eventually damage the system.

If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while

driving, the power system will shut down and all

steering and brake power assist functions will stop,

making it difficult to control the vehicle.

Do not select

(N while driving as you will lose

regenerative braking (and acceleration) performance.

During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,

avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so

as not to damage the engine or powertrain.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km)

after purchasing your new vehicle or replacing the

brake pads or rotors, to allow for proper break-in.

469

uuWhen DrivinguTransmission

Driving

Transmission

As with a conventional gasoline-powered vehicle with an automatic transmission,

this vehicle will creep.

Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped or ensure that brake-hold is

engaged.

Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the vehicle

to react similar to an automatic transmission vehicle, unexpectedly increasing vehicle

speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and

curves.

1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle

Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result

in a crash or a rollover.

2 Important Handling Information P. 48

■

Creeping

■

Kickdown

470

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Driving

Shifting

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

■

Shift positions

1Shifting

While the High Voltage battery level is full, or the

High Voltage battery temperature is low,

regenerative braking may become less effective.

The beeper sounds and the message appears on the

driver information interface when you depress the

accelerator pedal with the shift position in

(N.

Change the shift position to

(D or (R with the brake

pedal depressed.

You cannot change the power mode from ON to

VEHICLE OFF unless the shift position is in

(P.

You may occasionally find that it takes longer than

usual for the vehicle to start moving when you select

(R, release the brake pedal, and/or depress the

accelerator pedal. This may occur when the High

Voltage battery level is extremely low, and does not

indicate a vehicle malfunction.

WARNING

The vehicle can roll away if left unattended

without confirming that Park is engaged.

A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash

resulting in serious injury or death.

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal

until you have confirmed that

(P is shown

on the shift position indicator.

Reverse

Used when reversing.

Drive

Used for normal driving

●

The deceleration paddle selector can

be used temporarily.

●

The deceleration paddle selector can

be used when SPORT mode is ON.

Park

Used when parking or turning the power

on or off.

Neutral

Transmission is not locked.

Release Button

Drive (B)

●

Used when driving down a long hill

and to increase regenerative braking.

●

The deceleration paddle selector can

be used.

471

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Driving

■

Shift Operation

1Shift Operation

NOTICE

When you change the shift position from (D to (R

and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the

brake pedal depressed.

Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come

to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift position indicator to check the lever

position before pulling away.

If the transmission system indicator blinks when

driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with

the transmission.

Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission

checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

When shifting positions in extremely low

temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short

delay before the shift position is displayed. Always

confirm you are in the correct shift position before

driving.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the

brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release

button is held down.

Depress the brake pedal first.

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release

button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.

Press the shift lever release button and shift.

Deceleration

Paddle Selector

Indicator

Shift Position Indicator

(Transmission System

Indicator)

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

472

uuWhen DrivinguDeceleration Paddle Selector

Driving

Deceleration Paddle Selector

When you release the accelerator pedal, you can control the rate of deceleration

without removing your hands from the steering wheel. Using the deceleration

paddle selector situated on the steering wheel, you can sequentially shift through

four stages of deceleration.

When descending a hill, you can use the deceleration paddle selector to help

maintain the rate of deceleration, thereby allowing you to keep a safe distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

■

Deceleration Paddle Selector Operation

1Deceleration Paddle Selector

CAUTION

Rapidly increasing the deceleration rate by

quickly shifting the deceleration paddle

selector can cause the tires to skid, resulting

in a crash that could injure or kill someone.

Always maintain a reasonable rate of

deceleration.

Paddle Selector

Deceleration Stage

Deceleration

Paddle Selector

Indicator

Continued

473

uuWhen DrivinguDeceleration Paddle Selector

Driving

■

When the shift position is in (D

If you pull back the paddle selector, the rate of deceleration will increase

temporarily, and the stage will appear on the gauge.

The deceleration paddle selector will cancel automatically and the deceleration

paddle selector indicator on the gauge will disappear when you drive at a constant

speed or slow to a near stop.

■

When the shift position is in (D and drive mode is SPORT

If you choose SPORT mode, the rate of deceleration will increase and the stage

along with M will appear.

When you want to cancel the deceleration paddle selector, change out of SPORT

mode. When canceled, the deceleration paddle selector indicator on the gauge

disappears.

■

When the shift position is in

If you change the shift position to , the rate of deceleration will increase and the

stage along with M will appear.

When you want to cancel the deceleration paddle selector, change the shift position

(D and change out of SPORT mode. When canceled, the deceleration paddle

selector indicator on the gauge disappears.

1Deceleration Paddle Selector

In the following situations, the stage may not change

and the stage icon will blink even if you pull back the

selector. The deceleration stage may decrease or

cancel automatically:

• The High Voltage battery is fully charged or its

temperature is too cold or too hot.

• The speed of the vehicle is beyond the deceleration

range with SPORT mode off.

• Hybrid system protection is needed.

• The paddle selector is operated while your vehicle is

stopped automatically by ACC with Low Speed

Follow.

If either paddle selector is operated while driving,

ACC with Low Speed Follow will cancel

automatically.

If you pull back the right and left paddle selector at

the same time, the deceleration stage may not

change.

474

uuWhen DrivinguDeceleration Paddle Selector

Driving

■

Common operations

To select the different stages of deceleration:

• Pull back the

(+ selector (right side) to decrease the deceleration stage.

• Pull back the (- selector (left side) to increase the deceleration stage.

Each paddle selector operation makes a single

stage deceleration change.

u The deceleration stage may not change if

you keep the paddle selector pulled

back.

Increase

Deceleration

Stage

Decrease

475

uuWhen DrivinguAcoustic Vehicle Alerting System

Driving

Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System

Alerts pedestrians when the vehicle transmission is in a position other than (P and

is traveling at speeds of 22 mph (36 km/h) or less.

476

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System

Driving

Drive Mode System

Press the DRIVE MODE switch to select the appropriate mode. The mode you select

appears on the driver information interface.

1Drive Mode System

The mode may not be able to be changed under

some driving conditions.

If there is a vehicle system failure, a message will also

appear on the driver information interface, and you

cannot change the mode.

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

477

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System

Continued

Driving

■

Selecting the Drive Mode

DRIVE MODE Switch

NORMAL

Mode

ECON

Mode

SNOW

Mode

SPORT

Mode

478

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System

Driving

Enhances responsiveness to the driver's input.

Optimizes the balance between operability

and comfort.

■

SPORT Mode

■

NORMAL Mode

479

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System

Driving

Facilitates fuel-efficient driving.

Maximizes controllability on snowy road

through powertrain settings.

The mode for the next start-up is saved according to the following chart.

Each keyless remote has its own mode saved.

■

ECON Mode

1ECON Mode

While in ECON mode, the climate control system will

be less effective and the vehicle will be slower to

accelerate.

■

SNOW Mode

1SNOW Mode

NOTICE

SNOW mode does not allow you to drive on snowy

or frozen roads in all situations. There are limits to

SNOW mode.

When driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount

winter tires or tire chains, reduce speed, and maintain

sufficient distance between vehicles.

2 Winter Tires P. 660

■

Next Start-up Mode

Last Mode Next Mode

SPORT, NORMAL, or SNOW NORMAL

ECON ECON

Models with driving position memory system

480

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System

Driving

Drive Mode System

Press the DRIVE MODE switch to select the appropriate mode. The mode you select

appears on the driver information interface and audio/information screen.

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

1Drive Mode System

The mode may not be able to be changed under

some driving conditions.

If there is a vehicle system failure, a message will also

appear on the driver information interface, and you

cannot change the mode.

481

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System

Continued

Driving

■

Selecting the Drive Mode

Changing modes

by DRIVE MODE

switch alters the

screen on the

driver information

interface.

DRIVE MODE

Switch

Press the or button

Press the DRIVE MODE switch

up and hold or select

Customize  P. 485

Press the DRIVE MODE switch

up or down

INDIVIDUAL Settings Screen

Audio/Information Screen

INDIVIDUAL Mode

NORMAL Mode

*1: The display returns to audio/information

screen a few seconds after pressing the

DRIVE MODE switch up or down.

SPORT Mode

ECON Mode

SNOW Mode

482

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System

Driving

Each category can be customized separately

to suit the driver’s preference.

2 Customizing the INDIVIDUAL Settings

P. 485

Enhances responsiveness to the driver's input.

■

INDIVIDUAL Mode

■

SPORT Mode

Continued

483

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System

Driving

Optimizes the balance between operability

and comfort.

Facilitates fuel-efficient driving.

■

NORMAL Mode

■

ECON Mode

1ECON Mode

While in ECON mode, the climate control system will

be less effective and the vehicle will be slower to

accelerate.

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System

484

Driving

Maximizes controllability on snowy road

through powertrain settings.

The mode for the next start-up is saved according to the following chart.

Each keyless remote has its own mode saved.

■

SNOW Mode

1SNOW Mode

NOTICE

SNOW mode does not allow you to drive on snowy

or frozen roads in all situations. There are limits to

SNOW mode.

When driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount

winter tires or tire chains, reduce speed, and maintain

sufficient distance between vehicles.

2 Winter Tires P. 660

■

Next Start-up Mode

Last Mode Next Mode

INDIVIDUAL, SPORT, NORMAL, or SNOW NORMAL

ECON ECON

485

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System

Driving

1. Select INDIVIDUAL mode.

2. Press the DRIVE MODE switch up and hold

or select Customize to open the

INDIVIDUAL Settings.

u You can also select from Customized

Features on the audio/information

screen.

2 Selecting the Drive Mode P. 481

2 Customized Features P. 396

3. Select the setting category.

4. Select the desired setting.

■

Customizing the INDIVIDUAL Settings

1Customizing the INDIVIDUAL Settings

When you select Reset to Default on the

INDIVIDUAL Settings screen, all INDIVIDUAL

settings are reset to their factory defaults.

486

uuWhen DrivinguHill Descent Control System

Driving

Hill Descent Control System

When driving down hills where engine braking is not enough to decelerate the

vehicle, this system helps maintain a constant vehicle speed without needing to

depress the brake pedal.

The system operates under the following conditions.

• Driving at a speed between about 2-12 mph (3-20 km/h).

• Driving downhill.

• Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not depressed.

The system’s operating status

• Green: Activated

• White: Standby

Vehicle speed display

• White: Set speed

• Gray: Current speed

u Blinks when the vehicle speed is above

the operating speed.

■

Hill Descent Control Operating Conditions

■

Driver Information Interface Display

1Hill Descent Control System

The brake lights automatically come on while the

system is in operation.

The system may not operate when driving down a

gentle slope. Check the Hill Descent Control System

indicator to see if the system is in operation.

The system may activate even when not driving

downhill, such as when the vehicle leans while

driving over uneven surfaces.

WARNING

Hill descent control cannot maintain a

constant vehicle speed in every situation.

When driving down a very steep hill or on

slippery road surfaces, the vehicle may not

be able to maintain the vehicle speed and

could cause a crash, resulting in serious

injury or death.

Since Hill Descent Control is not designed

to increase the limits of vehicle

performance, the driver must always be

aware of road surface conditions and drive

safely.

System’s Operating Status

Vehicle Speed

Display

Current Speed

Operating Range of Set Speed

487

uuWhen DrivinguHill Descent Control System

Driving

■

To turn the system on

When the vehicle speed is less than about 12

mph (20 km/h), press the button to turn

the system on.

u The system goes into standby mode, and

the Hill Descent Control System indicator

(white) comes on.

When all the working conditions are met, the

system activates, and the vehicle begins to

maintain the vehicle speed when driving

downhill.

u The Hill Descent Control System indicator

(green) comes on when operating.

■

To adjust the set speed

Depress the accelerator pedal or brake pedal

to adjust the vehicle speed within the

operating range. The vehicle speed at which

you release the accelerator pedal or brake

pedal will be the set speed.

■

To turn the system off

Press the button to turn the system off.

■

How to Operate Hill Descent Control

1How to Operate Hill Descent Control

Using the system repeatedly for a long time may

cause the brakes to heat up and make the system go

into standby mode temporarily.

Hill Descent Control is turned off every time you turn

the power system off, even if it was turned on the last

time you drove the vehicle.

The pedals may vibrate or you may hear the system

working when in operation.

Hill Descent Control System

Indicator

(Hill Descent Control) Button

1To turn the system off

When the vehicle speed is about 37 mph (60 km/h) or

more, the system turns off automatically.

488

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

Driving

Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®), aka Electronic

Stability Control (ESC), System

VSA® helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less

than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.

It does so by regulating engine and motor output and selectively applying the

brakes.

When VSA® activates, you may notice that the

engine and motor do not respond to the

accelerator. You may also notice some noise

from the hydraulic brake system. You will also

see the indicator blink.

■

VSA® Operation

1Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control

(ESC), System

The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and

size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and

type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays

on while driving, there may be a problem with the

system. While this may not interfere with normal

driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer

immediately.

VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations

and does not control the entire braking system. You

still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate

for the conditions and always leave a sufficient

margin of safety.

The main function of the VSA® system is generally

known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The

system also includes a traction control function.

The Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®) system, brake

system (Amber), Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with

Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/TPMS

and safety

support indicators may come on in amber along with a

message in the gauge when you set the power mode

to ON after reconnecting the 12-volt battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your

vehicle checked by a dealer.

VSA® System

Indicator

* Not available on all models

489

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

Driving

You can partially disable VSA® features using the driver information interface.

2 Switching the Display P. 125

2 VSA Mode P. 139

2 Switching the Display P. 154

2 Vehicle Stability Assist Mode P. 168

Your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but traction control

function will be less effective.

VSA® is turned on every time you turn the power system on, even if you turned it off

the last time you drove the vehicle.

■

VSA® On and Off

1Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control

(ESC), System

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets

stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier

to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.

When VSA® is set to OFF (unchecked), the traction

control function becomes less effective. This allows

for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You

should only attempt to free your vehicle with the

VSA® off if you are not able to free it when the VSA®

is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to

switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving

your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the

engine compartment while system checks are being

performed immediately after turning the power

system on or while driving. This is normal.

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

490

uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist

Driving

Agile Handling Assist

Lightly brakes each of the front and rear wheels, as needed, when you turn the

steering wheel, and helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during

cornering.

1Agile Handling Assist

The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in

all driving situations. You still need to drive and

corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and

always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays

on while driving, the agile handling assist does not

activate.

You may hear a sound coming from the engine

compartment while the agile handling assist is

activated. This is normal.

491

uuWhen DrivinguReal Time AWD with Intelligent Control System

Driving

Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control System

Your vehicle is equipped with the AWD system. When the system senses a loss of

front wheel traction, it automatically transfers some power to the rear wheels. This

allows you to utilize all available traction and may increase mobility.

You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking

that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle.

If you excessively spin all four wheels and overheat the AWD system, only the front

wheels receive power. Stop until the system cools down.

1Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control System

NOTICE

Do not continuously spin the front tires of your

vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can

cause transmission or rear differential damage.

The AWD system may not function properly if tire

type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same

size and type of tire, and the air pressures as

specified.

2 Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 658

* Not available on all models

492

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Driving

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle

monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each

wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are

significantly under-inflated.

This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS

indicator to come on and a message to appear

on the gauge.

U.S. models

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

The system does not monitor the tires when driving

at low speed.

Conditions such as low ambient temperature and

altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can

trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.

Tire pressure checked and inflated in:

• Warm weather can become under-inflated in

colder weather.

• Cold weather can become overinflated in warmer

weather.

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come

on as a result of overinflation.

The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and

size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and

type of tire.

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 652

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on

with a delay or may not come on at all when:

• You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the

steering wheel.

• You drive on snowy or slippery roads.

• Tire chains are used.

• The tire loses air pressure rapidly.

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on

under the following conditions:

• There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,

such as when towing a trailer, than the condition at

calibration.

• Tire chains are used.

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Continued

493

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Driving

You must start TPMS calibration every time you:

• Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.

• Rotate the tires.

• Replace one or more tires.

Before calibrating the TPMS:

• Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.

2 Checking Tires P. 652

Make sure:

• The vehicle is at a complete stop.

• The transmission is in

(P.

• The power mode is in ON.

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

The Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®) system, brake

system (Amber), Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with

Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/TPMS and safety

support indicators may come on in amber along with

a message in the gauge when you set the power

mode to ON after reconnecting the 12-volt battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your

vehicle checked by a dealer.

■

TPMS Calibration

1TPMS Calibration

The calibration process requires approximately 30

minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between

31-62 mph (50-100 km/h).

During this period, if power mode is set to ON and

the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you may

notice the low tire pressure indicator comes on

briefly. This is normal and indicates that the

calibration process is not yet complete.

If the tire chains are installed, remove them before

calibrating the TPMS.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even

when the properly inflated specified regular tires are

installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

We recommend that the tires be replaced with the

same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a

dealer for details.

494

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Driving

When you calibrate the TPMS, do the

following.

2 Switching the Display P. 125

1. Press the (home) button, to select

Vehicle settings, then press the left

selector wheel.

u Vehicle settings appears on the display.

2. Roll the left selector wheel.

u TPMS calibration appears on the

display.

Models with A-type meter

495

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Continued

Driving

3. Press the left selector wheel.

u The display switches to the

customization setup screen, where you

can select Cancel or Calibrate.

4. Roll the left selector wheel and select

Calibrate, then press the left selector

wheel.

u Calibration started screen appears,

then the display returns to the

customization menu screen.

• If the Calibration failed to start message

appears, repeat step 4.

• The calibration process finishes

automatically.

496

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Driving

When you calibrate the TPMS, do the

following.

2 Switching the Display P. 154

1. Roll the right selector wheel to select

Vehicle settings, then press the right

selector wheel.

2. Roll the right selector wheel.

u TPMS calibration appears on the

display.

Models with B-type meter and

9“ Color Touchscreen

497

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Continued

Driving

3. Press the right selector wheel.

u The display switches to the

customization setup screen, where you

can select Cancel or Calibrate.

4. Roll the right selector wheel and select

Calibrate, then press the right selector

wheel.

u Calibration started screen appears,

then the display returns to the

customization menu screen.

• If the Calibration failed to start message

appears, repeat step 4.

• The calibration process finishes

automatically.

498

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Driving

When you calibrate the TPMS, do the

following.

2 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

P. 304

1. Set the power mode to ON.

2. Press the button.

3. Select Vehicle Settings.

4. Select TPMS Calibration.

5. Select Calibrate or Cancel.

• If the Calibration failed to start. message

appears, repeat step 5.

• The calibration process finishes

automatically.

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

with Google built-in

499

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Continued

Driving

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required

Federal Explanation

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked

monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated

on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should

determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with

a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low

tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces

fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's

handling and stopping ability.

U.S. models

500

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Driving

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire

maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain

correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the

level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction

indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire

pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the

telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain

continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may

not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including

the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the

vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or

more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to

continue to function properly.

501

uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System

Continued

Driving

Blind Spot Information System

When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the

appropriate indicator comes on, providing assistance when you change lanes.

The system activates when your vehicle is moving forward at about 20 mph (32 km/h)

or above.

Alert zone range

A: Approx. 1.6 ~ 10 feet (0.5 ~ 3 meters) from vehicle side.

B: Approx. 10 feet (3 meters) from rear bumper.

C: Approx. 10 ~ 82 feet (3 ~ 25 meters) behind from rear bumper. (The faster the

approaching vehicle, the further away it will be detected.)

The initially set alert zone is alert zone 1. Over time, after the vehicle has been driven

on straight roads with traffic and roadside objects, the system will adapt and expand

the alert zone (alert zone 1 and 2).

■

How the System Works

1Blind Spot Information System

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, the blind spot information

system has limitations. Always look in your mirrors, to

either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other

vehicles before changing lanes. Overreliance on the

blind spot information system may result in a

collision.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer in the

following situations:

• The rear bumper or area around the radar sensors

is strongly impacted.

• The indicator does not come on even if a vehicle in

the alert zone should have been detected.

• The rear bumper or any system components need

to be repaired.

If the rear bumper or any system components are

repaired, the system will revert to alert zone 1 only

until it is able to adapt and expand to alert zone 1

and 2.

For proper blind spot information system operation:

• Always keep the rear bumper and area around the

radar sensors clean.

• Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with

labels or stickers of any kind.

Radar Sensors : underneath

the rear bumper corners

: Alert Zone 1

: Alert Zone 2

uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System

502

Driving

■

When the system detects a vehicle

Blind spot information system alert indicator:

Located on the outside door mirror on both

sides.

Comes on when:

• A vehicle approaches you from behind to

overtake you at a speed difference of no

more than about 31 mph (50 km/h).

• You pass a vehicle at a speed difference of

no more than about 12 mph (20 km/h).

Blinks and a beeper sounds when:

You use the turn signal lever to signal a turn in

the direction of the detected vehicle while the

blind spot information system alert indicator is

on.

u The beeper sounds three times.

1Blind Spot Information System

The system is for your convenience only. Even if an

object is within the alert zone, the following

situations may occur:

• The blind spot information system alert indicator

does not come on and the Blind spot

information system not available message

appears on the driver information interface.

• The blind spot information system alert indicator

may come on even with the message displayed.

The Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®) system, brake

system (Amber), Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with

Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/TPMS

and

safety support indicators may come on in amber

along with a message in the gauge when you set the

power mode to ON after reconnecting the 12-volt

battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your

vehicle checked by a dealer.

Turn the system off when towing a trailer.

The system may not work properly for the following

reasons:

• The added mass tilts the vehicle and changes the

radar coverage.

• The trailer itself can be detected by the radar

sensors, causing the Blind Spot Information System

alert indicators to come on.

Comes On

Blinks

* Not available on all models

Continued

503

uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System

Driving

You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.

2 Switching the Display P. 125, 154

2 Safety Support P. 137, 166

The blind spot information system will stay on the previously selected on or off

setting each time you turn the power system on.

■

Blind Spot Information System On and Off

1Blind Spot Information System

You can change the settings for the blind spot

information system.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

504

uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System

Driving

The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on under the

following conditions:

• There is a large speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle in the

adjacent lane.

• A vehicle is parked in a side lane.

• An object not detected by the radar sensors approaches or passes your vehicle.

• The vehicle driving in the adjacent lane is a motorcycle or other small vehicle.

The blind spot information system may not operate correctly under the following

conditions:

• Making a turn at an intersection.

• Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc.) are detected.

• An object that does not reflect radio waves well or a motorcycle, is in the alert

zone.

• Driving on a curved road.

• A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent lane.

• The system picks up signal interference such as other radar sensors from another

vehicle or strong radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.

• The rear bumper or the area around the radar sensors is covered by dirt, mud,

snow, ice, etc.

• The rear bumper or the area around the radar sensors has been damaged or

deformed.

• In bad weather (heavy rain, snow, and fog).

• Making a short turn or driving on a bumpy road that slightly tilts the vehicle.

• An object such as a bicycle rack is attached to the rear of the vehicle.

■

Blind Spot Information System Conditions and Limitations

505

uuWhen DrivinguHigh Voltage Battery

Driving

High Voltage Battery

The High Voltage battery gradually discharges even if the vehicle is not in use. As a

result, if your vehicle is parked for an extended period of time, the battery charge

level will become low. Extended periods of time at a low state of charge will shorten

battery life. To maintain the battery state of charge, drive your vehicle for more than

30 minutes at least once every three months.

Extreme high temperatures can affect the battery life. You can minimize the effects

by parking the vehicle in the shade during the summer.

1High Voltage Battery

Be careful not to let the High Voltage battery drain

too much. If the battery level becomes close to zero,

it will make it impossible to start the engine.

506

Driving

Honda Sensing®

Assists with functions such as acceleration, braking, and steering in order to reduce

the burden on the driver, as well as help avoid or reduce the severity of collisions.

Honda Sensing® has the following functions.

■

The functions which do not require switch operations to activate

• Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

) 2 P. 509

• Low Speed Braking Control

2 P. 522

• Road Departure Mitigation System 2 P. 528

• Traffic Sign Recognition System 2 P. 578

• Blind Spot Information System 2 P. 501

• Cross Traffic Monitor 2 P. 606

• Parking Sensor System

2 P. 601

• Auto High-Beam 2 P. 227

• Driver Attention Monitor 2 P. 133, 162

■

The functions which require switch operations to activate

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

2 P. 536

• Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 2 P. 558

• Traffic Jam Assist 2 P. 569

1Honda Sensing®

Make sure that all the tires are of the same specified

size, type and brand, and that they are evenly worn. If

you use tires of different sizes, types, brands, or degree

of wear, the system may not work properly.

Do not modify the suspension. Altering the height of

the vehicle may prevent the system from working

properly.

* Not available on all models

507

uuHonda Sensing® u

Continued

Driving

■

Button

Press to activate standby mode for ACC with

Low Speed Follow.

Or press to cancel the system.

■

LKAS Button

Press to activate standby mode for LKAS and

Traffic Jam Assist.

Or press to cancel these systems.

■

Interval Button

Press to change the ACC with Low Speed

Follow following-interval.

■

CANCEL Button

Press to cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow.

■

RES/+/SET/− Switch

Press the RES/+/SET/− switch up to set or

resume the ACC with Low Speed Follow or

increase the vehicle speed.

Press the RES/+/SET/− switch down to set the

ACC with Low Speed Follow or decrease the

vehicle speed.

■

Operation Switches for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

with Low Speed Follow/Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)/

Traffic Jam Assist

Interval Button

Button

LKAS Button

CANCEL Button

RES/+/SET/− Switch

508

uuHonda Sensing® u

Driving

You can see the current state of Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow, Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) and Traffic Jam Assist.

a Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow

is ready to be activated.

• Green: The system is on.

• White: The system is standby.

• Amber: There is a problem with the system.

b Indicates that LKAS or Traffic Jam Assist is

ready to be activated.

• Green: The system is operating.

• White: The system is standby.

• Amber: There is a problem with the system.

c Indicates that LKAS or Traffic Jam Assist is

activated and whether or not traffic lane

lines are detected.

• Green lines: The system is operating.

• White lines: Traffic lane lines are detected.

• Amber line: Lane departure is detected.

d Indicates whether or not a vehicle is

detected ahead.

• Control target vehicle: White and outlined

in green

• Outside of control target vehicle: Gray

e Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow

shows the set vehicle speed.

f Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow

shows the set vehicle interval.

■

Gauge Content

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

509

uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

Continued

Driving

Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle

colliding with a vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead from behind, an oncoming

vehicle in front, a vehicle approaching from the side, a pedestrian, or someone

riding a bicycle (moving bicycle). The CMBS

is designed to alert you when the

potential for a collision is determined, as well as assist in reducing speed, avoiding

collisions, and reducing collision severity.

1Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

Important Safety Reminder

The CMBS

is designed to reduce the severity of an

unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collisions

nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your

responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering

wheel appropriately according to the driving

conditions.

The CMBS

may not activate or may not detect a

vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain

conditions:

2 CMBS

Conditions and Limitations P. 514

For directions on the proper handling of the radar

sensor, refer to the following page.

2 Radar Sensor P. 587

You can read about handling information for the

camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 585

uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

510

Driving

■

How the system works

The CMBS

will be canceled when your vehicle stops or the system determines

there no longer is the potential for a collision.

The CMBS

may also be canceled when a driver operates the steering wheel and

the brake or accelerator pedal to avoid a collision.

1How the system works

The camera in the CMBS

is also designed to detect

pedestrians.

However, this pedestrian detection feature may not

activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of

your vehicle under certain conditions.

Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection

limitations from the list.

2 CMBS

Conditions and Limitations P. 514

The radar sensor is behind

the Honda emblem on the

front grille.

A front sensor camera

is located behind the

rearview mirror.

The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about

3 mph (5 km/h) or above and will search for a vehicle (including motorcycles),

pedestrian, or moving bicycle in front of you.

When to use

The CMBS

activates when:

●

The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle (including motorcycles),

pedestrian, or moving bicycle detected in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5

km/h) and over with a chance of a collision.

●

Your vehicle drives at about 18 mph (30 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a

frontal collision with a detected oncoming vehicle (including motorcycles),

pedestrian, or moving bicycle when you turn left at an intersection.

●

Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and the system determines

there is a chance of a collision with:

- An oncoming or stationary vehicle detected in front of you.

- A pedestrian or moving bicycle detected in front of you.

- A vehicle approaching from the side in front of you.

511

uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

Continued

Driving

■

When the system activates

You can change the distance (Long/Normal/Short) between vehicles at which the

system's earliest collision alert will come on.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

When in Long, visual and audible alerts come on at a longer distance from a vehicle

ahead than in Normal setting, and in Short, at a shorter distance than in Normal.

The system provides visual and audible alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the

collision is avoided.

u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change

lanes, etc.).

Beep

Visual Alerts

Audible Alert

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

512

uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

Driving

The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBS

may not go through all of

the stages before initiating the last stage.

■

Collision Alert Stages

Distance between vehicles

CMBS

The radar sensor detects a vehicle Audible & Visual WARNINGS

Braking

Stage

one

There is a risk of a collision with the

vehicle ahead of you.

The visual alert flashes.

If the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle

in front of you continues to decrease, the audible

alert sounds in addition to the visual alert flashing.

u The collision warning distance can be changed.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

—

Stage

two

The risk of a collision has increased,

time to respond is reduced.

Visual and audible alerts.

Lightly

applied

Stage

three

The CMBS

determines that a

collision is unavoidable.

Forcefully

applied

Your Vehicle Vehicle Ahead

Normal

ShortLong

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Your Vehicle Vehicle Ahead

Your

Vehicle

Ahead

* Not available on all models

Continued

513

uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

Driving

You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.

2 Switching the Display P. 125, 154

2 Safety Support P. 137, 166

The CMBS

is turned on every time you turn the power system on, even if you

turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

■

CMBS

On and Off

1CMBS

On and Off

You cannot turn the CMBS

off while driving.

The CMBS

may automatically shut off, and the

safety support indicator (amber) will come and stay

on under certain conditions:

2 CMBS

Conditions and Limitations P. 514

When the CMBS

is activated, it will continue to

operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially

depressed. However, it will be canceled if the

accelerator pedal is fully depressed.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any

unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning

message appears too frequently).

The Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®) system, brake

system (Amber), Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with

Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/TPMS

and

safety support indicators may come on in amber

along with a message in the gauge when you set the

power mode to ON after reconnecting the 12-volt

battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your

vehicle checked by a dealer.

* Not available on all models

514

uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

Driving

In the following situations, the radar sensor or camera may be unable to correctly

detect vehicles, pedestrians, moving bicycles, or road conditions, potentially causing

the CMBS

to operate improperly.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 585

2 Radar Sensor P. 587

■

Environmental conditions

• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.

• There is little contrast between objects and the background.

• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).

• Strong light is reflected onto vehicles (including motorcycles), pedestrians,

moving bicycles or roadway.

• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.

• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.

• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.

• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,

vehicles [including motorcycles], pedestrians, moving bicycles or other vehicles

may not be detected).

■

Roadway conditions

• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,

reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).

• Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.

• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.

• Driving through an area where there are objects that strongly reflect radio waves

onto vehicles, pedestrians, or moving bicycles.

• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

■

CMBS

Conditions and Limitations

515

uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

Continued

Driving

■

Vehicle conditions

• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.

• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.

• The inside of the windshield is fogged.

• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, etc.).

• When tire chains are installed.

• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.

• The camera temperature gets too high.

• Driving with the parking brake applied.

• When the radar sensor behind the Honda emblem on the front grille gets dirty.

• The vehicle is towing a trailer.

• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.

• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.

• Camera vision is blocked by drops of water from the window washer, or by the

wiper blades.

• Operation of the vehicle is unstable due to a slippery road, etc.

516

uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

Driving

■

Examples of limitations on the correct detection of the radar sensor or

camera due to the condition of the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming

vehicles, vehicles approaching from the side, pedestrians, or moving

bicycles

• The distance between your vehicle (including motorcycles) and the vehicle ahead

of you, oncoming vehicle, vehicles approaching from the side, pedestrian, or

moving bicycle ahead of you is too short.

• The vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, vehicles

approaching from the side, pedestrian, or moving bicycle suddenly cuts in front of

or jumps out in front of you.

• The bicycle or sideways-facing vehicle is stopped.

• The oncoming vehicle or vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead of you is sideways

or facing diagonally.

• When the vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead of you, oncoming vehicle,

vehicles approaching from the side, pedestrian, or moving bicycle blends in with

the background, preventing the system from recognizing them.

• When several pedestrians are moving ahead of you in a group.

• When several bicycles are moving ahead of you in a group.

• When a pedestrian or moving bicycle crosses the road too quickly.

• A pedestrian or moving bicycle approaches from the opposite direction.

• The headlights of the vehicle ahead of you or oncoming vehicle are lit on one side

or not lit on either side in a dark place.

• When part of a pedestrian (heads, limbs, etc.) is hidden by a carried object.

• When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, when their hands are raised, or they

are running.

• When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about

6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.

• When the pedestrian is pushing a stroller or bicycle.

• A vehicle is approaching diagonally from the side.

• A specially-shaped vehicle (such as a tanker truck or a truck without a load) is

approaching from the side.

• A vehicle approaching from the side is driving on a curve or hill.

517

uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

Continued

Driving

■

Examples of other limitations on detection or system operation

• When the vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead of you is a small motorcycle,

motorcycle with a sidecar, wheelchair, or other specially shaped vehicle.

• When a vehicle is lower in the rear than the front such as trucks that are not

carrying a load, or a narrow vehicle.

• When the vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead of you, oncoming vehicle,

pedestrian or moving bicycle is not in front of the vehicle.

• The speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle (including

motorcycles) ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian or moving bicycle is

significantly large.

• When the vehicle (including motorcycles) or moving bicycle in front of you slows

suddenly.

• When the driver operates the brake pedal and steering wheel to avoid a collision.

• When you approach the vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead of you, oncoming

vehicle, pedestrians or moving bicycles while accelerating rapidly or operating the

steering wheel (except when turning left at an intersection, etc.)

• When the moving bicycle is a child-sized bicycle, folding bicycle, three-wheeler or

other bicycle with small tires, or a long bicycle like a tandem bicycle.

• When the radar and camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the vehicle

(including motorcycles) ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, vehicle approaching

from the side, pedestrian, or moving bicycle.

• When a vehicle (including motorcycles) that has an extremely high minimum

ground clearance is ahead of you or approaching from the side.

• When turning left or right and your turn signal is not activated in the same

direction you are turning.

*1: When there is a possibility of a frontal collision with the oncoming vehicle while turning left, the CMBS

is activated. However, it may not be activated if you suddenly turn the steering wheel.

518

uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

Driving

■

Automatic shutoff

The CMBS

may automatically shut itself off and the safety support indicator

(amber) comes and stays on when:

• You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an

extended period.

• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

• Driving with the parking brake applied.

• The camera temperature gets too high.

• The front of the camera or radar sensor behind the Honda emblem is obstructed

by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, accessories, decals, stickers, film, etc.

• An abnormal tire condition is detected (incorrect tire size, flat tire, etc.).

Once the conditions that caused the CMBS

to shut off improve or are addressed

(e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.

519

uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

Continued

Driving

Even if there is little chance of a collision, the CMBS

may activate under the

following conditions.

Also, the system may activate if it detects a possibility of collision with pedestrians,

moving bicycles, or vehicles.

• Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right

turn.

• Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to

pass.

■

With Little Chance of a Collision

520

uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

Driving

• When your vehicle approaches vehicles, pedestrians, or moving bicycles.

• When vehicles, pedestrians, or moving bicycles are passing in front of you.

• When you drive under a low structure or through a narrow gate at high speed.

• When there are traffic signs or structures such as guard rails beside the road along

a curve.

• When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where the oncoming

vehicle is right in front of you.

• When approaching stationary vehicles or walls, such as when parking.

521

uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

Driving

• A vehicle approaches from the side as it is driving through a curve.

• You pass by a vehicle (including motorcycles), pedestrian, or bicycle that is turning

left or right.

• You pass in front of a vehicle (including motorcycles), pedestrian, or bicycle that

is approaching from the side.

• A vehicle (including motorcycles), pedestrian, or bicycle turns left or right while

approaching your vehicle from the side.

• You attempt to pass in front of a vehicle (including motorcycles) or bicycle while

you are turning left or right.

• A vehicle (including motorcycles) or bicycle is attempting to pass in front of your

vehicle while you are turning left or right.

• A vehicle (including motorcycles), pedestrian, or bicycle enters the path of your

vehicle and stops in front of you.

• When you are turning left or right, a crossing pedestrian enters the path of your

vehicle and stops in front of you.

• You pass close by the side of a vehicle parked on the street.

522

uuHonda Sensing® uLow Speed Braking Control

Driving

Low Speed Braking Control

Using sonar sensors located on the front and rear bumpers, this system can detect if

there is danger of a potential collision with a wall or other obstacle during normal

driving or when the accelerator pedal is depressed with too much force. The system

then assists in avoiding collisions and reducing damage from impact through

assistive braking and/or assistive driving power suppression.

1Low Speed Braking Control

If the Low Speed Braking Control activates in a

situation where you do not want automatic brake

application (such as when the vehicle is between two

railroad crossing gates), simply press the brake pedal

to deactivate the system and then continue to drive

as intended.

WARNING

The Low Speed Braking Control System

cannot avoid all collisions and may not

reduce damage in each situation where the

accelerator is mistakenly or aggressively

pressed. Overreliance on the system may

result in a collision with serious injury or

death. Always check your surroundings,

your shift position, and your pedal use.

Driver remains responsible for safely

operating the vehicle.

* Not available on all models

Continued

523

uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control

Driving

■

Assistive braking

Assistive braking provides a visual and audible alert when the vehicle is moving

between approximately 1 and 6 mph (2 and 10 km/h) and there is the possibility of

a collision with a detected wall or other obstacles, as well as providing assistance

with braking.

If only the rear parking sensors are turned off, the assistive braking will not work

when reversing.

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

■

How the System Works

1Low Speed Braking Control

For directions on the proper handling of the sonar

sensors, please refer to the following page.

2 Sonar Sensors

P. 588

The vehicle will release the brake and start moving a

few seconds after the system is activated. To keep the

vehicle stopped, keep the brake pedal depressed or

put the transmission into

(P.

In order to prevent the system from activating when

not needed, always turn it off during vehicle

maintenance; when loading on ships, trucks, and so

on; when using a chassis dynamometer or free rollers

for inspection; or when washing the car in conveyor

type car wash machine.

If you put any accessories (such as a bicycle rack) on

or around the rear sensors, the Low Speed Braking

Control System may activate if it detects these

accessories as an obstacle. In this case, turn off the

rear sensor.

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Audible Alert

Beep

The vehicle

applies brake

Driver

depresses

brake pedal

Release

brake after

maintaining

stationary

position

Stop

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

524

uuHonda Sensing® uLow Speed Braking Control

Driving

■

Assistive driving power suppression

When the vehicle is stopped or moving at less than 6 mph (10 km/h) and there is an

obstacle such as a wall detected near the front or back of the vehicle, if the

accelerator pedal is depressed more than necessary, the system will inform you with

a visual and audible alert. At the same time, the system will prevent sudden forward

or backwards movement by limiting the output of the power system, then assistive

braking will activate when you get closer to the obstacle.

Assistive driving power suppression will not activate in the following situations.

When moving forward:

• When on a steep slope or the shift position is in

(P, (R, or (N.

When reversing:

• When on a steep slope or the shift position is in a position other than

(R.

Audible Alert

Beep

Accidental depression of the accelerator/Limiting

the output of the power system

Continued

525

uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control

Driving

If only the rear parking sensors are turned off, the assistive driving power

suppression will not work when reversing.

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.

2 Switching the Display P. 154

2 Safety Support P. 166

The system is turned on every time you turn the power system on, even if you turned

it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

■

System On and Off

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

1System On and Off

The Low Speed Braking Control system may

temporarily turn off after reconnecting the 12-volt

battery.

The system will automatically turn ON after the

vehicle has been moving at over 12 mph (20 km/h)

for some time.

If the system does not turn on, have your vehicle

checked by a dealer.

* Not available on all models

uuHonda Sensing® uLow Speed Braking Control

526

Driving

Conditions for assistive driving power suppression:

• When the accelerator is no longer depressed.

• When the accelerator is depressed for approximately four seconds.

• When the brake pedal is depressed.

Conditions for assistive braking cancellation:

• A certain amount of time has passed since activation.

The system may not operate correctly under the following conditions:

■

Examples of obstacles the sonar sensors cannot detect

• Obstacles that do not reflect sound waves well, such as people, snow, cloth,

sponges, etc.

• Thin obstacles such as fences, bicycles, sign posts, etc.

• Short or small obstacles.

• Obstacles immediately in front of the bumper.

• Obstacles that are not perpendicular to the ground.

• Moving objects or obstacles that suddenly enter the road.

■

Conditions for Cancellation

■

Low Speed Braking Control System Conditions and Limitations

1Conditions for Cancellation

After Low Speed Braking Control has activated once,

it will not activate again for the same obstacle.

It can be activated again after driving for a certain

distance after last activation.

Low Speed Braking Control activates separately when

moving forward and reversing. (For example, if it

activates when moving forward, it can be activated

again immediately if reversing.)

However, if assistive braking has been activated, in

order to activate assistive driving power suppression

again, it is necessary to drive for a certain distance to

reset the system.

527

uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control

Driving

■

Examples of situations where the sonar sensors cannot detect obstacles

• The sonar sensors are dirty (covered by snow, water, mud, etc.).

• The vehicle is too hot or cold.

• The steering wheel is turned sharply when approaching the obstacle at an angle.

■

Examples of other cases where the system may not work correctly

• The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load or suspension modifications.

• Bad weather conditions such as heavy rain, fog, snow, sandstorms, etc.

• The ambient temperature/humidity is too high or low.

• When going down a very steep slope.

• When driving off-road such as on dirt, grass or rocks.

• When close to other vehicles with sonar sensors or other objects that emit

ultrasonic waves.

• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, etc.).

■

Situations where the system may activate even without risk of a collision

• When passing through short or narrow gates.

• When driving on uneven surfaces, grassy areas, or places with steps.

• When a sloped pillar or wall is protruding from a high position.

• When there are obstacles next to the road.

• When driving toward flags, curtains, tree branches, railroad crossing bars, etc.

• When driving on flooded roads.

528

uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System

Driving

Road Departure Mitigation System

Alerts and helps assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle

crossing over detected lane markings, or approaching the outer edge of the

pavement (into grass or gravel road shoulder) or a detected oncoming vehicle.

The front camera behind the rearview mirror

monitors left and right lane markings in white

or yellow, the outer edge of the pavement

(bordered by grass or gravel road shoulder) or

a detected oncoming vehicle.

If your vehicle approaches any detected lane

markings, the outer edge of the pavement

(bordered by grass or gravel road shoulder) or a

detected oncoming vehicle when the turn signals

have not been engaged, the system activates.

u If the system cannot detect lane markings

(in white or yellow), no assistance will be

provided to avoid approaching oncoming

vehicles. In addition to a visual alert, the

system assists with steering and alerts you

with rapid steering wheel vibrations to

help you remain within the detected lane.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

■

How the System Works

1Road Departure Mitigation System

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, the Road Departure

Mitigation system has limitations.

Overreliance on the Road Departure Mitigation

system may result in a collision. It is always your

responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving

lane.

The Road Departure Mitigation system alerts you

when the system detects that you are approaching

the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel

road shoulder), an oncoming vehicle, or drifting into

another lane without using a turn signal.

The Road Departure Mitigation system may not detect

all lane markings or every instance of lane drift.

The Road Departure Mitigation system may not

detect that you are approaching the outer edge of

the pavement (bordered by grass or gravel road

shoulder) or an oncoming vehicle.

The Road Departure Mitigation system may not be

able to assist you depending on weather, speed or

road conditions.

You can read about handling information for the

camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 585

The Road Departure Mitigation system may not work

properly or may work improperly under the certain

conditions:

2 Road Departure Mitigation system

Conditions and Limitations P. 532

Amber line

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and

9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

Continued

529

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System

Driving

As a visual alert, the Lane departure message appears on the driver information

interface.

The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid

crossing over detected lane markings or approaching the outer edge of the

pavement (into grass or gravel road shoulder) or an oncoming vehicle.

If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system

beeps to alert you.

1Road Departure Mitigation System

There are times when you may not notice the Road

Departure Mitigation system functions due to your

operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions.

You can change the settings for the Road Departure

Mitigation system.

If LKAS is off, the message below may appear if the

system has determined that there is a possibility of

your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings,

the outer edge of the pavement (into a grass or

gravel road shoulder) or oncoming vehicle.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System

530

Driving

The system activates when all of the following conditions are met:

• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).

• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.

• The turn signals are off.

• The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,

braking, or steering.

■

How the System Activates

1How the System Activates

The Road Departure Mitigation system may

automatically shut off and the safety support

indicator (amber) comes and stays on.

2 Indicators P. 100

The Road Departure Mitigation system function can

be impacted when the vehicle is:

• Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of

a lane.

• Driven in a narrow lane.

Continued

531

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System

Driving

You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.

2 Switching the Display P. 125, 154

2 Safety Support P. 137, 166

The Road Departure Mitigation system is in the previously selected on or off setting

each time you turn the power system on.

*1: Models with 9" Color Touchscreen

*2: Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

■

Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off

1Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off

When you have selected Warning only

/Warning

Only

, the system does not operate the steering

wheel.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

The Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®) system, brake

system (Amber), Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with

Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/TPMS

and

safety support indicators may come on in amber

along with a message in the gauge when you set the

power mode to ON after reconnecting the 12-volt

battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your

vehicle checked by a dealer.

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

532

uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System

Driving

The system may not properly detect lane markings (in white or yellow), the outer

edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel road shoulder) or an oncoming vehicle

under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.

■

Environmental conditions

• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.

• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway.

• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).

• Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are

parallel to white (or yellow) lines.

• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel

or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.

• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.

• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,

lane lines, the road surface, or oncoming vehicles may not be illuminated).

• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short, and

lane lines and the road surface are not visible.

• The outer edge of the road is bordered by objects, materials, etc. other than grass

or gravel.

■

Road Departure Mitigation system Conditions and Limitations

533

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System

Continued

Driving

■

Roadway conditions

• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.

• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road

repairs or deteriorated lane markings.

• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or

crosswalk.

• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.

• Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle.

• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.

• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white

(or yellow) lines.

• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.

• Driving on roads with double lane lines.

• Driving on snowy or slippery roads.

• Passing through an exit or an interchange.

• The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road.

• Driving on unpaved or rutted roads.

• White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as

curves, twists, or hills.

534

uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System

Driving

■

Vehicle conditions

• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor

visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.

• The front of the camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow,

accessories, decals, stickers, film, etc.

• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.

• When the driver operates the brake pedal and steering wheel.

• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.

• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, etc.).

• The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.

• Tire chains are installed.

• The suspension has been modified.

• The vehicle is towing a trailer.

■

Examples of limitations on detection due to the condition of oncoming

vehicles

• The oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead of you is sideways.

• The oncoming vehicle jumps out in front of you.

• When the oncoming vehicle blends in with the background, preventing the

system from recognizing it.

• The headlights of an oncoming vehicle are lit on one side or not lit on either side

in a dark place.

• The distance between your vehicle and the oncoming vehicle is too short.

• Part of the oncoming vehicle is not visible due to the vehicle ahead of you.

• There are multiple oncoming lanes or turning lanes.

• The vehicle in the adjacent lane is parked or moving at an extremely slow speed.

535

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System

Driving

■

Examples of other limitations on detection or system operation

• When the oncoming vehicle is specially-shaped.

• When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the oncoming vehicle.

■

With Little Chance of a Collision

The Road Departure Mitigation system may activate in the below conditions.

• When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming

vehicle is right in front of you.

536

uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Driving

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle

detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate

and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the

accelerator.

When ACC with Low Speed Follow slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your

vehicle’s brake lights will illuminate.

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

WARNING

Improper use of ACC with Low Speed

Follow can lead to a crash.

Use ACC with Low Speed Follow only when

driving on expressways or freeways and in

good road and weather conditions.

WARNING

ACC with Low Speed Follow has limited

braking capability and may not stop your

vehicle in time to avoid a collision with a

vehicle that quickly stops in front of you.

Always be prepared to apply the brake

pedal if the conditions require.

When to use

■

Vehicle speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow: A vehicle is detected ahead

within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC with Low Speed Follow

operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h).

No vehicle is detected within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC with

Low Speed Follow operates at the speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or above.

■

Shift position for ACC with Low Speed Follow: In (D.

The radar sensor is behind

the Honda emblem on the

front grille.

A front sensor

camera is

located behind

the rearview

mirror.

Continued

537

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Driving

■

How to activate the system

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Important Reminder

As with any system, there are limits to ACC with Low

Speed Follow. Use the brake pedal whenever

necessary, and always keep a safe interval between

your vehicle and other vehicles.

For directions on the proper handling of the radar

sensor, refer to the following page.

2 Radar Sensor P. 587

You can read about handling information for the

camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 585

WARNING

Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped

while the ACC with Low Speed Follow

system is operating can result in the vehicle

moving without operator control.

A vehicle that moves without operator

control can cause a crash, resulting in

serious injury or death.

Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is

stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.

How to use

■

Press the button on the

steering wheel.

(white) is on in the gauge.

ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to use.

uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

538

Driving

When driving at about 20 mph (30 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the

pedal and press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down when you reach the desired

speed. The moment you release the switch, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with

Low Speed Follow begins.

When you use ACC with Low Speed Follow, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the

Electric Power Steering system) is activated.

By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull,

Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

When driving slower than about 20 mph (30 km/h): If the vehicle is moving

and the brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the switch fixes the set speed to

about 20 mph (30 km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If your vehicle is

stationary, you can set the vehicle speed even with the brake pedal depressed.

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

■

To Set the Vehicle Speed

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

The radar sensor for ACC with Low Speed Follow is

shared with the Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

2 Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

) P. 509

ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly

under certain conditions.

2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions

and Limitations P. 545

When not using ACC with Low Speed Follow: Turn

off adaptive cruise by pressing the button.

Do not use ACC with Low Speed Follow under the

following conditions:

• On roads with frequent lane-change or continuous

stop and go traffic, ACC with Low Speed Follow

cannot keep an appropriate distance between your

vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you.

• On roads with sharp turns.

• On roads with toll collection facilities or other

objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking

areas, or facilities with drive through access.

• On roads with bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.),

ACC with Low Speed Follow may not detect the

distance between your vehicle and the vehicle

ahead of you properly.

• On roads with slippery or icy surfaces. The wheels

may spin out and your vehicle may lose the control

on the condition.

• On roads with steep uphill or steep downhill slopes.

• On roads with undulating slopes.

On when ACC with Low Speed Follow begins

Up or down

(green)

RES/+/SET/− Switch

Continued

539

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Driving

When ACC with Low Speed Follow starts

operating, the vehicle icon, interval bars, and

set speed appear on the gauge.

1To Set the Vehicle Speed

The Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®) system, brake

system (Amber), Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with

Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/TPMS

and

safety support indicators may come on in amber

along with a message in the gauge when you set the

power mode to ON after reconnecting the 12-volt

battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your

vehicle checked by a dealer.

You can switch the displayed set speed

measurements on the driver information interface or

audio/information screen

between mph and km/h.

2 No Content P. 138

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 167

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 167

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Set Vehicle Speed

Set Vehicle Interval

(green)

Models with A-type meter

Set Vehicle Speed

Set Vehicle Interval

(green)

Models with B-type meter

* Not available on all models

uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

540

Driving

■

There is a vehicle ahead

ACC with Low Speed Follow monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with

Low Speed Follow range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with Low Speed

Follow system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the

vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.

2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 550

■

When in Operation

1When in Operation

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if

another vehicle cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds

and a message appears on the driver information

interface.

Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate

interval from the vehicle ahead.

Beep

ACC with Low Speed Follow Range: 394 ft. (120 m)

Continued

541

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Driving

When a vehicle whose speed is slower than

your set speed comes in or cuts in front of you

and is detected by the radar and the camera,

your vehicle starts to slow down.

A vehicle icon appears on

the gauge.

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

Control target vehicle

Outside of control target vehicle

A vehicle icon appears on the

gauge.

Control target vehicle:

White and outlined in green

Outside of control target vehicle:

Gray

1When in Operation

Even if the interval between your vehicle and the

vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC with Low Speed

Follow may start accelerating your vehicle under the

following circumstances:

• The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the

same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.

• A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster

than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval

between the vehicles.

You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in

front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC with

Low Speed Follow detecting range. A vehicle detect

beep on and off can be selected.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Limitations

You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe

interval when using ACC with Low Speed Follow.

Additionally, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not

work properly under certain conditions.

2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions

and Limitations P. 545

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

542

Driving

■

There is no vehicle ahead

Your vehicle maintains the set speed without

having to keep your foot on the brake or

accelerator pedal.

If there previously was a vehicle detected

ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at

the set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow

accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and

then maintains it.

While driving down steep hills, ACC with Low

Speed Follow brakes to inhibit excessive

acceleration for maintaining the set speed.

However, the vehicle speed may become

faster than the set speed.

■

When you depress the accelerator pedal

You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or

visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.

ACC with Low Speed Follow stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the

accelerator pedal, the system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the

following-interval while a vehicle ahead is within the ACC with Low Speed Follow

range.

1When in Operation

• ACC with Low Speed Follow may temporarily

control the interval between your vehicle and the

vehicle in adjacent lane or surroundings of your

vehicle depending on the road conditions (e.g.,

curves) or vehicle conditions (e.g., operating the

steering wheel or the vehicle location in the lane).

• When the vehicle ahead of you moves away, such

as when entering an interchange or rest area, ACC

with Low Speed Follow may continue to maintain

the set following-interval for a short time.

A vehicle icon with line contour

appears on the gauge.

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

543

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Continued

Driving

■

A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and

slows to a stop

Your vehicle also stops automatically. The

Stopped message appears on the gauge.

When the vehicle ahead of you starts again, if

you press the RES/+/SET/– switch up or

down, or depress the accelerator pedal, ACC

with Low Speed Follow will operate again

within the previously set speed.

(green)

Models with A-type meter

(green)

Models with B-type meter

544

uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Driving

If no vehicle is ahead of you before you

resume driving, depress the accelerator pedal

and ACC with Low Speed Follow will operate

again within the prior set speed.

(green)

Models with A-type meter

(green)

Models with B-type meter

Continued

545

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Driving

The system may automatically shut off under certain conditions. Some examples of

these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC

with Low Speed Follow functions.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 585

2 Radar Sensor P. 587

■

Environmental conditions

• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

■

Roadway conditions

• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,

reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).

■

Vehicle conditions

• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.

• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, etc.).

• The camera temperature gets too high.

• The parking brake is applied.

• The front grille is dirty.

• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.

• Tire chains are installed.

• The vehicle is towing a trailer.

■

ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations

1ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations

If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or

removed, or the front grille is strongly impacted, turn

off the system by pressing the button and take

your vehicle to a dealer.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any

unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning

message appears too frequently).

546

uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Driving

■

Detection limitations

• A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.

• The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.

• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.

• You accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high speed.

• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small

vehicle.

• There are animals in front of your vehicle.

• You drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the

sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.

• A vehicle ahead of you stops and the speed difference between your vehicle and

the vehicle ahead of you is significantly large.

• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.

• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.

547

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Continued

Driving

• Driving through a narrow metal bridge.

• The vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.

• The vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.

• Your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.

Sensor detects upper section

of an empty carrier truck.

Panel truck, tanker

truck, etc.

548

uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Driving

• When the minimum ground clearance of a vehicle ahead of you is extremely high.

Continued

549

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Driving

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+/SET/– switch on the steering

wheel.

• Each time you press the RES/+/SET/– switch up or down, the vehicle speed is

increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.

• If you keep the RES/+/SET/– switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed

increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.

■

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower

than your increased set speed, ACC with Low Speed

Follow may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to

maintain the set interval between your vehicle and

the vehicle ahead.

When you depress the accelerator pedal and then

press down and release the RES/+/SET/− switch, the

current speed of the vehicle is set.

To increase speed

To decrease speed

550

uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Driving

Press the Interval button to change the ACC

with Low Speed Follow following-interval.

Each time you press the button, the following-

interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected

ahead of you) setting cycles through furthest,

far, mid, and nearest following-intervals.

Determine the most appropriate following-

interval setting based on your specific driving

conditions. Be sure to adhere to any

following-interval requirements set by local

regulation.

■

To Set or Change Following-interval

Interval Button

551

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Continued

Driving

The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the nearest, mid, far, or

furthest following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.

When your vehicle stops automatically because a vehicle detected ahead of you has

stopped, the interval between the two vehicles will vary based on the ACC with Low

Speed Follow interval setting.

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

Following Interval

When the Set Speed is:

50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)

Nearest

72 feet

22 meters

1 sec

95 feet

29 meters

1 sec

Mid

112 feet

34 meters

1.5 sec

142 feet

43 meters

1.5 sec

Far

154 feet

47 meters

2.1 sec

199 feet

61 meters

2.1 sec

Furthest

208 feet

64 meters

2.9 sec

274 feet

83 meters

2.9 sec

*1 *2

uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

552

Driving

To cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow, do any

of the following:

• Press the CANCEL button.

u The indicator (green) on the gauge

changes to the indicator (white).

• Press the button.

u indicator (green) goes off.

• Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is

moving forward.

u The indicator (green) on the gauge

changes to the indicator (white).

■

To Cancel

1To Cancel

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have

canceled ACC with Low Speed Follow, you can

activate the ACC with Low Speed Follow with the

prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by

pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up even if the

vehicle is stopped.

When you turn the ACC with Low Speed Follow off

by pressing the CANCEL button or depressing the

brake pedal, the prior set speed is displayed on the

gauge in gray.

When pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up, the ACC

with Low Speed Follow is activated with displayed

speed.

If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press

the RES/+/SET/− switch up, but no prior set speed (in

gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your

vehicle's current speed.

CANCEL Button

Button

Continued

553

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Driving

■

Automatic cancellation

The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when

ACC with Low Speed Follow is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may

cause the ACC with Low Speed Follow to automatically cancel:

• Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)

• When the radar sensor behind the Honda emblem on the front grille gets dirty.

• The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.

• An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.

• Driving on a mountainous road for extended periods, or driving off road.

• Abrupt steering wheel movement.

• When the ABS, VSA®, CMBS

, Low Speed Braking Control

, or Post-Collison

Braking System is activated.

• When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.

• When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.

• When you manually apply the parking brake.

• When the detected vehicle within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range is too

close to your vehicle.

• When accelerating rapidly.

• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including

the windshield, gets dirty.

• The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to maintain the set speed (for

example, you are descending a long slope).

• When the system doesn’t detect any driving actions from the driver for a certain

amount of time while the LKAS is also activated.

• When the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

• When passing through an enclosed space, such as tunnel.

• When the parking brake and brake system indicator (amber) comes on.

The ACC with Low Speed Follow automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the

following causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied.

• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary.

• The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes.

• The power system is turned off.

1To Cancel

The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC

with Low Speed Follow has been turned off using the

button. Press the button to activate the

system, then set the desired speed.

(white)

Prior Set Speed (gray)

Models with A-type meter

(white)

Prior Set Speed (gray)

Models with B-type meter

* Not available on all models

uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

554

Driving

Press and hold the interval button for one

second. Cruise mode selected appears on

the driver information interface for two

seconds, and then the mode switches to

Cruise.

The indicator comes on.

• Green: The system is on.

• White: The system is standby.

To switch back to ACC with Low Speed

Follow, press and hold the interval button

again for one second.

■

To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control

1To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control

Always be aware which mode you are in. When you

are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist

you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle

ahead of you.

You cannot switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to

Cruise Control in the following situations:

• When the vehicle speed is set.

• When ACC with Low Speed Follow is not activated.

You can switch the displayed set speed

measurements on the driver information interface or

audio/information screen

between mph and km/h.

2 No Content P. 138

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 167

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 167

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

ACC with

Low Speed

Follow ON

Cruise

Control ON

(white)

Interval

Button

* Not available on all models

555

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Continued

Driving

Take your foot off the pedal and press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down when

you reach the desired speed.

The moment you release the RES/+/SET/− switch, the set speed is fixed, and cruise

control begins. The color of indicator changes from white to green and set speed

appears on the gauge.

When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power

Steering system) is activated.

By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull,

Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

■

When to use

Desired speed in a range above roughly 20 mph (30 km/h).

■

To Set the Vehicle Speed

Set Vehicle Speed

(green)

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

Set Vehicle Speed

(green)

uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

556

Driving

Each time you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down, the vehicle speed is

increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.

If you keep the RES/+/SET/− switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases

or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.

To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:

• Press the CANCEL button.

u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).

• Press the button.

u The indicator (green) goes off.

• Depress the brake pedal.

u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).

■

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

■

To Cancel

1To Cancel

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled

cruise control, you can activate the cruise control with

the prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by

pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up while driving at a

speed of at least 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.

When you turn the cruise control off by pressing the

CANCEL button or depressing the brake pedal, the

prior set speed is displayed on the gauge in gray.

When pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up, the

cruise control is activated with displayed speed.

If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press

the RES/+/SET/− switch up, but no prior set speed (in

gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your

vehicle's current speed.

557

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Driving

1To Cancel

You cannot set or resume in the following situations:

• When vehicle speed is less than 20 mph (30 km/h)

• When cruise control is canceled by pressing the

button.

At vehicle speeds of 17 mph (25 km/h) or less, cruise

control is canceled automatically.

Prior Set Speed (gray)

(white)

Prior Set Speed (gray)

(white)

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

558

uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Driving

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and

provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Important Safety Reminders

The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not an

autonomous driving system and always requires

driver attention and control. The system does not

work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or

fail to steer the vehicle.

The LKAS is convenient when it is used on

expressways or freeways.

Do not place objects on the instrument panel.

Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent

correct detection of the traffic lanes.

The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected

without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect

all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will

vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker

condition.

It is always your responsibility to safely operate the

vehicle and avoid collisions.

The LKAS may not work properly or may work

improperly under the certain conditions:

2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 565

You can read about handling information for the

camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 585

When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and

resumes after the signals are off.

If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts

activate, and torque is applied to the steering.

■

Front Sensor

Camera

Monitors the

lane lines

■

Tactile and visual alerts

Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel

and a warning display alert you that

the vehicle is drifting out of a detected

lane.

■

Steering input assist

The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left

and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets

closer to either of the lane lines.

Continued

559

uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Driving

Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle

nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become

stronger.

■

Lane Keep Support Function

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

When it fails to detect lanes, the system will

temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the

system will recover automatically.

The LKAS may not function as designed while driving

in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with

sharp curves.

560

uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Driving

When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering

wheel vibration as well as a warning display.

■

Lane Departure Warning Function

Warning Area

Continued

561

uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Driving

The system can be used when the following conditions are met.

• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).

• The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and

your vehicle is in the center of the lane.

• You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.

• The turn signals are off.

• The brake pedal is not suddenly depressed.

■

How to activate the system

1. Press the LKAS button.

u LKAS indicator (white) appears on the

gauge.

The system is standby.

u If traffic lane lines are detected, white

lines appear on the gauge.

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

■

When the System can be Used

1When the System can be Used

If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line

due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS

and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Follow the points below to properly activate the

system:

• Always keep the windshield around the camera

clean.

• When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to

apply windshield cleanser to the camera lens.

• Do not touch the camera lens.

• Do not attach a sticker to the area around the

camera.

If LKAS button is pressed when the system can be

used, LKAS is on without standby.

White lines

LKAS indicator

(white)

LKAS Button

White lines

LKAS

indicator

(white)

562

uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Driving

2. Keep your vehicle near the center of the

lane while driving.

u The LKAS indicator changes from white

to green, and white lines change to

green once the system starts operating

after detecting the left and right lane

markings.

LKAS indicator (green)

Green lines

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

LKAS indicator (green)

Green lines

563

uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Continued

Driving

Press the LKAS button.

The LKAS is turned off every time you turn the

power system off, even if you turned it on the

last time you drove the vehicle.

■

To Cancel

LKAS Button

uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

564

Driving

■

The LKAS may be automatically suspended when:

When the LKAS is suspended under the following circumstances, green lines on the

gauge change to white lines or disappear, and the beeper sounds (if activated).

• Your vehicle is driving to the right or the left

of the lane.

• The system fails to detect lane lines.

• The steering wheel is turned quickly.

• You fail to steer the vehicle.

• Driving through a sharp curve.

• Driving at a speed in excess of

approximately 94 mph (150 km/h).

• The ABS or VSA® system engages.

• The brake pedal is suddenly depressed.

Once these conditions no longer exist, the

LKAS automatically resumes.

1The LKAS may be automatically suspended when:

You can change the setting for the LKAS.

LKAS suspended beep on and off can be selected.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

LKAS indicator (white)

White lines

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

LKAS indicator (white)

White lines

* Not available on all models

565

uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Continued

Driving

■

The LKAS may be automatically canceled when:

In the following cases, traffic lane lines may disappear on the gauge, the beeper may

sound, and the LKAS may automatically be canceled:

• The camera temperature gets extremely high.

• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including

the windshield, is dirty.

The system may not detect lane markings (in white or yellow), and LKAS may not

function properly under certain conditions, including the following:

■

Environmental conditions

• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.

• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway.

• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).

• Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are

parallel to white (or yellow) lines.

• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel

or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.

• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,

lane lines or the road surface may not be illuminated).

• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short, and

lane lines and the road surface are not visible.

• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.

■

LKAS Conditions and Limitations

566

uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Driving

■

Roadway conditions

• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.

• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road

repairs or deteriorated lane markings.

• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or

crosswalk.

• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.

• Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle.

• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.

• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks

Very wide or narrow traffic lane

567

uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Continued

Driving

• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white

(or yellow) lines.

• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.

• Driving on roads with double lane lines.

• Driving on snowy or slippery roads.

• The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road.

• There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface.

• White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as

curves, twists, or hills.

• Driving on unpaved or rutted roads.

• Passing through an exit or an interchange.

Lane void of lines at exit or

interchange

568

uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Driving

■

Vehicle conditions

• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor

visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.

• The front of the camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow,

accessories, decals, stickers, film, etc.

• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.

• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.

• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, etc.).

• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.

• The suspension has been modified.

• Tire chains are installed.

• The vehicle is towing a trailer.

569

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist

Continued

Driving

Traffic Jam Assist

The Traffic Jam Assist system uses a camera mounted to the upper portion of the

windshield to detect and monitor left and right white (or yellow) traffic lane lines.

Based on inputs from the camera, the system can apply steering torque to keep your

vehicle in the center of the detected lane.

■

How Traffic Jam Assist works

When you are in heavy traffic and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active, the

Traffic Jam Assist system, upon detecting the traffic lane lines, will apply steering

torque to help keep your vehicle in the center of the lane.

When the driver takes full control of the steering, the steering assist function is

temporarily canceled.

The torque applied to the steering may not be noticeable when the driver has full

control of the steering, or when the surface of the road is rough or uneven.

1Traffic Jam Assist

Important Safety Reminders

Traffic Jam Assist is for your convenience only. It is

not an autonomous driving system and always

requires driver attention and control. The system

does not work if you take your hands off the steering

wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.

Traffic Jam Assist is convenient when it is used on

expressways or freeways.

You can read about handling information for the

camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 585

The Traffic Jam Assist only alerts you when lane drift

is detected without a turn signal in use. The Traffic

Jam Assist may not detect all lane markings or lane

departures; accuracy will vary based on weather,

speed, and lane marker condition.

It is always your responsibility to safely operate the

vehicle and avoid collisions.

Traffic Jam Assist may not work properly under

certain conditions:

2 Traffic Jam Assist: Conditions and

Limitations P. 574

Front Sensor Camera

When you use the turn signal to indicate a lane change, Traffic Jam Assist is

temporarily deactivated. It is reactivated once the vehicle is traveling in the

center of the lane and the system has detected the traffic lane lines.

Detects left and right white

(or yellow) traffic lane lines

570

uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist

Driving

When the vehicle enters the warning area, the Traffic Jam Assist alerts you with an

audible alert as well as a warning display.

■

Lane Departure Warning Function

Warning Area

Continued

571

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist

Driving

Traffic Jam Assist is activated when all of the following conditions exist:

• LKAS is activated.

• The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and

your vehicle is in the center of the lane.

• The vehicle is traveling between about 0 and 45 mph (0 and 72 km/h).

• You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.

• The driver is gripping the steering wheel.

• The shift position is in

(D or .

Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in any of the following situations:

• You are traveling on a road with sharp curves.

u The system may not allow your vehicle to respond in a manner best suited for

the road conditions.

• You are entering a toll booth, interchange, service area, or parking area.

• You are driving in adverse weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

• The surface of the road is slippery; for example, it is icy or covered with snow.

u The tires may slip, causing you to lose control of the vehicle.

■

Traffic Jam Assist Activation

1Traffic Jam Assist Activation

Refer to the following page for proper handling of

the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS):

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 558

Refer to the following page for steering buttons and

displays:

2 Operation Switches for the Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow/Lane Keeping Assist System

(LKAS)/Traffic Jam Assist P. 507

2 Gauge Content P. 508

uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist

572

Driving

Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane

while driving.

u The LKAS indicator changes from white

to green, and white lines change to

green once the system starts operating

after detecting the left and right lane

markings.

■

How Traffic Jam Assist Works

1How Traffic Jam Assist Works

If your vehicle veers too far to the right or the left of

the white (or yellow) traffic lane lines while Traffic

Jam Assist is active, deactivate Traffic Jam Assist and

have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

In some cases the system cannot properly detect the

traffic lane lines and, as a result, will not provide

steering assistance.

2 Traffic Jam Assist: Conditions and

Limitations P. 574

If the driver takes their hands off the steering wheel

or does not adequately maintain control of steering,

the warning below will appear.

If the driver does not grip the steering wheel after the

warning above has repeatedly appeared, a warning

buzzer will sound and Traffic Jam Assist will be

canceled.

Green lines

LKAS indicator (green)

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

LKAS indicator (green)

Green lines

Continued

573

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist

Driving

Press the LKAS button to cancel Traffic Jam Assist.

■

Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically suspended when:

• The system fails to detect lane lines.

• The steering wheel is turned sharply.

• You fail to steer the vehicle.

• You are driving through a sharp curve.

• The brake pedal is suddenly depressed.

Once these conditions no longer exist, Traffic Jam Assist automatically resumes.

■

Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically canceled when:

• The temperature of the camera is too high.

• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including

the windshield, is dirty.

Upon cancellation, the lane lines will disappear from the screen and the beeper may

sound.

*1: Models with 9“ Color Touchscreen

*2: Models with 9“ Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

■

Canceling Traffic Jam Assist

1Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically suspended when:

You can change the setting for the Traffic Jam Assist

suspended beep on and off when you select the

Lane keeping assist suspend beep

/Lane

Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

on the driver

information interface

or audio/information screen

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

574

uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist

Driving

The system may not detect lane markings (in white or yellow), and Traffic Jam Assist

may not function properly under certain conditions, including the following:

■

Environmental conditions

• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.

• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway.

• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).

• Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are

parallel to white (or yellow) lines.

• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel

or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.

• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,

lane lines or the road surface may not be illuminated).

• When the lane lines or road surface are not visible, such as when the distance to

the vehicle in front of you is extremely short or when at an intersection.

• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.

■

Traffic Jam Assist: Conditions and Limitations

575

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist

Continued

Driving

■

Roadway conditions

• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.

• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road

repairs or deteriorated lane markings.

• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or

crosswalk.

• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.

• Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle.

• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.

• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks

Very wide or narrow traffic lane

576

uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist

Driving

• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white

(or yellow) lines.

• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.

• Driving on roads with double lane lines.

• Driving on snowy or slippery roads.

• The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road.

• There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface.

• White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as

curves, twists, or hills.

• Driving on unpaved or rutted roads.

• Passing through an exit or an interchange.

Lane void of lines at exit or

interchange

577

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist

Driving

■

Vehicle conditions

• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor

visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.

• The front of the camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow,

accessories, decals, stickers, film, etc.

• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.

• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.

• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, etc.).

• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.

• The suspension has been modified.

• Tire chains are installed.

• The vehicle is towing a trailer.

578

uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Sign Recognition System

Driving

Traffic Sign Recognition System

Reminds you of road sign information, such as the current speed limit your vehicle

has just passed, showing it on the gauge.

When the camera located behind the rearview mirror detects traffic signs while the

vehicle is being driven, the system displays recognized signs in your vehicle for a

programmed time and distance. If a speed limit sign is detected and the vehicle

exceeds the speed limit by a programmed threshold, the speed limit sign icon will

blink.

If the system does not detect any traffic signs while you are driving, the sign icon will

not be displayed.

The sign icon also may switch to another one, or disappear when:

• The end of speed limit or other designated limit is detected.

• You make a turn with a turn signal at an intersection.

■

How the System Works

1Traffic Sign Recognition System

Not all signs may be displayed, but any signs posted

on roadsides should not be ignored. The system does

not work on the designated traffic signs of all the

countries you travel, nor in all situations.

Do not rely too much on the system. Always drive at

speeds appropriate for the road conditions.

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the

windshield that could obstruct the camera’s field of

vision and cause the system to operate abnormally.

Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield

within the camera’s field of vision can cause the

system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we

recommend that you replace the windshield with a

genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even

minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or

installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may

also cause the system to operate abnormally. After

replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the

camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary

for the system to operate properly.

You can read about handling information for the

camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 585

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

Speed Limit Sign

Continued

579

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System

Driving

1Traffic Sign Recognition System

You can turn the traffic sign recognition system on

and off.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior

temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing system

to shut off, find a shady area or face the front of the

vehicle away from the sun when parking. If you use a

reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the

camera housing.

Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.

The default speed limit warning threshold is the

maximum speed of the traffic sign detected.

You can adjust the threshold for speed limit warning.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Sign Recognition System

580

Driving

1Traffic Sign Recognition System

The system’s ability to accurately notify the driver of

the speed limit is dependent on certain conditions

such as the units displayed on the traffic sign as well

as the speed and direction of travel of the vehicle. In

some cases, the system may display false warnings or

other inaccurate information.

2 Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions

and Limitations P. 581

The unit for speed limits (mph or km/h) varies from

country to country. Just after entering a country

whose unit differs to the one of the country from

which you came, the Traffic Sign Recognition System

may not work correctly.

2 No Content P. 138

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 167

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 167

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

Continued

581

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System

Driving

The Traffic Sign Recognition system may incorrectly recognize, be slow to identify,

or fail to recognize the traffic sign in the following cases.

■

Environmental conditions

• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).

• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.

• Driving at night, in dark areas such as long tunnels.

• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel

or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.

• Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.

■

Roadway conditions

• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

■

Vehicle conditions

• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor

visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.

• The front of the camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow,

accessories, decals, stickers, film, etc.

• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.

• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, etc.).

• The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.

• The suspension has been modified.

• Tire chains are installed.

• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.

• The vehicle is towing a trailer.

■

Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations

1Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations

When the traffic sign recognition system

malfunctions, appears on the gauge. If this

message does not disappear, have your vehicle

checked by a dealer.

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

582

uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Sign Recognition System

Driving

■

The position or the condition of the traffic sign

• The sign is in a place that makes it hard to find.

• The sign is located far away from your vehicle.

• The sign is located where it is hard for headlight beams to reach.

• The sign is on a corner or bend in the road.

• The sign is faded or bent.

• The sign is rotated or damaged.

• The sign is covered with mud, snow, or frost.

• Part of the sign is hidden by the trees, or is in the shadow of a vehicle or other

object.

• Light (such as a streetlight) is reflected on the surface of the sign, or it is hidden

in shadow.

• The sign is too bright or too dark (electric signs).

• Small signs (auxiliary signs, etc.).

■

Other conditions

• When you are driving at a high speed.

583

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System

Continued

Driving

The traffic sign recognition system may not operate correctly, such as displaying

signs that do not adhere to the actual regulations for the roadway or do not exist at

all in the following cases.

u A speed limit sign may display at a higher or lower speed than the actual speed

limit.

• There is a supplementary sign with further information such as weather, time,

vehicle type, school zone, etc.

• Figures on the sign are hard to read (electric signs, numbers on the sign are

blurred, etc.).

• The sign is in the vicinity of the lane you are driving in, even though it is not for

the lane, such as a speed limit sign situated at an exit or an intersection between

the side road and the main road.

• There are things that look similar in color or shape to recognized objects (similar

sign, electric sign, signboard, structure, etc.).

584

uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Sign Recognition System

Driving

The speed limit sign icon is displayed on the screen.

■

Signs Displayed on the Gauge

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

Speed Limit Sign

585

uuHonda Sensing®uFront Sensor Camera

Continued

Driving

Front Sensor Camera

The camera, used in systems such as Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

), Road Departure Mitigation system, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with

Low Speed Follow, Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS), Traffic Jam Assist, Traffic

Sign Recognition system, and Auto High-Beam, is designed to detect an object that

triggers any of the systems to operate its functions.

This camera is located behind the rearview

mirror.

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior

temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing

system to shut off, find a shady area or face

the front of the vehicle away from the sun

when parking. If you use a reflective sun

shade, do not allow it to cover the camera

housing. Covering the camera can

concentrate heat on it.

■

Camera Location and Handling Tips

1Front Sensor Camera

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the

windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could

obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the

system to operate abnormally.

Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield

within the camera’s field of vision can cause the

system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we

recommend that you replace the windshield with a

genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making

even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision

or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield

may also cause the system to operate abnormally.

After replacing the windshield, have a dealer

recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the

camera is necessary for the system to operate

properly.

Do not place an object on the top of the instrument

panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent

the system from detecting lane lines properly.

Front Sensor

Camera

uuHonda Sensing® uFront Sensor Camera

586

Driving

1Front Sensor Camera

If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate:

Camera temperature too high message appears:

• Use the climate control system to cool down the

interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode

with the airflow directed towards the camera.

• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield

temperature, which cools down the area around

the camera.

If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate:

Clean front windshield or poor viewing

condition. message appears:

• Park your vehicle in a safe place, and make sure the

windshield is clean.

Clean the windshield if it is dirty. If the message

does not disappear after driven for a while, have

your vehicle checked by a dealer.

587

uuHonda Sensing®uRadar Sensor

Driving

Radar Sensor

The radar sensor is behind the Honda emblem

on the front grille.

1Radar Sensor

For the system to work properly, observe the

following precautions.

• Always keep the emblem and front grille clean.

• Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder

for cleaning the emblem and front grille. Clean it

with water or a mild detergent.

• Do not put any stickers or paint on the emblem or

front grille.

• Do not scratch or damage the emblem or front

grille.

• Do not replace the emblem, front grille, or bumper.

• Do not remove or disassemble the radar sensor.

Consult a dealer if:

• The radar sensor cover is strongly impacted.

• The front grille or bumper needs to be repaired.

If the vehicle is involved in any of the following

situations, the radar sensor may not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:

• Your vehicle is involved in a frontal collision.

• Your vehicle drives through deep water or is

submerged in deep water.

• Your vehicle strongly strikes a bump, curb, chock,

slope, or embankment that could jar the radar

sensor.

Radar Sensor

588

uuHonda Sensing® uSonar Sensors

Driving

Sonar Sensors

■

Location and range of sensors

The sonar sensors are situated in the front and rear bumpers.

1Sonar Sensors

For the sonar sensors to work properly, do not:

• Place stickers or other objects on or around the

sensors.

• Hit the area around the sensors.

• Attempt to take apart any sensor.

• Put any accessories on or around the sensors.

Consult with a dealer if:

• A sensor has been subjected to shock.

• Work needs to be done to the area around a

sensor.

In the following cases, the sonar sensors may not

work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

• The front or rear bumper has made contact with a

hill, parking block, curb, embankment, etc.

• The vehicle has been involved in a frontal or rear

collision.

• The vehicle has been driven through a deep

puddle.

Sonar Sensors Sonar Sensors

Sensor Range

* Not available on all models

589

Continued

Driving

Braking

Brake System

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the

parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.

■

To apply

The electric parking brake can be applied any

time the vehicle has 12-volt battery, no matter

which position the power mode is in.

Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently

and securely.

u The indicator in the switch comes on.

u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) comes on.

■

To release

The power mode must be in ON in order to

release the electric parking brake.

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press the electric parking brake switch.

u The indicator in the switch goes off.

u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) goes off.

Manually releasing the parking brake using

the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and

smoothly when facing downhill on steep hills.

■

Parking Brake

1Brake System

When you depress the brake pedal, you may hear a

whirring sound from the engine compartment. This is

because the brake system is in operation, and it is

normal.

1Parking Brake

You may hear the electric parking brake system

motor operating from the rear wheel area when you

apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.

The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric

parking brake system operation when you apply or

release the parking brake. This is normal.

You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the

12-volt battery goes dead.

2 If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead P. 693

If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake

switch while driving, the brakes on all four wheels

are applied by the electric servo brake system until

the vehicle comes to a stop. The electric parking

brake then applies, and the switch should be

released.

Electric Parking Brake Switch

uuBrakinguBrake System

590

Driving

■

Automatic parking brake feature operation

If the automatic parking brake feature has been activated:

• The parking brake is applied automatically when you set the power mode to

VEHICLE OFF.

• To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake

system indicator (red) is on.

2 Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature P. 592

■

To release automatically

Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake.

Use the accelerator pedal to release the parking brake when you are starting the

vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

When on a hill, it may require more

accelerator input to release.

u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) goes off.

You can release the parking brake automatically when:

• You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.

• The power system is on.

• The transmission is not in

(P or (N.

1Parking Brake

In the following situations, the parking brake

automatically operates.

• When the vehicle stops more than 10 minutes

while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated.

• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while

your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with

Low Speed Follow.

• When the power system is turned off, while ACC

with Low Speed Follow is activated.

• When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake

hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.

• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while

your vehicle is stopped and brake hold is applied.

• When the power system is turned off, while brake

hold is applied.

• When there is a problem with the brake hold

system while brake hold is applied.

Accelerator Pedal

Continued

591

uuBrakinguBrake System

Driving

1Parking Brake

If the parking brake cannot be released

automatically, release it manually.

When the vehicle is traveling uphill, the accelerator

pedal may need to be pressed farther to

automatically release the electric parking brake.

The parking brake cannot be released automatically

while the following indicators are on:

• Malfunction indicator lamp

• Transmission system indicator

The parking brake may not be released automatically

while the following indicators are on:

• Parking brake and brake system indicator (amber)

• VSA® system indicator

• ABS indicator

• Supplemental restraint system indicator

uuBrakinguBrake System

592

Driving

■

Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature

With the power mode is in ON, carry out the following steps to either activate or

deactivate the automatic parking brake feature.

1. Put the transmission into

(P.

2. Without depressing the brake pedal, pull up and release the electric parking brake

switch.

u Check that the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) has come on.

3. Pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch. When you hear a beeping

sound, release the switch and within three seconds pull up and hold the switch

again.

4. When you hear a sound indicating that the procedure is completed, release the

switch.

u Two beeps indicate that the feature has been activated.

u One beep indicates that the feature has been deactivated.

u When you have completed activating the feature, the parking brake will

remain applied after you turn the power system off.

u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and

brake system indicator (red) is on.

If you need to temporarily deactivate the feature while putting your vehicle through

a conveyor type car wash or when having your vehicle towed, follow the procedure

explained below.

1. Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.

2. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and then within two seconds push down the

electric parking brake switch.

u Activation and deactivation settings for the feature will not be affected.

u Before temporarily deactivating the feature, make sure to first turn off both

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow and the automatic

brake hold system.

u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and

brake system indicator (red) is on.

1Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature

In cold climates, the parking brake may freeze in

place if applied.

When parking the vehicle, chock the wheels and

make sure the automatic parking brake feature is

deactivated.

Also, when putting your vehicle through a conveyor-

type car wash or when having your vehicle towed,

deactivate the automatic parking brake feature and

leave the parking brake released.

Continued

593

uuBrakinguBrake System

Driving

Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. The brake assist system

increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an

emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering

control when braking very hard.

2 Brake Assist System P. 598

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 597

■

Foot Brake

1Foot Brake

Check the brakes after driving through deep water,

or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If

necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the

pedal several times.

If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when

applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear

indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates

that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have your

vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an

occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply

the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by

high frequency vibration of the brake pads against

the rotating brake disc.

Applying constant pressure to the brakes while going

down a long hill can cause the brakes to heat up,

resulting in a loss of stopping power.

Therefore, when descending a long hill, release the

accelerator pedal and allow regenerative braking to

slow the vehicle down.

To adjust the rate of deceleration, use the

deceleration paddle selector.

When the high voltage battery has fully recharged,

regenerative braking may not be possible.

2 POWER Gauge P. 122

2 CHARGE/DECEL Gauge P. 122

2 Deceleration Paddle Selector P. 472

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while

driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause

them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad

life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

uuBrakinguBrake System

594

Driving

Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is

pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at

traffic lights and in heavy traffic.

■

Turning on the system

Fasten your seat belt properly, then turn the

power system on. Press the automatic brake

hold button.

u The automatic brake hold system

indicator comes on. The system is turned

on.

The system is in the previously selected on or

off setting each time you fasten the driver’s

seat belt and turn the power system on.

■

Activating the system

Depress the brake pedal to come to a

complete stop. The transmission must not be

(P or (R.

u The automatic brake hold indicator

comes on. Braking is kept for up to 10

minutes.

u Release the brake pedal after the

automatic brake hold indicator comes

on.

■

Automatic Brake Hold

1Automatic Brake Hold

WARNING

Activating the automatic brake hold system

on steep hills or slippery roads may still

allow the vehicle to move if you remove

your foot from the brake pedal.

If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may

cause a crash resulting in serious injury or

death.

Never activate the automatic brake hold

system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from

moving when stopped on a steep hill or

slippery roads.

WARNING

Using the automatic brake hold system to

park the vehicle may result in the vehicle

unexpectedly moving.

If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may

cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or

death.

Never leave the vehicle when braking is

temporarily kept by automatic brake hold

and always park the vehicle by putting the

transmission in

(P and applying the parking

brake.

Comes

Automatic Brake Hold Button

Brake Pedal

Comes

U.S.

Canada

Continued

595

uuBrakinguBrake System

Driving

■

Canceling the system

Depress the accelerator pedal while the

transmission is in a position other than

(P or

(N. The system is canceled and the vehicle

starts to move.

u The automatic brake hold indicator goes

off. The system continues to be on.

■

The system automatically cancels when:

• You engage the parking brake.

• You depress the brake pedal and put the transmission into

(P or (R.

■

The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when:

• Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.

• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

• The power system is turned off.

• There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.

1Automatic Brake Hold

While the system is activated, you can turn the power

system off or park the vehicle through the same

procedure as you normally do.

2 When Stopped P. 599

You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves

while the automatic brake hold system is in

operation.

WARNING

When using the automatic brake hold,

keep your foot on the brake pedal until the

automatic brake hold indicator comes on.

If the vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may

cause a crash resulting in serious injury or

death.

Release your foot from the brake pedal

after the automatic brake hold indicator

comes on.

Accelerator Pedal

Goes

Off

uuBrakinguBrake System

596

Driving

■

Turning off the automatic brake hold system

Only the automatic brake hold system

indicator comes on:

• Press the automatic brake hold button.

u The automatic brake hold system

indicator goes off.

When the automatic brake hold indicator

comes on at the same time:

• Press the automatic brake hold button with

the brake pedal depressed.

u The automatic brake hold system

indicator and the automatic brake hold

indicator go off.

1Turning off the automatic brake hold system

Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold

system before using an automated car wash.

If you turn the power system off or unfasten the

driver’s seat belt while the automatic brake hold

system is on, the automatic brake hold system will

automatically turn off. In this case, when the driver’s

seat belt is fastened and the power system is turned

back on, the automatic brake hold system will turn

on without needing to press the automatic brake

hold button.

Automatic Brake Hold Button

Goes

Off

Goes

Off

597

uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Driving

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by

pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you can.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also

balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always

keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as

“stomp and steer.”

■

ABS operation

The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake

pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to

press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel

the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on:

• Wet or snow covered roads.

• Roads paved with stone.

• Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.

When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

■

ABS

1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

NOTICE

The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of

the incorrect size or type.

If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there

may be a problem with the system.

While normal braking will not be affected, there is a

possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have

your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing

the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is

designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to

skidding and loss of steering control.

In the following cases, your vehicle may need more

distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS:

• You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces,

such as gravel or snow.

• The tires are equipped with tire chains.

The following may be observed with the ABS system:

• Motor sounds coming from the engine

compartment when the brakes are applied, or

when system checks are being performed after the

power system has been turned on and while the

vehicle accelerates.

• Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when

ABS activates.

These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS

systems and are no cause for concern.

598

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Driving

Brake Assist System

Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress

the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

■

Brake assist system operation

Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.

When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise

may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

599

Continued

Driving

Parking Your Vehicle

When Stopped

1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.

2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,

but fully.

3. Put the transmission into

(P.

4. Turn the power system off.

u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off in about 30

seconds.

Always set the parking brake, especially if you are parked on an incline.

1Parking Your Vehicle

WARNING

The vehicle can roll away if left unattended

without confirming that Park is engaged.

A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash

resulting in serious injury or death.

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal

until you have confirmed that (P is shown

on the shift position indicator.

1When Stopped

NOTICE

The following can damage the driveline:

• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals

simultaneously.

• Changing to (P before the vehicle stops

completely.

When facing uphill, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal.

Doing so may cause the power system to overheat

and fail.

Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,

such as dry grass, oil, or timber.

Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

uuParking Your VehicleuWhen Stopped

600

Driving

1When Stopped

In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake

may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are

expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if

parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so

they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the

slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from

moving. If you do not take either precaution, the

vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.

601

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System

Continued

Driving

Parking Sensor System

The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the

beeper, driver information interface and audio/information screen let you know the

approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle.

■

The Sensor Location and Range

1Parking Sensor System

Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is

no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.

The system may not work properly when:

• The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud, or dirt.

• The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather.

• There is something nearby that emits ultrasonic

waves or high frequency sounds.

• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

The system may not detect these obstacles:

• Thin or low objects.

• Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,

or sponge.

• Objects directly under the bumper.

The system may falsely detect obstacles in the

following situations:

• The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,

bumps, or a hill.

• When close to other vehicles with sonar sensors or

other objects that emit ultrasonic waves.

• There is splashing water near the sensors due to

heavy rains, etc.

Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.

• If you put any accessories (such as a towing hitch or

bicycle rack) on or around the rear sensors, the

system may activate if it detects these accessories

as an obstacle. In this case, turn off the rear sensor.

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Front Corner Sensors

Rear Corner Sensors

Rear Center Sensors

Front Center Sensors

Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less Front: Within about 28 in (70 cm) or less

Rear: Within about 43 in (110 cm) or less

* Not available on all models

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System

602

Driving

You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.

2 Switching the Display P. 154

2 Safety Support P. 166

The front corner, rear corner and rear center sensors start to detect an obstacle

when the transmission is in

(R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

The front corner and front center sensors start to detect an obstacle when the

transmission is in any position other than

(P or (R, and the vehicle speed is less

than 5 mph (8 km/h).

■

Parking Sensor System On and Off

1Parking Sensor System

When you set the power mode to ON, the system will

be in the previously selected condition.

You can turn the rear parking sensor system on and

off using the driver information interface

or audio/

information screen

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

* Not available on all models

603

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System

Continued

Driving

You can switch between split view off and

split view on by touching the split screen tab.

■

Screen Operation

Split Screen

Tab

Split View Off

Split View On

604

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System

Driving

*1:On the driver information interface

*2:On the audio/information screen

*3:At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.

■

When the Distance between Your Vehicle and Detected

Obstacles Becomes Shorter

Interval

between

beeps

Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle

Indicator

Driver information

interface

Audio/Information Screen

Corner Sensors Center Sensors

Moderate

—

Front: About 28-24 in

(70-60 cm)

Rear: About 43-30 in

(110-75 cm)

Comes on

/Blinks

in Yellow

Short

About 24-18 in

(60-45 cm)

Front: About 24-20 in

(60-50 cm)

Rear: About 30-24 in

(75-60 cm)

Comes on

Blinks

in Amber

Very short

About 18-14 in

(45-35 cm)

Front: About 20-16 in

(50-40 cm)

Rear: About 24-20 in

(60-50 cm)

Continuous

About 14 in

(35 cm) or less

Front: About 16 in

(40 cm) or less

Rear: About 20 in

(50 cm) or less

Comes on

Blinks

in Red

Indicators light up

where the sensor

detects an obstacle.

Indicators light up where the

sensor detects an obstacle.

Indicators light up where the

sensor detects an obstacle.

Indicators light up where the

sensor detects an obstacle.

605

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System

Driving

To temporarily turn off the beeper, press the right selector wheel while it is

sounding. Temporary OFF will be canceled when the shift position is switched or the

vehicle speed reaches 9 mph (14 km/h) or higher.

606

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor

Driving

Cross Traffic Monitor

Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts

you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.

The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.

1Cross Traffic Monitor

The parking sensor system’s alerting buzzer overrides

the Cross Traffic Monitor buzzer when the sensors

are detecting obstacles at the closest range.

CAUTION

Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all

approaching vehicles and may not detect

an approaching vehicle at all.

Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to

back up the vehicle before doing so may

result in a collision.

Do not solely rely on the system when

reversing; always also use your mirrors, and

look behind and to the sides of your vehicle

before reversing.

Models with parking sensor system

Continued

607

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor

Driving

The system activates when:

• The power mode is in ON.

• The Cross Traffic Monitor is turned on.

2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 609

• The transmission is in (R.

• Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or

lower.

When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor

alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.

The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your

vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly

behind your vehicle.

The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your

vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.

■

How the System Works

1Cross Traffic Monitor

Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay

alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without

an approaching vehicle under the following

conditions:

• An obstacle, such as another vehicle or a wall, near

your vehicle’s rear bumper, is blocking the radar

sensor’s scope.

• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of about 3 mph

(5 km/h) or higher.

• A vehicle is approaching at a speed other than

between about 6 mph (10 km/h) and 16 mph (25

km/h).

• The system picks up external interference such as

other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong

radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.

• Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with

snow, ice, mud or dirt.

• When there is bad weather.

• Your vehicle is on an incline.

• Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.

• Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a

vehicle, and so on.

If the rear bumper or the sensors have been

improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been

deformed. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper

corner area clean.

Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels

or stickers of any kind.

Radar sensors:

Underneath the rear bumper

corners

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor

608

Driving

An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information

screen.

■

When the System Detects a Vehicle

1When the System Detects a Vehicle

If the on the lower right changes to in amber

when the transmission is in

(R, mud, snow or ice,

etc. may have accumulated in the vicinity of the

sensor. The system is temporarily canceled. Check the

bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly

clean the area if necessary.

If the comes on when the transmission is in

(R,

there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic

Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your

vehicle checked by a dealer.

If the display remains the same with the transmission

(R, there may be a problem with the rear camera

system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system.

Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

Wide ViewNormal View

Arrow Icon

Top Down View

609

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor

Driving

The system can be turned on and off on the

audio/information screen by pressing the

Cross Traffic Monitor icon.

You can also switch the system on and off

from the customized feature on the audio/

information screen.

2 Customized Features P. 389, 396

■

Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off

Cross Traffic Monitor

icon

610

Driving

Multi-View Rear Camera

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.

The display automatically changes to the rear view when the transmission is put into

(R.

■

Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see

the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath

the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects

appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing

up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and

high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do

not rely on the rearview display which does not give

you all information about conditions at the back of

your vehicle.

The rear camera view is displayed prior to the audio/

information screen.

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,

use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free

of debris.

If the rear camera lens is covered with dirt or

moisture, activate the rearview camera washer or use

a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of

debris.

2 Rear Wiper/Washer P. 232

Models without rearview camera washer

Models with rearview camera washer

Camera

Approx. 39 inches (1 m)Ta

ilgate open range

611

uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera

Driving

You can view three different camera modes on the audio/information screen.

Touch the appropriate icon to switch the mode.

• If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view

mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R.

• If you were using Top down view mode before you turned the power system off,

Wide view mode will be activated the next time you set the power mode to ON

and put the transmission into

(R.

• If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took

the transmission out of

(R, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you

put the transmission into (R.

• If you were using Top down view mode and put the transmission back into (R

within 10 seconds after you took it out of

(R, Top down view mode will be

activated.

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic

Guideline settings.

2 Customized Features P. 389, 396

Fixed Guideline

On: Guidelines appear when you put the

transmission into

(R.

Off: Guidelines do not appear.

Dynamic Guideline

On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel

direction.

Off: Guidelines do not move.

If the vehicle’s rear view is not displayed on the audio/

information screen while the shift position is in

(R,

there may be a problem with the system. Have your

vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Bumper

Wide view mode

Normal view mode Top down view mode

Bumper Bumper

612

Driving

Refueling

Fuel Information

■

Fuel recommendation

Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise

that can lead to engine damage.

■

Top tier detergent gasoline

Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda

endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help

maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent

Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive

manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met

“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is

guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic

additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic

additives in gasoline, help avoid buildup of deposits in your engine and emission

control system.

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on

gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit

www.honda.ca (English), www.honda.ca/fr (French) for additional information on

gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

■

Fuel tank capacity: 14 US gal (53 L)

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

1Fuel Information

NOTICE

We recommend quality gasoline containing

detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and

engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain

good performance, fuel economy, and emissions

control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline

that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based

fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is

available.

Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely

affect performance, and cause the malfunction

indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.

If this happens, contact a dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such

as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on

oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol

by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.

If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try

another service station or switch to another brand of

gasoline.

613

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

Continued

Driving

How to Refuel

Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle

directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler

nozzle.

1. Stop your vehicle with the service station

pump on the left side of the vehicle in the

rear.

2. Turn the power system off.

3. Unlock the driver’s door.

u The fuel fill door on the outer side of the

vehicle will unlock.

4. Press and release the area indicated by the

arrow to release the fuel fill door. You will

hear a click and the lid will open slightly.

5. Manually pull the fuel fill door to a fully

open position.

1How to Refuel

The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only

service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of

smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon

fuel for other uses) or other non-service station

devices can damage the area in and around the filler

opening.

Use the lock tab or the master door lock switch to

unlock the fuel fill door.

The vehicle doors and fuel fill door automatically

relock if the remote unlock function is used. This can

be deactivated by briefly opening then closing the

driver’s door.

WARNING

Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.

You can be burned or seriously injured

when handling fuel.

• Turn the power system off, and keep

heat, sparks, and flames away.

• Handle fuel only outdoors.

• Wipe up spills immediately.

Press

Fuel Fill Door

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

614

Driving

6. Place the end of the filler nozzle on the

lower part of filler opening, then insert it

slowly and fully.

u Make sure that the end of the filler

nozzle goes down along with the filler

pipe.

u Keep the filler nozzle level.

u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will

click off automatically.

u If you do not fill up the tank to full,

always add a minimum of 1.3 US gal (5 L)

of fuel.

u After filling, wait about five seconds

before removing the filler nozzle.

7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1How to Refuel

Using the Walk away auto lock® feature will also lock

the fuel fill door. Always make sure both the driver’s

door and fuel fill door are unlocked before

attempting to open the fuel fill door.

2 Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away

auto lock®) P. 190

If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is

not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel

vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If

this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in

the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result

of changes in air temperature.

Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has

automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed

the full tank capacity and cause fuel to spill.

If you repeatedly fill the tank with less than the

specified minimum amount of fuel, the malfunction

indicator lamp may come on. If this happens, have

your vehicle checked by a dealer.

If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable

container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

2 Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

P. 714

615

Driving

Fuel Economy and CO

Emissions

Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO

Emissions

Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO

emissions is dependent on several

factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and

vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the

rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.

Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the

driver information interface.

• Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended.

2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 633

• Maintain the specified tire pressure.

• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.

• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside

adds weight and increases wind resistance.

■

Maintenance and Fuel Economy

1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO

Emissions

Direct calculation is the recommended method to

determine actual fuel consumed while driving.

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are

established following a simulated test. For more

information on how this test is performed, please visit

https://www.nrcan.gc.ca and search for “fuel

consumption testing” in the search field at the top of

the page.

Miles driven

Gallons of

fuel

Miles per

Gallon

100

Liters of

fuel

Kilometers

driven

L per 100 km

616

This page intentionally left blank.

617

Maintenance

This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance

Inspection and Maintenance ............ 618

Safety When Performing Maintenance ....619

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance

Service ........................................... 620

Maintenance Minder

..................... 621

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood....631

Opening the Hood ........................... 632

Recommended Engine Oil ................ 633

Oil Check......................................... 634

Adding Engine Oil............................ 635

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ...636

Engine Coolant................................ 638

High Voltage System Coolant........... 640

Transmission Fluid............................ 641

Brake Fluid....................................... 642

Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 643

Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 644

Checking and Maintaining Wiper

Blades .......................................... 648

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Checking Tires ................................. 652

Tire and Loading Information Label ... 653

Tire Labeling .................................... 653

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) ....655

Wear Indicators ............................... 657

Tire Service Life................................ 657

Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 658

Tire Rotation.................................... 659

Winter Tires ..................................... 660

12-Volt Battery ................................. 661

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Remote Battery .......... 663

Climate Control System Maintenance ....664

Cleaning

Interior Care .................................... 665

Exterior Care.................................... 667

Accessories and Modifications.......... 670

618

Maintenance

Before Performing Maintenance

Inspection and Maintenance

For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle

in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient

brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in

effect.)

■

Routine inspections

Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when

refueling.

2 Maintenance P. 39

■

Periodic inspections

• Check the brake fluid level monthly.

2 Checking the Brake Fluid P. 642

• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 652

• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 644

• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.

2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 648

■

Types of Inspection and Maintenance

1Inspection and Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of

emissions control devices and systems may be

done by any automotive repair establishment or

individuals using parts that are “certified” to

EPA standards.

According to state and federal regulations, failure to

perform maintenance on the maintenance main

items marked with # will not void your emissions

warranties. However, all maintenance services should

be performed in accordance with the intervals

indicated by the driver information interface.

2 Maintenance Service Items P. 626

If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks

that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a

subscription to the Service Express website at

https://techinfo.honda.com.

2 Authorized Manuals P. 732

If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make

sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.

After performing maintenance, update the records in

the separate maintenance booklet.

U.S. models

619

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance

Continued

Maintenance

Safety When Performing Maintenance

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we

cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing

maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task.

• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames

away from the 12-volt battery, all High Voltage systems, and all fuel related parts.

• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.

u Heat from the surrounding parts can ignite them, causing a fire.

• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not

gasoline.

• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the 12-volt

battery or compressed air.

• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.

u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.

■

Maintenance Safety

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

WARNING

Improperly maintaining this vehicle or

failing to correct a problem before driving

can cause a crash in which you can be

seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and

maintenance recommendations according

to the schedules in this owner's manual.

WARNING

Failure to properly follow maintenance

instructions and precautions can cause you

to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and

precautions in this owner's manual.

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

620

Maintenance

• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.

u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and

the power system is turned off.

• Make sure that the radiator fan is stopped before inspecting the engine

compartment.

u Depending on the vehicle condition, the radiator fan may operate even when

the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.

u Make sure to let the power system including the engine and exhaust system

cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts.

• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.

u Do not activate the power system unless instructed, and keep your hands and

limbs away from moving parts. When the power mode is on, the engine can

automatically start, or the radiator fan may start operating without the engine

running.

• Do not touch the high voltage battery and wiring (orange).

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

The use of Honda Genuine Parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and

servicing your vehicle. Honda Genuine Parts are manufactured according to the

same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

■

Vehicle Safety

1Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

NOTICE

Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may

damage the engine cover and component parts.

621

Maintenance

Maintenance Minder

If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages

appear on the driver information interface every time you set the power mode to

ON. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your

vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

622

uuMaintenance Minder

uTo Use Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

To Use Maintenance Minder

Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the

engine oil, appear on the driver information interface.

You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.

1. Set the power mode to ON.

2. Press the (home) button.

3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed.

4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. The engine

oil life appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance items

due soon.

■

Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

Based on the engine operating conditions, the

remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed

as a percentage.

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you

can view on the driver information interface.

2 Maintenance Service Items P. 626

Displayed Engine Oil

Life (%)

Calculated Engine Oil

Life (%)

100 100 to 91

90 90 to 81

80 80 to 71

70 70 to 61

60 60 to 51

50 50 to 41

40 40 to 31

30 30 to 21

20 20 to 16

15 15 to 11

10 10 to 6

5 5 to 1

0 0

Models with A-type meter

(Home) Button

Engine Oil Life

Main Item

Sub Item

Left Selector Wheel

623

uuMaintenance Minder

uTo Use Maintenance Minder

Continued

Maintenance

1. Set the power mode to ON.

2. Roll the right selector wheel until the Maintenance Minder screen is displayed.

The engine oil life appears on the driver information interface along with

maintenance items due soon.

Models with B-type meter

Engine Oil Life

Main Item

Sub Item

Right Selector Wheel

624

uuMaintenance Minder

uTo Use Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

*1:Models with A-type meter

*2:Models with B-type meter

■

Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information

Interface

Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information

When you select the

Maintenance Minder screen,

it displays codes for

maintenance items due at

the next engine oil change,

along with the percentage of

engine oil life remaining.

Maintenance Due Soon 15 % The remaining engine oil life

is 15 to 6 percent.

Press the (home) button

to switch to another display.

Roll the right selector wheel

to switch to another display.

The engine oil is approaching

the end of its service life, and

the maintenance items should

be inspected and serviced

soon.

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

625

uuMaintenance Minder

uTo Use Maintenance Minder

Continued

Maintenance

*1:Models with A-type meter

*2:Models with B-type meter

The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.

Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information

Maintenance Due Now 5 % The remaining engine oil life

is 5 to 1 percent.

Press the (home) button

to switch to another display.

Roll the right selector wheel

to switch to another display.

The engine oil has almost

reached the end of its service

life, and the maintenance items

should be inspected and

serviced as soon as possible.

Maintenance Past Due

Negative Distance

The engine oil life has passed

its service life, and a negative

distance appears after driving

over 10 miles (U.S. models) or

10 km (Canadian models).

The negative distance on the

display blinks.

Press the (home) button

to switch to another display.

Roll the right selector wheel

to switch to another display.

The engine oil life has passed.

The maintenance items must

be inspected and serviced

immediately.

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

626

uuMaintenance Minder

uTo Use Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

■

Maintenance Service Items

Maintenance Minder Message

System Message

Indicator

Sub ItemsMain Item

627

uuMaintenance Minder

uTo Use Maintenance Minder

Continued

Maintenance

U.S. models

*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset,

change the engine oil every year.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 729.

CODE Maintenance Main Items

●

Replace engine oil

●

Replace engine oil

and oil filter

●

Inspect front and rear brakes

●

Check expiration date for temporary tire repair kit

bottle

●

Inspect these items:

• Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots

• Suspension components

• Driveshaft boots

• Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)

• All fluid levels and condition of fluids

• Exhaust system

• Fuel lines and connections

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and

from diesel powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.

This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance

Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed

every 47,500 miles or 3 years (76,000 km or 3 years).

*5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is

reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

CODE Maintenance Sub Items

●

Rotate tires

●

Replace air cleaner element

●

Replace dust and pollen filter

●

Replace transmission fluid

●

Replace spark plugs

●

Replace engine coolant

●

Replace rear differential fluid

●

Replace brake fluid

* Not available on all models

628

uuMaintenance Minder

uTo Use Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

Canadian models

*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset,

change the engine oil every year.

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).

*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and

from diesel powered vehicles, replace every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).

*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.

This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance

Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed

every 76,000 km or 3 years (47,500 miles or 3 years).

*5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is

reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 729.

CODE Maintenance Main Items

●

Replace engine oil

●

Replace engine oil

and oil filter

CODE Maintenance Sub Items

●

Rotate tires

●

Replace air cleaner element

●

Replace dust and pollen filter

●

Replace transmission fluid

●

Replace spark plugs

●

Replace engine coolant

●

Replace rear differential fluid

●

Replace brake fluid

●

Service front and rear brakes

●

Check expiration date for temporary tire repair kit

bottle

●

Inspect these items:

• Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots

• Suspension components

• Driveshaft boots

• Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)

• All fluid levels and condition of fluids

• Exhaust system

• Fuel lines and connections

Continued

629

uuMaintenance Minder

uTo Use Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the

maintenance service.

1. Set the power mode to ON.

2. Press the (home) button.

3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed.

4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen.

5. Press and hold the left selector wheel for about 10 seconds to enter the reset

mode.

6. Roll the left selector wheel to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All

due items (you can also select Cancel to end the process).

7. Press the left selector wheel to reset the selected item.

8. Repeat from step 5 for other items you wish to reset.

■

Resetting the Display

1Resetting the Display

NOTICE

Failure to reset the Maintenance Minder

display

after a maintenance service results in the system

showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can

lead to serious mechanical problems.

The dealer will reset the Maintenance Minder

display after completing the required maintenance

service. If someone other than a dealer performs

maintenance service, reset the Maintenance

Minder

display yourself.

You can also reset the Maintenance Minder

display

using the driver information interface or audio/

information screen.

2 Vehicle Settings P. 141

2 Vehicle Settings

P. 171

2 Customized Features P. 396

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter and 9“ Color Touchscreen

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

Models with A-type meter

Left Selector Wheel

(Home) Button

* Not available on all models

630

uuMaintenance Minder

uTo Use Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

1. Set the power mode to ON.

2. Roll the right selector wheel until the Maintenance Minder screen is displayed.

3. Press and hold the right selector wheel for about 10 seconds to enter the reset

mode.

4. Roll the right selector wheel to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All

due items (you can also select Cancel to end the process).

5. Press the right selector wheel to reset the selected item.

6. Repeat from step 3 for other items you wish to reset.

Models with B-type meter

Right Selector Wheel

631

Maintenance

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood

Brake Fluid

(Black Cap)

Engine Coolant

Reserve Tank

Radiator Cap

Washer Fluid

(Blue Cap)

Engine Oil Dipstick

(Orange)

Engine Oil Fill Cap

12-Volt Battery

High Voltage System

Coolant Tank

632

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Maintenance

Opening the Hood

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set

the parking brake.

2. Pull the hood release handle under the

driver’s side lower corner of the dashboard.

u The hood will pop up slightly.

3. Push the hood latch lever (located under

the front edge of the hood to the center) to

the side and raise the hood. Once you have

raised the hood slightly, you can release the

lever.

4. Lift the hood up most of the way.

u The hydraulic supports will lift it up the

rest of the way and hold it up.

When closing, lower it to approximately

12 inches (30 cm), then press down firmly with

your hands.

1Opening the Hood

NOTICE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are

raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in

possible damage to the hood and/or the wipers.

NOTICE

Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may

damage the engine cover and component parts.

When closing the hood, check that the hood is

securely latched.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can

open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch

mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Pull

Hood Release Handle

Lever

633

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

Maintenance

Recommended Engine Oil

Use a genuine engine oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable type and

viscosity (for the ambient temperature) as shown in the image that follows.

Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. If you drive

the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.

*1:Formulated to improve fuel economy.

■

Synthetic oil

You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal

and is the specified viscosity grade.

Genuine Engine Oil Commercial Engine Oil

• Honda Genuine Motor Oil • API service SN or higher grade fuel-

efficient oil

• API Certification Mark "Starburst"

1Recommended Engine Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,

they may adversely affect the engine performance

and durability.

The following seal indicates the oil is energy

conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum

Institute’s latest requirements.

Ambient Temperature

0W-20

Ambient Temperature

634

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Maintenance

Oil Check

We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Turn off the power system. You can check the oil level without the engine having

run beforehand. If the engine has been running, wait approximately three minutes

before you check the oil.

1. Remove the dipstick (orange).

2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or

paper towel.

3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its

hole.

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the

level. It should be between the upper and

lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

1Oil Check

If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly

add oil, being careful not to overfill.

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

635

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Maintenance

Adding Engine Oil

1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.

2. Add oil slowly.

3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten

it securely.

4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the

engine oil dipstick.

1Adding Engine Oil

NOTICE

Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.

Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and

engine damage.

If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil

may damage the engine compartment components.

Use a neutral detergent to remove it if it spills on the

engine cover. Do not use organic solvents such as

brake cleaner.

Engine Oil

Fill Cap

636

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Maintenance

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the

engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.

Turn the power system off before changing the engine oil or oil filter.

Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver

information interface.

1. Run the engine until it reaches normal

operating temperature, and then turn the

engine off.

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil

fill cap.

3. Remove the Phillips-head screws and

slotted head screws by turning 90°

counter-clockwise on the undercarriage

and remove the under cover.

4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from

the bottom of the engine, and drain the

oil into a suitable container.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

NOTICE

You may damage the environment if you do not

dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are

changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of

the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take

it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away

into a garbage can or onto the ground.

Screw Under Cover

Drain Bolt

Washer

637

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Maintenance

5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the

remaining oil.

6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to

the engine contact surface.

u If it is stuck, you must detach it.

7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the

contact surface of the engine block, and

install a new oil filter.

u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to

the filter gasket.

8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then

reinstall the drain bolt.

u Tightening torque:

30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)

9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the

engine.

u Engine oil change capacity (including filter):

4.2 US qt (4.0 L)

10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and

start the engine.

11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and

then check that there is no leak from the

drain bolt or oil filter.

12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,

and then check the oil level on the

dipstick.

u If necessary, add more engine oil.

13. Reinstall the under cover in the same order

it was removed.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You will need a special wrench to replace the oil

filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.

When installing the new oil filter, follow the

instructions supplied with the oil filter.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. If the

Engine oil pressure low warning appears, turn off

the engine, and check your work.

Oil Filter

638

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Maintenance

Engine Coolant

This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any

straight antifreeze or water.

We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the

reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the

radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are

cool.

2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank.

u If the coolant level is below the MIN

mark, add the specified coolant until it

reaches the MAX mark.

3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

■

Reserve Tank

1Engine Coolant

NOTICE

Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of

antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at

temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your

vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below

this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant

should be increased. Consult a dealer for details.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use

another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a

temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality

coolant recommended for aluminum engines.

Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in

corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or

fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with

Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your

vehicle's cooling system. They may not be compatible

with the coolant or with the engine components.

WARNING

Removing the radiator cap while the

engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray

out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool

down before removing the radiator cap.

MAX

Reserve Tank

MIN

639

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Maintenance

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are

cool.

2. Turn the radiator cap 1/8th turn counter-

clockwise and relieve any pressure in the

cooling system.

3. Push down and turn the radiator cap

counter-clockwise to remove it.

4. The coolant level should be up to the base

of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.

5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it

fully.

■

Radiator

1Radiator

NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill

any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can

damage components in the engine compartment.

Radiator Cap

640

uuMaintenance Under the HooduHigh Voltage System Coolant

Maintenance

High Voltage System Coolant

When checking the coolant level, make sure to follow the procedures listed below.

If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

1. Check the coolant level in the tank.

2. If the coolant level has dropped below the

MIN level, have your vehicle serviced at a

dealer.

u Only a properly trained technician can

refill the coolant and check the system

for leaks.

■

Coolant Tank

1High Voltage System Coolant

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your

vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible

with the coolant or with the motor components.

Coolant Tank

MAX

MIN

641

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

Maintenance

Transmission Fluid

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Do not attempt to check or change the transmission fluid yourself.

Specified fluid: Honda HEVF-Type 1

1Transmission Fluid

NOTICE

Do not mix Honda HEVF-Type 1 with other

transmission fluids.

Using a transmission fluid other than Honda HEVF-

Type 1 may adversely affect the operation and durability

of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage the

transmission.

Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that

is not equivalent to Honda HEVF-Type 1 is not

covered by Honda’s new vehicle limited warranty.

642

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid

Maintenance

Brake Fluid

The fluid level should be between the MIN

and MAX marks on the side of the reserve

tank.

Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

■

Checking the Brake Fluid

1Brake Fluid

NOTICE

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your

vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive

damage.

If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should

use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed

container as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion

and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the

brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy

Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,

have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn

brake pads as soon as possible.

Reserve Tank

MAX

MIN

643

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

Maintenance

Refilling Window Washer Fluid

Check the amount of window washer fluid.

If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.

If the washer fluid is low, a message appears

on the driver information interface.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water

solution in the windshield washer reservoir.

Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A

vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield

washer pump.

Use only commercially available windshield washer

fluid.

Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime

scale buildup.

Canadian models

644

Maintenance

Replacing Light Bulbs

Headlights

Headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the

light assembly.

Front Turn Signal Lights and Parking/Daytime

Running Lights

Front turn signal lights and parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an

authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Front Side Marker Lights

Front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and

replace the light assembly.

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights

Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect

and replace the light assembly.

1Headlights

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not

need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry

heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have

the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified

technician.

645

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Lights, Taillights, Rear Side Marker Lights, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs

Continued

Maintenance

Brake Lights, Taillights, Rear Side Marker Lights, and

Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Unscrew the bolts.

2. Pull the taillight carefully until the snap pins

are removed from the body grommets.

Brake Light: LED

Taillight: LED

Rear Side Marker Light: LED

Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W Amber (WY21W)

1Brake Lights, Taillights, Rear Side Marker Lights, and Rear Turn

Signal Light Bulbs

Brake lights, taillights, and rear side marker lights are

LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect

and replace the light assembly.

Bolt

Snap Pin

646

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Lights, Taillights, Rear Side Marker Lights, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs

Maintenance

3. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.

4. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and

remove it.

5. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

6. Align the pins with the body grommets,

then push in until they fully seat.

Socket

Bulb

647

uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillights and Back-Up Lights

Maintenance

Taillights and Back-Up Lights

Taillights and back-up lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect

and replace the light assembly.

Rear License Plate Light

Rear license plate light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and

replace the light assembly.

High-Mount Brake Light

High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and

replace the light assembly.

648

Maintenance

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

Checking Wiper Blades

If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and become noisy,

and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Lifting the Front Wiper Arms

1. Set the power mode to ON, then to

VEHICLE OFF.

2. Within 10 seconds of setting the power

mode to VEHICLE OFF, hold the wiper

switch in the MIST position for more than

two seconds.

u Both wiper arms are set to the

maintenance position as shown in the

image.

3. Lift both wiper arms.

1Lifting the Front Wiper Arms

NOTICE

When lifting the wiper arms, always follow the

instructions to move them into the maintenance

position.

The wiper arms may be damaged if they are moved

manually.

649

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade

Maintenance

Changing the Front Wiper Blade

1. Lift both wiper arms.

2 Lifting the Front Wiper Arms P. 648

2. Depress the lock tab, then slide the wiper

blade off the wiper arm.

3. Slide the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until it clicks into place.

4. Lower both wiper arms.

5. Set the power mode to ON, then set the

wiper switch to the MIST position once.

u The wiper arms return to the standard

position.

1Changing the Front Wiper Blade

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield,

as it may damage the wiper arm and/or the

windshield.

Tab

650

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

Maintenance

Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

1. Raise the wiper arm off.

2. Pivot the bottom end of the wiper blade up

until it comes off from the wiper arm.

3. Slide the blade out of the wiper.

4. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and

mount to a new rubber blade.

1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

NOTICE

Do not try to forcefully lift up the wiper arm.

The wiper arm may be damaged if it is lifted too high.

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm, as it may damage the

rear window.

Wiper Arm

Blade

Retainer

651

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

Maintenance

5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder.

u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then

install the wiper blade assembly onto the

wiper arm.

Holder

652

Maintenance

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Checking Tires

To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in

good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

■

Inflation guidelines

Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.

Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and

are more likely to fail from overheating.

Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,

and wear unevenly.

Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the

others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in

all tires. Even tires in good condition can lose 1–2 psi (10–20 kPa, 0.1–0.2 kgf/cm

)

per month.

■

Inspection guidelines

Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.

Look for:

• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,

splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.

• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.

• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.

• Excessive tread wear.

2 Wear Indicators P. 657

• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.

1Checking Tires

Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This

means the vehicle has been parked for at least three

hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If

necessary, add or release air until the specified

pressure is reached.

If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as

4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm

) higher than if

checked when cold.

Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must

calibrate the TPMS.

2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

P. 492

Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent

vibration while driving. New tires and any that have

been removed and reinstalled should be properly

balanced.

WARNING

Using tires that are excessively worn or

improperly inflated can cause a crash in

which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s

manual regarding tire inflation and

maintenance.

U.S. models

653

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label

Continued

Maintenance

Tire and Loading Information Label

The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading

information.

Tire Labeling

The tires that came on your vehicle have a

number of markings. Those you should be

aware of are described as shown.

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

1Tire and Loading Information Label

The tire and loading information label attached to the

driver’s doorjamb contains:

a The number of people your vehicle can carry.

b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not

exceed this weight.

c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.

d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and

spare.

Label

Example

Tire Size

Tire

Identification

Number (TIN)

Maximum

Tire Load

Maximum

Tire Pressure

Tire Size

■

Tire Sizes

1Tire Sizes

Following is an example of tire size with an

explanation of what each component means.

P235/60 R18 102T

P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).

235: Tire width in millimeters.

60: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a

percentage of its width).

R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).

18: Rim diameter in inches.

102: Load index (a numerical code associated with

the maximum load the tire can carry).

T: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the

maximum speed rating).

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

654

Maintenance

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like

the examples in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at

least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given

inflation pressure.

Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can

hold.

Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum

permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended

by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves

designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

■

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

■

Glossary of Tire Terminology

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

There are two different formats that the TIN may be

listed in.

Format A

DOT B97R FW6X 2209

DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all

requirements of the U.S. Department of

Transportation.

B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.

FW6X: Tire type code.

22 09: Date of manufacture.

Year

Week

Format B

DOT 1A3 OFBEKP 1522

DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all

requirements of the U.S. Department of

Transportation.

1A3: PLANT CODE

OFBEKP: MANUFACTURER'S CODE

15 22: DATE CODE

Year

Week

655

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Continued

Maintenance

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety

Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,

and temperature performance according to Department of

Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these

gradings.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall

between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear

rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in

driving habits, service practices and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

■

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

■

Treadwear

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

For example:

Treadwear 200

Traction AA

Temperature A

All passenger car tires must conform

to Federal Safety Requirements in

addition to these grades.

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

656

Maintenance

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement

as measured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction performance.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its

ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and

reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire

failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which

all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels

of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

■

Traction

■

Temperature

1Traction

Warning: The traction grade

assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak

traction characteristics.

1Temperature

Warning: The temperature grade for

this tire is established for a tire that is

properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive loading,

either separately or in combination,

can cause heat buildup and possible

tire failure.

657

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Maintenance

Wear Indicators

The groove where the wear indicator is

located is about 1/16 inch (about 1.6 mm)

shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the

tread has worn so that the indicator is

exposed, replace the tire.

Worn out tires have poor traction on wet

roads.

Tire Service Life

The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road

conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and

environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is

recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five

years old. All tires should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of

manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

Example of a Wear

Indicator mark

658

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

Maintenance

Tire and Wheel Replacement

Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and

maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire‘s sidewall). Using tires of a

different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and

Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®) system to work incorrectly.

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the

front or rear tires in pairs.

Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

WARNING

Installing improper tires on your vehicle can

affect handling and stability. This can cause

a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or

killed.

Always use the size and type of tires

recommended in this owner’s manual.

659

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Maintenance

Tire Rotation

Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information

interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

■

Tires without rotation marks

Rotate the tires as shown here.

■

Tires with rotation marks

Rotate the tires as shown here.

1Tire Rotation

Tires with directional tread patterns should only be

rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).

Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation

indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Wheel nut torque for the tires that come standard-

equipped with your vehicle is as follows.

Wheel nut torque:

80 lbf

∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the

TPMS.

2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

P. 492

Front

Direction Mark

U.S. models

Front

660

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires

Maintenance

Winter Tires

If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires,

or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when

driving.

Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent

skidding.

Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.

When mounting, refer to the following points.

For winter tires:

• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.

• Mount the tires to all four wheels.

For tire chains:

• Install them on the front tires only.

• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the

chains listed below:

• Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as

tightly as you can.

• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.

• Drive slowly.

Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAIN TC2212MM

Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAIN TC2111MM

1Winter Tires

NOTICE

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly

installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines,

suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are

hitting any part of the vehicle.

When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain

manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle

operational limits.

If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be

aware that these tires are not designed for winter

driving conditions. For more information, contact a

dealer.

WARNING

Using the wrong chains, or not properly

installing chains, can damage the brake

lines and cause a crash in which you can be

seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner's

manual regarding the selection and use of

tire chains.

Models with 235/60R18 tires

Models with 235/55R19 tires

661

Maintenance

12-Volt Battery

Checking the 12-Volt Battery

The condition of the battery is monitored by a

sensor located on the negative terminal of the

battery. If there is a problem with this sensor,

the driver information interface will display a

warning message. If this happens, have your

vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.

If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead:

• The audio system is disabled.

2 Audio System Theft Protection P. 276

• The immobilizer system needs to be reset.

2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 111

112-Volt Battery

WARNING: Battery post, terminals,

and related accessories contain lead

and lead compounds.

Wash your hands after handling.

WARNING

The battery gives off explosive hydrogen

gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to

explode with enough force to kill or

seriously hurt you.

When conducting any battery

maintenance, wear protective clothing and

a face shield, or have a skilled technician do

it.

Canadian models

662

uu12-Volt BatteryuCharging the 12-Volt Battery

Maintenance

Charging the 12-Volt Battery

Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system.

Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.

If the battery cable is removed while a system update is being performed, the

electrical system can be permanently damaged. Only remove the battery cable when

a system update is not being performed.

112-Volt Battery

When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals

by applying a baking powder and water solution.

Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel

dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to

help prevent future corrosion.

When replacing the battery, the replacement must be

of the same specifications.

Consult a dealer for more information.

The Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®) system, brake

system (Amber), Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with

Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/ TPMS

and

safety support indicators may come on in amber

along with a message in the gauge when you set the

power mode to ON after reconnecting the 12-volt

battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your

vehicle checked by a dealer.

The 12-volt battery installed in this vehicle is

specifically designed for a model with System

Updates.

Using a 12-volt battery other than this specified type

may shorten the battery life, and prevent System

Updates from activating. If you need to replace the

battery, make sure to select the specified type and

size. Ask a dealer for more details.

Models with 9" Color Touchscreen with Google built-in

* Not available on all models

663

Maintenance

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Remote Battery

If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

1. Remove the built-in key.

2. With the buttons facing down, remove the

upper half of the cover by carefully prying

on the slot with the key grip.

u Wrap a key grip with a cloth to prevent

scratching the keyless remote.

3. Remove the battery by prying on the edge

with flat-tip screwdriver. Make sure to

replace the battery with the correct polarity.

u Wrap a flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

to prevent scratching the keyless remote.

1Replacing the Remote Battery

NOTICE

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the

environment. Always confirm local regulations for

battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or

at a dealer.

WARNING

CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD

The battery that powers the remote

transmitter can cause severe internal burns

and can even lead to death if swallowed.

Keep new and used batteries away from

children.

If you suspect that a child has swallowed

the battery, seek medical attention

immediately.

Battery type: CR2032

Battery

664

Maintenance

Climate Control System Maintenance

Air Conditioning

To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE

J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and

certified technicians.

Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one

removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and

labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

Dust and Pollen Filter

The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects

pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance Minder

messages will let

you know when to replace the filter.

We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your

vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

1Climate Control System Maintenance

NOTICE

Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment.

To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the

evaporator with one removed from a used or

salvaged vehicle.

Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is

flammable and can be ignited during servicing if

proper procedures are not followed.

The air conditioner label is found under the hood:

2 Safety Labels P. 96

2 Specifications P. 720

Canadian models

: Caution

: Flammable Refrigerant

Requires Registered

Technician to Service

Air Conditioning

System

1Dust and Pollen Filter

If the airflow from the climate control system

deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up

easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please

contact a dealer for replacement.

665

Continued

Maintenance

Cleaning

Interior Care

Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.

Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.

Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loops of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.

Wipe using a glass cleaner.

■

Cleaning Seat Belts

1Interior Care

Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical

devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are

splashed on them.

Do not use silicone-based sprays on electrical devices

such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may

cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside

the vehicle.

If a silicone-based spray is inadvertently used on

electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and

liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,

and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.

Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as

benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them

away using a dry cloth.

Do not place used cloths on top of resin-based parts

or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

Loop

■

Cleaning the Window

1Cleaning the Window

Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.

Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a

soft cloth so as not to damage them.

Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass

cleaner, on or around the cover of the electrical

components around the rearview mirror.

uuCleaninguInterior Care

666

Maintenance

The driver's floor mat hooks over floor

anchors, which keep the mat from sliding

forward.

Do not put any additional floor mats on

top of the anchored mat.

To properly clean leather:

1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust.

2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90%

water and 10% neutral soap.

3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth.

4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.

■

Floor Mats

1Floor Mats

If you use any floor mats that were not originally

provided with your vehicle, make sure they are

designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and

are securely anchored by the floor anchors.

Position any rear seat floor mats properly. If not

properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with

the front seat functions.

Lock

Unlock

Example

■

Maintaining Genuine Leather

1Maintaining Genuine Leather

It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as

soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather, resulting

in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the

leather. In addition, please note that some dark

colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats,

resulting in discoloration or stains.

667

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Continued

Maintenance

Exterior Care

Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.

Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a

painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following

conditions:

• If driving on roads with road salt.

• If driving in coastal areas.

• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap is stuck to painted surfaces.

• Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.

• Fold in the door mirrors.

• For models equipped with automatic intermittent wipers, turn the wipers off.

• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.

• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to

enter the vehicle interior.

• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,

use low pressure water and a mild detergent.

• Do not spray water directly onto the camera or the area around it. Water may

enter the lens and cause the camera to malfunction.

■

Washing the Vehicle

■

Using an Automated Car Wash

■

Using High Pressure Cleaners

1Washing the Vehicle

Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can

cause a malfunction.

Lock the doors when washing the vehicle.

Do not spray water onto the fuel fill door directly. A

high-pressure spray may cause it to open.

Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the

fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel

system or engine.

If you need to lift the wiper arms away from the

windshield, first set the wiper arms to the

maintenance position.

2 Lifting the Front Wiper Arms P. 648

If water and any chemicals are on the brakes when

your vehicle is being washed, drive a short distance

and apply the brakes several times before parking.

Parking while brakes are wet may cause them to be

stuck by rust.

Air Intake Vents

uuCleaninguExterior Care

668

Maintenance

A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the

elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the

elements, so reapply as necessary.

If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin-coated parts, they

may stain or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and

clean water.

Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road

contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent

to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals

(including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish

on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish,

the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains,

wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.

■

Applying Wax

■

Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin-Coated Parts

■

Cleaning the Window

■

Maintaining Aluminum Wheels

1Applying Wax

NOTICE

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage

the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe

away spills immediately.

1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin-Coated Parts

Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when

you want to repair the painted surface of the parts

made of resin.

669

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Maintenance

The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily

if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.

Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant

enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to

vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural

processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.

Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame

surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.

However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops

building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Refer to the color code label and the temperature notice label affixed to the driver’s

doorjamb before painting the vehicle.

High temperature may damage the high voltage battery used to power the electric

motor.

When painting the vehicle in a heated paint booth, make sure the temperature does

not exceed 150°F (65°C).

■

Fogged Exterior Light Lenses

■

Painting the Vehicle

1Painting the Vehicle

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models

Canadian models

670

Maintenance

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories

When installing accessories, check the following:

• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and

delay your reaction to driving conditions.

• Do not install any items other than Honda Genuine Accessories designated for

your vehicle over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or backs of the front

seats, on the sides of the rear seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side

windows.

Items other than Honda Genuine Accessories designated for your vehicle installed

in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicle’s airbags or may

be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy.

• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with

proper operation of your vehicle.

2 Fuses P. 705

• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for

assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.

1Accessories and Modifications

Honda Genuine Accessories are recommended to

ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

WARNING

Improper accessories or modifications can

affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and

performance, and cause a crash in which

you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner's

manual regarding accessories and

modifications.

WARNING

Use of improperly designed, engineered or

manufactured high voltage battery

assemblies could cause a fire in your

vehicle.

A vehicle fire could result in a crash or

injury.

Only use a genuine Honda high voltage

battery assembly, or its equivalent, in your

vehicle.

671

uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications

Maintenance

Modifications

Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or

reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar

effect.

Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance.

Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not

make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle

to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.

The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle

is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other

devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely

affect the vehicle’s electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly

resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.

Do not modify or attempt to repair your vehicle’s high voltage hybrid power system

or otherwise modify vehicle electrical systems. Disassembling or modifying electrical

equipment can result in a crash or a fire.

If you ever need to replace your vehicle’s high voltage battery assembly outside of

warranty coverage, we highly recommend that you only use a genuine Honda high-

voltage battery assembly. Genuine Honda high voltage battery assemblies are

designed to work with your vehicle’s hybrid power system and have been designed,

engineered, and manufactured to avoid overcharging situations. Non-genuine high-

voltage battery assemblies may not have been similarly designed, engineered, and

manufactured, and installation of such assemblies could result in overcharging, fires,

loss of power, or other conditions that may increase the likelihood of a crash or

injury.

1Accessories and Modifications

Some Honda Genuine Accessories are supplied with

an exclusive owner’s manual for the operation and

care detail of the product. If an accessory owner’s

manual is provided to you, please refer to it for full

detail.

If any Honda Genuine Accessories become

inoperable, refer to the separate accessory owner’s

manual (if applicable) or consult a dealer for

assistance to troubleshoot the potential faulty

condition.

672

This page intentionally left blank.

673

Handling the Unexpected

This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools

Types of Tools.................................. 674

If a Tire Goes Flat

Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire....... 675

Handling of the Jack......................... 688

Power System Won’t Start

Checking the Procedure................... 689

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak... 690

Emergency Power System On........... 691

Emergency Power System Off........... 692

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead .......... 693

Shift Lever Does Not Move.............. 695

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating............. 696

Indicator Coming On/Blinking

If the Engine oil pressure low Warning

Appears ......................................... 698

If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System

Indicator Comes On ....................... 699

If the Limited stopping power Warning

Appears ......................................... 699

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes

On or Blinks ................................... 700

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes

On or Blinks ................................... 701

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake

System Indicator (Amber) Comes On.... 702

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator Comes On ....................... 703

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Comes On or Blinks ....................... 704

Fuses

Fuse Locations ................................. 705

Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 709

Emergency Towing........................... 711

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

... 712

If You Cannot Open the Tailgate

..........713

Refueling

.................................................714

Emergency Call (eCall)

............................715

674

Handling the Unexpected

Tools

Types of Tools

1Types of Tools

The tools are stored in the cargo area.

Funnel

675

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

If a Tire Goes Flat

Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

If the tire has a large cut or is otherwise severely damaged, you will need to have the

vehicle towed. If the tire only has a small puncture, from a nail for instance, you can

use the temporary tire repair kit so that you can drive to the nearest service station

for a more permanent repair.

If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly and brake gradually

to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place.

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake.

2. Put the transmission into

(P.

3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.

1Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

The kit should not be used in the following situations.

Instead, contact a dealer or roadside assistance to

have the vehicle towed.

• The tire sealant has expired.

• More than one tire is punctured.

• The puncture or cut is larger than 3/16 inch (4 mm).

• The tire side wall is damaged or the puncture is

outside the contact area.

• Damage has been caused by driving with the tire

extremely under inflated.

• The tire bead is no longer seated.

• The rim is damaged.

Do not remove a nail or screw that punctured the

tire. If you remove it from the tire, you may not be

able to repair the puncture using the kit.

When the puncture is: Kit Use

Smaller than 3/16 inch (4 mm) Yes

Larger than 3/16 inch (4 mm) No

Contact Area

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

676

Handling the Unexpected

1. Pull and remove the cover on the left side of

the cargo area.

2. Unfasten the strap and take the kit out of

the cargo area.

3. Place the kit face up on flat ground near the

flat tire and away from traffic. Do not place

the kit on its side.

■

Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire

1Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire

Speed restriction label is applied on the temporary

tire repair kit.

Selector Knob

Speed Restriction Label

Power Plug

Sealant Hose

REPAIR Side

Inflator Switch

AIR Side

Pressure Gauge

Tire Sealant

Expiration

Date

Air Release Button

Bottle

Release

Button

Air Hose

StrapTire Repair Kit

Cover

Continued

677

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve

stem.

2. Remove the sealant hose from the kit.

3. Attach the sealant hose onto the tire valve

stem. Screw it until it is tight.

■

Injecting Sealant and Air

1Injecting Sealant and Air

The sealant can permanently stain clothing and other

materials. Be careful during handling and wipe away

any spills immediately.

WARNING

Tire sealant contains substances that are

harmful and can be fatal if swallowed.

If accidentally swallowed, do not induce

vomiting. Drink plenty of water and get

medical attention immediately.

For skin or eye contact, flush with cool

water and get medical attention if

necessary.

Tire Valve Stem

Valve Cap

Sealant

Hose

Tire Valve Stem

Sealant Hose

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

678

Handling the Unexpected

4. Plug in the compressor to the accessory

power socket.

u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a

door or window.

u Do not plug any other electric devices

into other accessory power sockets.

2 Accessory Power Sockets P. 258

5. Turn the vehicle's power system on.

2 Turning on the Power P. 461

u Keep the power system on while

injecting sealant and air.

2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 95

6. Turn the selector knob to .

1Injecting Sealant and Air

NOTICE

Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit

compressor for more than 15 minutes. The

compressor can overheat and become permanently

damaged.

There are two accessory power sockets:

• In the console panel

• In the cargo area

2 Accessory Power Sockets P. 258

WARNING

Running the engine with the vehicle in an

enclosed or even partly enclosed area can

cause a rapid buildup of toxic carbon

monoxide.

Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can

cause unconsciousness and even death.

Only run the engine to power the air

compressor with the vehicle outdoors.

Console Panel

Cargo Area

REPAIR

Side

Continued

679

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

7. Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit.

u The compressor starts injecting sealant

and air into the tire.

u When the sealant injection is complete,

continue to add air.

8. After the air pressure reaches the specified

pressure, turn off the kit.

u To check the pressure, occasionally turn

off the compressor and read the gauge.

u Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label for

the specified pressure.

9. Unplug the power plug from the accessory

power socket.

10. Unscrew the sealant hose from the tire

valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.

11. Press the air release button until the gauge

returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).

Pressure

Gauge

Inflator

Switch

1Injecting Sealant and Air

Until the sealant injection is complete, the pressure

shown on the pressure gauge will appear higher than

actual. After the sealant injection is complete, the

pressure will drop and then begin to rise again as the

tire is inflated with air. This is normal. To accurately

measure the air pressure using the gauge, turn the air

compressor off only after the sealant injection is

complete.

If the required air pressure is not reached within 10

minutes, the tire may be too severely damaged for

the kit to provide the necessary seal, and your vehicle

will need to be towed.

See a dealer for a replacement sealant bottle and

proper disposal of an empty bottle.

Sealant Hose

Tire Valve

Stem

Air Release Button

680

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

1. Apply the speed restriction label to the

location as shown.

2. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes.

u Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

3. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.

4. Recheck the air pressure using the air hose

on the compressor.

■

Distributing the Sealant in the Tire

Speed Restriction

Label

Air Hose

Continued

681

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

5. Turn the selector knob to .

u Do not turn the air compressor on to

check the pressure.

2 Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 685

1Distributing the Sealant in the Tire

WARNING

Running the engine with the vehicle in an

enclosed or even partly enclosed area can

cause a rapid buildup of toxic carbon

monoxide.

Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can

cause unconsciousness and even death.

Only run the engine to power the air

compressor with the vehicle outdoors.

Console Panel

Cargo Area

AIR

Side

682

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

6. If the air pressure is

• Less than 19 psi (130kPa):

Do not add air or continue driving. The leak is too severe. Call for help and have

your vehicle towed.

2 Emergency Towing P. 711

• Front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 32 psi (220 kPa) or more:

• Front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (230 kPa) or more:

• 33 psi (230 kPa) or more:

Continue driving for another 10 minutes or until you reach the nearest service

station, whichever is sooner. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you have not

reached a service station, stop and check the tire pressure.

u If the air pressure does not go down after the 10 minute driving, you do not

need to check the pressure any more.

Models with 235/60R18 103H tires

Models with 235/60R18 107V tires

Models with 235/55R19 101H tires

All models

683

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

• Greater than 19 psi (130 kPa), but less than front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 32

psi (220 kPa):

Turn the air compressor on to inflate the tire until the tire pressure reaches front:

35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 32 psi (220 kPa).

2 Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 685

• Greater than 19 psi (130 kPa), but less than front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 33

psi (230 kPa):

Turn the air compressor on to inflate the tire until the tire pressure reaches front:

35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (230 kPa).

2 Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 685

• Greater than 19 psi (130 kPa), but less than 33 psi (230 kPa):

Turn the air compressor on to inflate the tire until the tire pressure reaches 33

psi (230 kPa).

2 Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 685

Then, drive carefully for 10 more minutes or until you reach the nearest service

station, whichever is sooner. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you have not

reached a service station, stop and check the tire pressure.

u You should repeat this procedure as long as the air pressure is not within the

range indicated for the tire size.

Models with 235/60R18 103H tires

Models with 235/60R18 107V tires

Models with 235/55R19 101H tires

All models

684

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

7. Unplug the kit from the accessory power

socket.

8. Unscrew the air hose from the tire valve

stem. Reinstall the valve cap.

9. Press the air release button until the gauge

returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).

10. Repackage and properly stow the kit.

Air

Release

Button

Pressure

Gauge

Continued

685

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

You can use the kit to inflate a non-punctured under-inflated tire.

1. Remove the cover on the left side of the

cargo area.

2 Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair

the Flat Tire P. 676

2. Take the kit out of the cargo area.

3. Place the kit face up on flat ground near

the tire to be inflated, away from traffic.

Do not place the kit on its side.

4. Remove the power plug and air hose from

the kit.

5. Remove the valve cap.

6. Attach the air hose onto the tire valve

stem. Screw it until it is tight.

■

Inflating an Under-inflated Tire

1Inflating an Under-inflated Tire

NOTICE

Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit

compressor for more than 15 minutes. The

compressor can overheat and become permanently

damaged.

Power

Plug

Air

Hose

Valve Cap

Tire Valve Stem

Air Hose

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

686

Handling the Unexpected

7. Plug in the kit to the accessory power

socket.

u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a

door or window.

u Do not plug any other electric devices

into other accessory power sockets.

2 Accessory Power Sockets P. 258

8. Turn the vehicle's power system on.

2 Turning on the Power P. 461

u Keep the power system on while

injecting air.

2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 95

9. Turn the selector knob to .

10. Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit.

u The compressor starts to inject air into

the tire.

11. Inflate the tire to the specified air pressure.

1Inflating an Under-inflated Tire

WARNING

Running the engine with the vehicle in an

enclosed or even partly enclosed area can

cause a rapid buildup of toxic carbon

monoxide.

Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can

cause unconsciousness and even death.

Only run the engine to power the air

compressor with the vehicle outdoors.

Console Panel

Cargo Area

AIR Side

687

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

12. Turn off the kit.

u Check the pressure gauge on the air

compressor.

u If overinflated, press the air release

button.

13. Unplug the kit from the accessory power

socket.

14. Unscrew the air hose from the tire valve

stem. Reinstall the valve cap.

15. Press the air release button until the gauge

returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).

16. Repackage and properly stow the kit.

Air

Release

Button

Pressure

Gauge

688

Handling the Unexpected

Handling of the Jack

Your vehicle has jacking points as shown.

When replacing your tires, consult a dealer.

Jacking Points

689

Handling the Unexpected

Power System Won’t Start

Checking the Procedure

If the power system won't start, check the following items and take appropriate action.

If you cannot turn on the power system after checking all the items in the list above, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.

2 If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead P. 693

Depending on the situation, it may be possible to temporarily turn the power system on using the emergency starting procedure.

2 Emergency Power System On P. 691

Checklist Condition What to Do

Check if the related

indicator or driver

information interface

messages come on.

The Temperature is too cold for vehicle to operate message

appears.

●

You must wait for an increase in the

ambient temperature or move the

vehicle to a warmer location.

●

Contact dealer if necessary.

The To start, touch start button with emblem side of

remote message appears.

2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak

P. 690

Check the fuses. Check all fuses, or have your vehicle

checked by a dealer.

2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 709

Check the power system

starting procedure.

Follow the instructions, and try to start the

power system again.

2 Turning on the Power P. 461

Check the shift position. The transmission is not in (P. Change the shift position to (P.

Check the immobilizer

system indicator.

When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the power

system cannot be turned on.

2 Immobilizer System P. 212

2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 111

690

uuPower System Won’t StartuIf the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak

Handling the Unexpected

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak

If the beeper sounds, the To start, touch start button with emblem side of

remote message appears on the driver information interface, the POWER button

flashes, and the READY indicator does not come on, turn on the power system as

follows:

1. Press the POWER button.

u The beeper sounds and the POWER

button flashes for about 30 seconds.

2. Touch the center of the POWER button

with the H logo on the keyless remote while

the POWER button is flashing. The buttons

on the keyless remote should be facing you.

u The beeper sounds, and the POWER

button stays on for about 10 seconds.

3. Depress the brake pedal and press the

POWER button while the POWER button is

on.

u The READY indicator comes on.

u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode

will change to ACCESSORY.

691

uuPower System Won’t StartuEmergency Power System On

Handling the Unexpected

Emergency Power System On

If the power system cannot be turned on using the normal starting procedure, you

may be able to turn it on using the emergency starting procedure below.

Do not use this procedure if it is not an emergency.

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Check that the transmission is in

(P, then set the power mode to ACCESSORY.

3. Firmly depress the brake pedal, then press and hold the POWER button for at

least 15 seconds.

This should be considered a system malfunction even if you are able to turn the

power system on using the above procedure.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

1Emergency Power System On

Refer to the following if you cannot move the shift

lever out of the

(P position.

2 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 695

692

Power System Won’t Start

Emergency Power System Off

Handling the Unexpected

Emergency Power System Off

The POWER button may be used to turn the power system off due to an emergency

situation even while driving. If you must turn the power system off, do either of the

following operations:

• Press and hold the POWER button for about two seconds.

• Firmly press the POWER button three times.

The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the power system

disables the power assist the power system provides to the steering and braking

systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow

the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop

immediately in a safe place.

The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the power system is stopped.

To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, put the transmission into

(P after the vehicle

comes to a complete stop.

1Emergency Power System Off

NOTICE

Do not press the POWER button while driving unless

it is absolutely necessary for the power system to be

turned off.

If you press the POWER button while driving, the

beeper sounds.

693

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead

Jump Starting Procedure

Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the power

system, then open the hood.

1. Open the terminal cover on your vehicle’s

12-volt battery positive + terminal.

2. Connect the first jumper cable to your

vehicle's 12-volt battery + terminal.

3. Connect the other end of the first jumper

cable to the booster battery + terminal.

u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.

When using an automotive battery charger

to boost your 12-volt battery, select a

lower charging voltage than 15-volt. Check

the charger manual for the proper setting.

4. Connect the second jumper cable to the

booster battery - terminal.

5. Connect the other end of the second

jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt

as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable

to any other part.

6. If your vehicle is connected to another

vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine

and increase its RPM slightly.

7. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it

turns over slowly, check that the jumper

cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

1Jump Starting Procedure

Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they

do not come off when the engine vibrates. Be careful

not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable

ends to touch each other while attaching or

detaching the jumper cables.

12-volt battery performance degrades in cold

conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.

The Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®) system, brake

system (Amber), Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with

Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/TPMS

and

safety support indicators may come on along with a

message in the gauge when you set the power mode

to ON after reconnecting the 12-volt battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your

vehicle checked by a dealer.

WARNING

A 12-volt battery can explode if you do not

follow the correct procedure, seriously

injuring anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking

materials away from the 12-volt battery.

Booster Battery

* Not available on all models

694

uuIf the 12-Volt Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure

Handling the Unexpected

Once your vehicle's power system has started, remove the jumper cables in the

following order.

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.

2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -

terminal.

3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's 12-volt battery + terminal.

4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +

terminal.

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

■

What to Do After the Power System Starts

695

Handling the Unexpected

Shift Lever Does Not Move

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P

position.

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.

3. Remove the built-in key from the keyless

remote.

4. Wrap a cloth around the tip of the built-in

key. Put it into the shift lock release slot as

shown in the image, and remove the cover.

5. Insert the built-in key into the shift lock

release slot.

6. While pushing the built-in key in, press the

shift lever release button, and place the

shift lever into

(N.

u The lock is now released. Have the shift

lever checked by a dealer as soon as

possible.

■

Releasing the Lock

Slot

Cover

Shift Lock Release Slot

Release Button

696

Handling the Unexpected

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating

Overheating symptoms are as follows:

• The Power system temperature high. Power may be reduced. message

appears on the driver information interface.

• The Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool.

message appears on the driver information interface.

• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.

The Power system temperature high. Power may be reduced. message

appears on the driver information interface when the power system temperature is

high.

1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.

u Set the parking brake, and put the transmission into

(P. Turn off all accessories

and turn on the hazard warning lights.

2. Keep the power mode in ON, and wait until the message disappears.

u If the message does not disappear, have your vehicle inspected at a dealer.

■

First thing to do

1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.

u No steam or spray present: Keep the power system on and open the hood.

u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the power system and wait until it

subsides. Then, open the hood.

■

The Power system temperature high. Power may be

reduced. Message Appears on the Driver Information

Interface

■

The Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine

to cool. Message Appears on the Driver Information

Interface

1How to Handle Overheating

If the Power system temperature high. Power

may be reduced. message appears on the driver

information interface, your vehicle has less ability to

accelerate and may be harder to start on an incline.

NOTICE

Continuing to drive with the Engine temperature

too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool.

message on the driver information interface may

damage the engine.

WARNING

Steam and spray from an overheated

engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming

out.

697

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

Handling the Unexpected

■

Next thing to do

1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and

turn the power system off once the Engine

temperature too hot. Do not drive.

Allow engine to cool. message on the

driver information interface disappears.

u If the cooling fan is not operating,

immediately turn the power system off.

2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect

the coolant level and check the cooling

system components for leaks.

u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is

low, add coolant until it reaches the

MAX mark.

u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,

check that the radiator is cool. Cover the

radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open

the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to

the base of the filler neck, and put the

cap back on.

■

Last thing to do

Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, turn the power system on.

If the Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool.

message does not appear, resume driving. If it appears again, contact a dealer for

repairs.

1How to Handle Overheating

If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.

Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.

Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze

as soon as possible.

WARNING

Removing the radiator cap while the

engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray

out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool

down before removing the radiator cap.

MAX

Reserve Tank

MIN

698

Handling the Unexpected

Indicator Coming On/Blinking

If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears

■

Reasons for the warning to appear

Appears when the engine oil pressure is low.

■

What to do as soon as the warning

appears

1. Immediately park the vehicle on level

ground in a safe place.

2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights

on.

■

What to do after parking the vehicle

1. Turn the power system off and let it sit for

approximately three minutes.

2. Open the hood and check the oil level.

u Add oil as necessary.

2 Oil Check P. 634

3. Start the engine and check the Engine oil

pressure low warning.

u The warning disappears: Start driving

again.

u The warning does not disappear within

10 seconds: Immediately turn the power

system off and contact a dealer for

repairs.

1If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears

NOTICE

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause

serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

699

uuIndicator Coming On/BlinkinguIf the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator Comes On

Handling the Unexpected

If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator

Comes On

■

Reasons for the indicator to come on

Comes on when there is a problem with the charging system.

■

What to do when the indicator comes on

Stop in a safe place and have your vehicle checked by a dealer

immediately.

If the Limited stopping power Warning Appears

■

Reasons for the warning to appear

Appears when braking ability is reduced.

■

What to do as soon as the warning

appears

Slow down and drive carefully. Have your

vehicle checked by a dealer.

1If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator Comes On

If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the

power system. The power system uses the 12-volt

battery to activate. You may not be able to turn the

power system on again if you have turned it off with

this indicator on.

700

Indicator Coming On/Blinking

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

Handling the Unexpected

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or

Blinks

■

Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink

• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control

system or electric vehicle system.

• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.

■

What to do when the indicator lamp comes on

• Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a

dealer.

• Comes on when there is no petrol in the fuel tank, and goes off after

vehicle is refueled, power mode is turned on, vehicle is driven, and the

power system is turned off multiple times. If it does not go off, have

your vehicle checked by a dealer.

■

What to do when the indicator lamp blinks

Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least

10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

NOTICE

If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,

the emissions control system and the engine could be

damaged.

If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when

restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at

31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle

inspected.

701

uuIndicator Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

Handling the Unexpected

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or

Blinks

■

Reasons for the indicator to come on

• The brake fluid is low.

• There is a malfunction in the brake system.

■

What to do when the indicator comes on while driving

Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.

• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.

• If abnormal, take immediate action. Pull the

(- deceleration paddle

selector several times to help slow the vehicle using regenerative

braking.

■

Reasons for the indicator to blink

There is a problem with the electric parking brake system.

■

What to do when the indicator blinks

Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer

immediately.

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

Have your vehicle repaired immediately.

It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there

is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop

immediately in a safe place. If necessary, pull the

deceleration paddle selector to help slow the vehicle

using regenerative braking.

If the brake system indicator (red) and ABS indicator

come on simultaneously, the electronic brake

distribution system is not working. This can result in

vehicle instability under sudden braking.

Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same

time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes

on, the parking brake may not work.

Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle

checked by a dealer immediately.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes

On or Blinks at the Same Time When the

Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

P. 702

U.S.

Canada

(Red)

702

Indicator Coming On/Blinking

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

Handling the Unexpected

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the

Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

■

If the brake system indicator (red) comes on or blinks at the

same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,

release the parking brake manually or automatically

2 Parking Brake P. 589

• If the brake system indicator (red) continuously comes on or blinks at

the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,

stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer

immediately.

u To prevent the vehicle from moving, put the transmission into

(P.

• If only the brake system indicator (red) is turned off, avoid using the

parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same

Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

If you apply the parking brake, you may not be able

to release it.

If the brake system indicator (red) and the brake

system indicator (amber) come on at the same time,

the parking brake is working.

If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same

time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes

on, the parking brake may not work because it is

checking the system.

U.S.

Canada

(Red)

U.S.

Canada

(Amber)

703

uuIndicator Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On

Handling the Unexpected

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator

Comes On

■

Reasons for the indicator to come on

Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.

■

What to do when the indicator comes on

• Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn on the power system again.

If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle

inspected by a dealer.

• If Do not drive displays on the driver information interface,

immediately stop in a safe place and contact a dealer.

704

Indicator Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

Handling the Unexpected

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or

Blinks

■

Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink

A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated.

If there is a problem with the TPMS, the indicator blinks for about one

minute, and then stays on.

■

What to do when the indicator comes on

Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.

Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the

pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on

the driver side doorjamb.

u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.

2 TPMS Calibration P. 493

■

What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on

Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible.

U.S. models

1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause

it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always

inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

705

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

Fuses

Fuse Locations

If any electrical devices are not working, set

the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and check

to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

Located near the 12-volt battery. Push the

tabs to open the box.

Fuse locations are shown on the image

below.

Locate the fuse in question by the fuse

number in the image and chart.

■

Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Tab

Fuse Box

Front

706

uuFusesuFuse Locations

Handling the Unexpected

■

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected Amps

1 MAIN FUSE 175 A

- 30 A

- 40 A

F/BOX OPTION1 60 A

PTC HTR1 (40 A)

F/BOX OPTION2 60 A

- 60 A

F/BOX MAIN1 60 A

AUDIO AMP

(30 A)

- 30 A

PTC HTR3 (40 A)

RR DEF 30 A

- 50 A

HTR MTR 40 A

PTG MTR

(40 A)

ABS/VSA FSR 40 A

ABS/VSA MTR 40 A

ENG EWP 40 A

ESB 40 A

IG MAIN1 30 A

RFC SUB 40 A

IG MAIN2 30 A

SUB FUSE1 30 A

WIPER 30 A

EPS 70 A

- 30 A

RFC MAIN 40 A

- (30 A)

F/BOX MAIN2 60 A

6- -

7 SRM2 20 A

8- -

9 BACK UP 10 A

10 FR WIPER DEICER

(15 A)

11 - -

12 - -

13 AUDIO SUB GAS

(15 A)

14 - -

15 FR FOG (10 A)

16 - -

17 - -

18 HORN 15 A

19 FR WASHER 15 A

20 AUDIO 15 A

21 SRM1 20 A

22 DBW 15 A

23 HAZARD 10 A

24 VBU 10 A

25 IGP 15 A

Circuit Protected Amps

26 EVTC 20 A

27 LCM L 20 A

28 INJ 20 A

29 STOP 10 A

30 LCM R 20 A

31 IG COIL 15 A

32 ICM 10 A

33 PCU EWP 10 A

34 - -

35 - -

36 - -

37 - -

38 IGA 10 A

39 IGB 10 A

40 - -

41 IGPS LAF 7.5 A

42 MON2 5 A

Circuit Protected Amps

* Not available on all models

707

uuFusesuFuse Locations

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

Located under the dashboard.

Fuse locations are shown on the image

below.

Locate the fuse in question by the fuse

number in the image and chart.

■

Interior Fuse Box

Fuse Box

Fuse Label

708

uuFusesuFuse Locations

Handling the Unexpected

■

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected Amps

1 P/W DR 20 A

2 P/W AS 20 A

3 P/W RR R 20 A

4 P/W RR L 20 A

5 OPTION 10 A

6 SRS 10 A

7 T/G MTR / TRUNK ACT

(10 A)

8RVU

10 A

9 FR ACC SOCKET 20 A

10 DOOR LOCK 20 A

11 METER 10 A

12 - -

13 OPTION 2 10 A

14 OPTION 6 (VB SOL) 10 A

15 DR DOOR UNLOCK (10 A)

16 IMG 10 A

17 YOP TRAILER

(20 A)

18 HAC OP

(20 A)

19 - -

20 USB CHG 10 A

21 CARGO ACC SOCKET 20 A

22 SMART 10 A

23 DR DOOR LOCK (10 A)

24 E-DPS

20 A

25 SBW

10 A

26 SRS 10 A

27 ACG 10 A

28 OPTION 5 (ABS) 10 A

29 FUEL PUMP 20 A

30 L SIDE DOOR UNLOCK

10 A

31 R SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A

32 SUN ROOF 20 A

33 USB CHG PD 10 A

34 - -

35 SUN SHADE

20 A

36 RR H/SEAT

(20 A)

37 - -

38 RR BLOWER

20 A

39 R SIDE DOOR LOCK 10 A

40 DR P/SEAT SLIDE

20 A

41 DR P/SEAT REC

20 A

42 P-ACT

10 A

43 OPTION 10 A

44 DRL 5 A

45 ACC 10 A

46 - -

47 L SIDE DOOR LOCK

10 A

48 H/SEAT

(20 A)

49 AS P/SEAT REC

20 A

50 P/LUMBAR DR/AS 10 A

51 IGA2 (IG HOLD3) 20 A

52 PTG CLOSER

(20 A)

Circuit Protected Amps

53 AS P/SEAT SLI

20 A

54 OPTION1 10 A

55 - -

56 - -

Circuit Protected Amps

* Not available on all models

709

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

Inspecting and Changing Fuses

1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Turn

headlights and all accessories off.

2. Remove the fuse box cover.

3. Check the main fuse in the engine

compartment fuse box.

u Look at the fuse through the hole.

u If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a

dealer.

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses

NOTICE

Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating

greatly increases the chances of damaging the

electrical system.

Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and

confirm the specified amperage on the fuse label.

2 Fuse Locations P. 705

Replace with a fuse of the same specified amperage.

Main Fuse

Hole

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

710

Handling the Unexpected

4. Check the combined fuses in the engine

compartment fuse box.

u Look into the space between the fuses.

u If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a

dealer.

5. Inspect the small fuses in the engine

compartment and the vehicle interior.

u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with

the fuse puller and replace it with a new

one.

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses

There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine

compartment fuse box cover.

Combined Fuse

Blown Fuse

Fuse Puller

711

Handling the Unexpected

Emergency Towing

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

■

Flatbed equipment

The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.

This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

■

Wheel lift equipment

The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off

the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to

tow your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing

NOTICE

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will

cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed

to support the vehicle's weight.

NOTICE

Improper towing such as towing behind a

motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the

transmission.

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.

It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift

from side to side or break.

Make sure the parking brake is released. If you

cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must

be transported by the flatbed equipment.

2 Parking Brake P. 589

2WD models

712

Handling the Unexpected

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.

1. Open the tailgate and remove the cover.

2. Pull the release cord as shown.

3. Open the fuel fill door.

2 How to Refuel P. 613

■

What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

1What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the

vehicle checked.

Cover

Release Cord

713

Handling the Unexpected

If You Cannot Open the Tailgate

If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure.

1. Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the

cover on the back of the tailgate.

u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

to prevent scratches.

2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate

while pushing the lever to the right with the

flat-tip screwdriver.

■

What to Do If Unable to Open the Tailgate

1What to Do If Unable to Open the Tailgate

When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure

there is enough space around the tailgate, and it

does not hit anyone or any object.

Following up:

After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the

vehicle checked.

Cover

Lever

Models with power tailgate

Models without power tailgate

Lever

714

Handling the Unexpected

Refueling

Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel

container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

1. Turn off the power system.

2. Open the fuel fill door.

2 How to Refuel P. 613

3. Pull and remove the cover located on the

left side of the cargo area, then take the

funnel out of its clip.

2 Types of Tools P. 674

4. Place the end of the funnel on the lower

part of filler opening, then insert it slowly

and fully.

u Make sure that the end of the funnel

goes down along with the filler pipe.

5. Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel

container.

u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.

6. Remove the funnel from the filler neck.

u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before

storing it.

7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

NOTICE

Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container

or any funnel other than the one provided with your

vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system.

Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel

tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel

system and its seal.

Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is

gasoline before you refuel.

WARNING

Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.

You can be burned or seriously injured

when handling fuel.

• Turn the power system off, and keep

heat, sparks, and flames away.

• Handle fuel only outdoors.

• Wipe up spills immediately.

Funnel

715

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

Emergency Call (eCall)

Automatic emergency call

If your vehicle is involved in a collision, the

vehicle will attempt to connect to an operator.

Once a connection is established, your

location information will be sent to an

operator with whom you will be able to speak.

When an emergency call is initiated, the vehicle speakers are disabled so that you

can hear the operator.

When the power mode is set to ON, the eCall indicator lights up in green for 1

second, then in red for 1 second.

eCall Indicator

uuEmergency Call (eCall)uAutomatic emergency call

716

Handling the Unexpected

If the eCall system is working properly, the indicator will light up in green.

• Green: eCall system is ready.

• Blinking in green: eCall system is connected and making an eCall to an operator.

• Repeating a pattern of short flashes of the red light: The eCall system has failed

to connect to an operator. The eCall indicator will continue this pattern for 5

seconds, then it will light up in green.

If the eCall system is disabled in the event of a critical system failure, the following

warning will be given to the occupants of the vehicle:

• Red or blacked out: A problem with the eCall system has occurred. If the indicator

stays red or blacked out even after you have restarted the vehicle, have the system

check by a dealer.

1Emergency Call (eCall)

Your vehicle may NOT be able to connect to an

operator if:

• The 12V battery is too low.

• Your vehicle is in an area without adequate cellular

coverage.

• There is a problem with the eCall system itself or its

peripheral equipment such as the microphone or

speakers.

717

uuEmergency Call (eCall)uManual emergency call

Handling the Unexpected

Manual emergency call

If you need to make an emergency call, you

can establish a connection manually. Press the

SOS button.

To cancel a call, press the SOS button for

more than 2 seconds, before 10 seconds has

elapsed since the SOS button was pressed.

The SOS button is protected by a cover. Open the cover to gain access.

When an emergency call is initiated, the vehicle speakers are disabled so that you

can hear the operator.

1Manual emergency call

Do NOT press the button while you are driving. If you

need to contact an operator, park the vehicle in a

safe place before you make a call.

If the eCall system at first fails to connect to an

operator, it will try again until a connection is

established. However, if 2 minutes have elapsed since

the first try was attempted, the system will no longer

attempt to establish a connection.

The SOS button does not cancel a call once the

system is connected to an operator.

Cover

Microphone

SOS Button

718

This page intentionally left blank.

719

Information

This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other

information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 720

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),

Engine Number, Motor Number, and

Transmission Number..................... 722

Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 723

Reporting Safety Defects ................. 726

Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 727

Warranty Coverages......................... 729

Authorized Manuals......................... 732

Customer Service Information......... 733

Open Source License ........................ 734

720

Information

Specifications

■

Vehicle Specifications

Model CR-V

No. of Passengers:

Front 2

Rear 3

Total 5

Weights:

Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating

See the certification label on the driver’s

doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight

Rating (Front)

See the certification label on the driver’s

doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight

Rating (Rear)

See the certification label on the driver’s

doorjamb

■

Air Conditioning

■

Engine Specifications

■

Fuel

■

Washer Fluid

Refrigerant Type HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)

Charge Quantity 17.1 – 18.9 oz (485 – 535 g)

Lubricant Type ND-OIL 11 (POE)

Quantity 7.32 – 8.24 cu-in (120 – 135 cm

)

Displacement 121.6 cu-in (1,993 cm

)

Spark Plugs NGK DILZKAR7G11Y

Type

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number

87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 14 US gal (53 L)

Tank Capacity

U.S.: 1.6 US qt (1.5 L)

Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)

■

Light Bulbs

Headlights (Low Beam) LED

Headlights (High Beam) LED

Front Turn Signal/Parking/Daytime

Running Lights

LED

Front Side Marker Lights LED

Side Turn Signal Lights

(on Door Mirrors)

LED

Brake Lights LED

Rear Side Marker Lights LED

Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W Amber (WY21W)

Back-Up Lights LED

Taillights LED

High-Mount Brake Light LED

Rear License Plate Light LED

Interior Lights

Map Lights LED

Ceiling Light LED

Cargo Area Lights LED

Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4 W

Door Inner Handle

Lights

LED

Foot Lights

LED

Ambient Lights LED

Center Console Light LED

* Not available on all models

721

uuSpecificationsu

Information

■

Brake Fluid

■

Transmission Fluid

*1: 2WD models

*2: AWD models

■

Rear Differential Fluid

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Specified Honda HEVF-Type 1

Capacity Change

2.5 US qt (2.4 L)

3.0 US qt (2.8 L)

Specified Honda DPSF-II

Capacity Change 1.32 US qt (1.247 L)

■

Engine Oil

■

Engine Coolant

Recommended

·Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20

·API service SN or higher grade 0W-20

Capacity

Change 3.9 US qt (3.7 L)

Change including

filter

4.2 US qt (4.0 L)

Specified Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2

Ratio 50/50 with distilled water

Capacity

1.51 US gal (5.75 L)

(change including the remaining 0.19 US gal

(0.72 L) in the reserve tank)

■

Tire

For the tire size and pressure information, see the label on

driver’s doorjamb.

*1: Models with 18 inch wheel and no all-terrain tires

*2: Models with 18 inch wheel and all-terrain tires

*3: Models with 19 inch wheel

Regular

Size

235/60R18 103H

Pressure

psi (kPa [kgf/cm

])

Front 35 (240 [2.4])

Rear 32 (220 [2.2])

Size

235/60R18 107V

Pressure

psi (kPa [kgf/cm

])

Front 35 (240 [2.4])

Rear 33 (230 [2.3])

Size

235/55R19 101H

Pressure

psi (kPa [kgf/cm

])

Front 33 (230 [2.3])

Rear 33 (230 [2.3])

Wheel Size Regular

18 x 7 1/2J

*1, *2

19 x 7 1/2J

* Not available on all models

722

Information

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number,

Motor Number, and Transmission Number

Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your

vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.

The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, motor number, and

transmission number are shown as follows.

Vehicle Identification NumberEngine Number

Certification Label/

Vehicle Identification Number

Transmission Number

Motor Number

723

Continued

Information

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements and standards of the regulation listed below:

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this

device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Telematics Control Unit

ISED RF exposure

IC Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator & your body.

NOTE: THE MANUFACTURER IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY RADIO OR TV INTERFERENCE CAUSED BY UNAUTHORIZED

MODIFICATIONS TO THIS EQUIPMENT. SUCH MODIFICATIONS COULD VOID THE USER'S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Canadian models

724

uuDevices that Emit Radio Wavesu

Information

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)/Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

)

●

User manual statements:

User Manual statement according to §15.19:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. this device may not cause harmful interference and

2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

User Manual statement according to §15.105:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial

environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with

the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is

likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

RF Exposure Information according 2.1091 / 2.1093 / OET bulletin 65:

Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be

installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

725

uuDevices that Emit Radio Wavesu

Information

Wireless Charger

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Any changes or modifications (including the antennas) to this device that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the

user's authority to operate the equipment.

This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna

must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

726

Information

Reporting Safety Defects

In the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists

in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-888-275-

9171); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,

Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada

cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For

more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/

roadsafety.

727

Continued

Information

Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system.

Some states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions

components are working properly.

The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the 12-volt

battery has gone dead or been disconnected.

To check the state of the readiness codes, set the power mode to ON, without

turning the power system on. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for 15 to

20 seconds. If the malfunction indicator lamp then turns off, the readiness codes are

set. If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks five to ten times, the readiness codes are

not set.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested and the readiness codes are not set,

prepare the vehicle for testing by doing the following:

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.

2. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes, reaching 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) at

least once during this drive.

3. Park the vehicle and leave the power system off for six hours or more.

4. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).

5. Turn the power system on.

1Testing of Readiness Codes

If a testing facility determines that the readiness

codes are not set, you may be requested to return at

a later date to complete the test.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes

are still not set, see a dealer.

728

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

Information

6. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed

of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in

(D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without

moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you

cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for

at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).

7. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions

allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal

or the brake pedal.

8. Park the vehicle and leave the power system off for 40 minutes.

9. If this procedure is done immediately after losing 12-volt battery power, several

additional hours of driving may be required to set all codes.

729

Continued

Information

Warranty Coverages

■

U.S. Owners

Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the

emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and

workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance

Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.

Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for

exact information.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered

by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against

rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this

warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other

factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts

against defects in materials and workmanship.

730

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Information

Replacement 12-Volt Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage

for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as

long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda

warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on

warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.

Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

■

Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts

The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for

motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty

coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the

vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on

the vehicle. This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely

for commercial or industrial use.

Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for repairs

to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on the

vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another part of

the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty. The Federal Trade Commission requires

that a manufacturer demonstrate that an aftermarket or recycled part or service

performed by a person other than an authorized service provider caused damage to

another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty before denying

warranty coverage. Additionally, federal law allows a manufacturer to void a motor

vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage if the manufacturer provides the article or

service to consumers free of charge under the warranty or the manufacturer has

secured a waiver from the Federal Trade Commission.

731

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Information

■

Canadian Owners

Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

■

EPA Contact Information

An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report

violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:

Director,

Light-Duty Vehicle Center,

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,

Attention: Warranty Claim

2000 Traverwood Drive,

Ann Arbor, MI 48105;

[email protected]

732

Information

Authorized Manuals

■

Service Express

For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to

Service Express. Visit https://techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

■

For U.S. Owners

Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by

phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.

■

For Canadian Owners

Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.

733

Information

Customer Service Information

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals able to deal with any problems

you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that

they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Customer Service.

U.S. Owners

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Honda Automobile Customer Service

Mail Stop CHI-5

1919 Torrance Blvd.

Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009

Canadian Owners

Honda Canada Inc.

Customer Relations

180 Honda Boulevard

Markham, ON

L6C 0H9

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9

Fax: 1-877-939-0909

E-mail: [email protected]m

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin

Islands

Bella International

P.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546

In Guam

Triple J Autogroup

157 S. Marine Corps Drive

Tamuning, GU 96913

Tel: (671) 648-2277

In Saipan, Commonwealth of the

Northern Mariana Islands

Joeten Motor Company, Inc.

P.O. Box 500680

Saipan, MP 96950

Tel: (670) 234-5562

1Customer Service Information

When you call or write, please give us the following

information:

• Vehicle Identification Number

2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),

Engine Number, Motor Number, and

Transmission Number P. 722

• Date of purchase

• Odometer reading of your vehicle

• Your name, address, and telephone number

• A detailed description of the problem

• Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

734

Information

Open Source License

■

Meter open source license

The software embedded in this product includes open source software. Refer to the

following website for details regarding the open source software.

https://www.nippon-seiki.co.jp/global/business_ic_meter/

■

TCU open source license

To obtain the source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL, and other open source licenses

that have the obligations to disclose source code, that is contained in this product,

and to access all referred license terms, copyright notices and other relevant

documents please visit https://opensource.lge.com. LG Electronics will also provide

open source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of performing

such distribution (such as the cost of media, shipping, and handling) upon email

request to [email protected]. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this

information for a period of three years after our last shipment of this product.

735

uuOpen Source Licenseu

Information

■

Front sensor camera open source license

“The product includes code under public domain : https://www.jonolick.com/uploads/7/9/2/1/7921194/jo_jpeg.cpp

The code is based on https://github.com/jpeg-js/jpeg-js/blob/master/lib/encoder.js

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the

documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of Adobe Systems Incorporated nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived

from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE

OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Index

736

Index

Numbers

12-Volt Battery.......................................... 661

12-Volt Battery Charging System

Indicator .................................................. 699

AAC............................................................ 332

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 597

Accessories and Modifications................. 670

Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 258

Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System ............ 475

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Speed Follow................................... 115, 536

Additives

Coolant ................................................... 638

Engine Oil................................................ 635

Washer.................................................... 643

Adjusting

Armrest ................................................... 249

Clock....................................................... 182

Front Seats .............................................. 239

Head Restraints........................................ 247

Mirrors .................................................... 237

Rear Seats................................................ 243

Sound.............................................. 284, 322

Steering Wheel........................................ 236

Agile Handling Assist................................ 490

Air Conditioning System (Climate Control

System).................................................... 267

Changing the Mode ................................ 267

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows............................................... 269

Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 664

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 268

Sensor..................................................... 271

Synchronization Mode............................. 270

Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 267

Air Pressure....................................... 653, 721

Airbags........................................................ 61

Advanced Airbags ..................................... 67

Airbag Care............................................... 80

Event Data Recorder.................................... 0

Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 64

Indicator............................................ 77, 108

Knee Airbags............................................. 69

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 78

Sensors ..................................................... 61

Side Airbags .............................................. 72

Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 75

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) ............................ 491

AM/FM Radio.................................... 286, 326

Android Auto

................................ 300, 352

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 597

Indicator.................................................. 107

Apple CarPlay ................................... 296, 347

Armrest ..................................................... 249

AT&T Hotspot ........................................... 345

Audio Remote Controls ........................... 277

Audio System ........................... 274, 280, 304

Adjusting the Sound ....................... 284, 322

Alexa Built-In .......................................... 325

AM/FM Radio.................................. 286, 326

Android Auto

............................... 300, 352

Apple CarPlay ................................. 296, 347

Audio/Information Screen ....................... 308

Bluetooth® Audio ........................... 293, 334

Display Setup .................................. 285, 323

Error Messages ....................................... 367

General Information................................ 369

Google built-in........................................ 357

Home Screen .......................................... 315

How to Update Wirelessly ....................... 320

iPod ................................................ 289, 330

Limitations for Manual Operation............ 419

MP3/WMA/AAC/FLAC/WAV ........... 291, 332

Reactivating ............................................ 276

Recommended Devices ........................... 369

Remote Controls..................................... 277

Security Code ......................................... 276

Selecting an Audio Source ...................... 324

Status Bar ............................................... 319

System Updates ...................................... 320

Theft Protection ...................................... 276

USB Flash Drives.............................. 332, 369

USB Ports................................................ 275

Wallpaper Setup ..................................... 313

Audio/Information Screen ....................... 308

Authorized Manuals ................................ 732

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 200

737

Index

Auto High-Beam ...................................... 227

Indicator ................................................. 110

Automatic Brake Hold ............................. 594

Indicator ......................................... 105, 594

Automatic Brake Hold System

Indicator ......................................... 105, 594

Automatic Intermittent Wipers .............. 231

Average Fuel Economy .................... 130, 159

Average Speed ................................. 132, 161

AWD (All-Wheel Drive)............................ 491

AWD Torque Distribution

Monitor........................................... 136, 165

Battery ................................................ 14, 661

12-Volt Battery Charging System

Indicator ............................................... 105

High Voltage..................................... 14, 505

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead .................. 693

Maintenance

(checking the 12-Volt battery) ............... 661

Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 663

Belts (Seat).................................................. 51

Beverage Holders..................................... 254

Blind Spot Information System ............... 501

Bluetooth® Audio............................. 293, 334

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ........... 417, 430

Booster Seats (For Children)...................... 94

Brake System............................................. 589

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................... 597

Automatic Brake Hold ............................. 594

Brake Assist System ................................. 598

Fluid ........................................................ 642

Foot Brake............................................... 593

Indicator (Amber) ............................ 104, 702

Indicator (Red) ................. 102, 103, 701, 702

Parking Brake .......................................... 589

Brightness ................................................. 168

Built-in Key ............................................... 184

Bulb Replacement .................................... 644

Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light,

and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs ............ 645

Front Side Marker Lights .......................... 644

Front Turn Signal, Parking/Daytime Running

Lights .................................................... 644

Headlights ............................................... 644

High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 647

Rear License Plate Light ........................... 647

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator

Lights .................................................... 644

Taillights and Back-Up Lights ................... 647

Bulb Specifications ................................... 720

Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 95

Carrying Cargo ................................. 449, 451

Certification Label.................................... 722

Changing Bulbs ........................................ 644

CHARGE/DECEL Gauge............................. 122

Charging System Indicator............... 105, 699

Child Safety................................................. 82

Childproof Door Locks............................. 199

Child Seat.................................................... 82

Booster Seats ............................................ 94

Child Seat for Infants................................. 84

Child Seat for Small Children..................... 85

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat

Belt ......................................................... 89

Larger Children ......................................... 93

Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 84

Selecting a Child Seat................................ 86

Childproof Door Locks ............................. 199

Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 667

Cleaning the Interior................................ 665

Climate Control System............................ 267

Changing the Mode ................................ 267

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows............................................... 269

Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 664

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 268

Sensors ................................................... 271

Synchronization Mode............................. 270

Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 267

738

Index

CMBS

(Collision Mitigation Braking

System

) ................................................. 509

Coat Hook ................................................. 256

Collision Mitigation Braking System

(CMBS

).................................................. 509

Console Compartment ............................. 253

Controls ..................................................... 181

Coolant (Engine)....................................... 638

Adding to the Radiator ............................ 639

Adding to the Reserve Tank ..................... 638

Overheating............................................. 696

Creeping.................................................... 469

Cross Traffic Monitor................................ 606

Cup Holders............................................... 254

Customer Service Information ................. 733

Customize Display............................. 140, 152

Customized Features ........ 141, 171, 389, 396

Daytime Running Lights........................... 226

Dead 12-Volt Battery................................ 693

Deceleration Paddle Selector................... 472

Defaulting All the Settings .............. 395, 416

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows.................................................. 269

Detachable Anchor..................................... 58

Devices that Emit Radio Waves................ 723

Dimming

Headlights ............................................... 222

Rearview Mirror ....................................... 237

Dipstick (Engine Oil)................................. 634

Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ............. 221

Display Setup............................................ 285

Door Mirrors ............................................. 238

Doors......................................................... 184

Auto Door Locking .................................. 200

Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 200

Keys ........................................................ 184

Locking/Unlocking the Doors

from the Inside ...................................... 197

Locking/Unlocking the Doors

from the Outside ................................... 187

DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 655

Drive Mode Switch ........................... 476, 480

Driver Attention Monitor ................ 133, 162

Driver Information Interface ... 125, 151, 154

Switching the Display ...................... 125, 154

Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support.................. 240

Driving ...................................................... 447

Braking ................................................... 589

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines............... 459

Shifting Position ...................................... 470

Transmission ........................................... 469

Turn on the Power .................................. 461

Driving Position Memory System ............ 234

Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 664

Eco Assist® System...................................... 20

ECON Mode Indicator.............................. 113

Elapsed Time .................................... 132, 161

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator ......................................... 108, 703

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............ 488

Emergency................................................ 711

Emergency Power System Off ................. 692

Emergency Power System On.................. 691

Emergency Tailgate Opener.................... 713

Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ...... 727

Engine

Coolant .................................................. 638

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead .................. 693

Number .................................................. 722

Oil .......................................................... 633

Starting................................................... 461

Engine Coolant ........................................ 638

Adding to the Radiator ........................... 639

Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 638

Overheating............................................ 696

Engine Oil................................................. 633

Adding ................................................... 635

Checking ................................................ 634

Displaying Oil Life ................................... 622

Low Oil Pressure Indicator ....................... 698

Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 633

Viscosity.......................................... 633, 721

EPS (Electric Power Steering) System...... 703

EV Indicator.............................................. 106

739

Index

Exhaust Gas Hazard

(Carbon Monoxide).................................. 95

Exterior Care (Cleaning) .......................... 667

Exterior Mirrors........................................ 238

Features .................................................... 273

Filters

Dust and Pollen....................................... 664

Oil .......................................................... 636

FLAC.................................................. 291, 332

Flat Tire..................................................... 675

Floor Mats ................................................ 666

Fluids

Brake ...................................................... 642

Engine Coolant ....................................... 638

Transmission ........................................... 641

Windshield Washer ................................. 643

FM/AM Radio ................................... 286, 326

Folding Down the Rear Seats.................. 244

Foot Brake ................................................ 593

Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 64

Front Seat Heaters ................................... 264

Front Seats................................................ 239

Adjusting ................................................ 239

Front Sensor Camera ............................... 585

Fuel ..................................................... 36, 612

Average Fuel Economy.................... 130, 159

Economy................................................. 615

Gauge .................................................... 121

Instant Fuel Economy....................... 130, 159

Low Fuel Indicator (Amber) ...................... 107

Range.............................................. 130, 159

Recommendation .................................... 612

Refueling................................................. 612

Fuel Economy............................................ 615

Fuel Fill Door....................................... 36, 613

Fuses .......................................................... 705

Inspecting and Changing......................... 709

Locations......................................... 705, 707

Gasoline (Fuel)

Average Fuel Economy .................... 130, 159

Economy ................................................. 615

Instant Fuel Economy....................... 130, 159

Low Fuel Indicator (Amber) ...................... 107

Range.............................................. 129, 158

Recommendation .................................... 612

Refueling................................................. 612

Gauge Display Settings ............................ 169

Gauges ...................................................... 120

Glass (care) ........................................ 665, 668

Glove Box .................................................. 252

Google built-in ......................................... 357

Handling of the Jack................................ 688

Handling the Unexpected........................ 673

HandsFreeLink® (HFL)....................... 417, 430

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and

Call History.................................... 424, 439

Automatic Transferring............................ 438

Favorite Contacts ............................ 425, 440

HFL Buttons..................................... 417, 430

HFL Menus ...................................... 420, 433

HFL Status Display ........................... 419, 432

Limitations for Manual Operation .... 419, 432

Making a Call.................................. 426, 442

Options During a Call ...................... 429, 446

Phone Setup.................................... 422, 435

Receiving a Call............................... 428, 445

Ringtone ................................................. 438

Hazard Warning Button .............................. 8

HD Radio

............................................... 329

Head Restraints ........................................ 247

Headlights................................................. 222

Aiming.................................................... 644

Auto High-Beam ..................................... 227

Dimming ................................................. 222

Operating................................................ 222

Heated Steering Wheel............................ 263

Heaters (Front Seat) ................................. 264

Heaters (Rear Seat)................................... 265

Heating and Cooling System

Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 664

HFL (HandsFreeLink®)....................... 417, 430

740

Index

High Beam Indicator................................. 110

High Voltage Battery................................ 505

Hill Descent Control System ..................... 486

Hill Descent Control System Indicator ..... 114

Hill Start Assist System.............................. 466

Honda App License Agreement............... 370

Honda Sensing® ................................ 37, 506

HondaLink® ............................................. 337

Hybrid Vehicle

SPORT HYBRID i-MMD

(intelligent Multi-Mode Drive) .................. 13

Identification Numbers ............................ 722

Engine, Motor and Transmission .............. 722

Vehicle Identification ............................... 722

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead .................. 693

Immobilizer System .................................. 212

Indicator.................................................. 111

Indicators................................................... 100

12-Volt Battery Charging System ..... 105, 699

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Speed Follow (Amber)............................ 115

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Speed Follow (White/Green)........... 115, 537

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow Interval ....................................... 115

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 107

Auto High-Beam...................................... 110

Automatic Brake Hold...................... 105, 594

Automatic Brake Hold System ......... 105, 594

Cruise Mode (White/Green)..................... 115

Deceleration Paddle Selector ................... 106

ECON Mode............................ 113, 479, 483

Electric Power Steering (EPS)

System .......................................... 108, 703

EV ........................................................... 106

High Beam .............................................. 110

Hill Descent Control System

(White/Green)................................ 114, 487

Immobilizer System ................................. 111

INDIVIDUAL Mode........................... 113, 482

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

(Amber)................................................. 116

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

(White/Green)........................................ 116

Lights On ................................................ 110

Low Fuel (Amber) .................................... 107

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS... 109, 492, 499, 704

Malfunction Indicator Lamp............. 105, 700

NORMAL Mode....................... 113, 478, 483

Parking Brake and Brake System

(Amber)......................................... 104, 702

Parking Brake and Brake System

(Red) ............................. 102, 103, 701, 702

POWER SYSTEM...................................... 106

READY .................................................... 106

Safety Support (Amber) ........................... 117

Safety Support (Green/Gray).................... 119

Seat Belt Reminder ............................ 53, 107

Security System Alarm ............................. 112

Shift Position................................... 106, 471

SNOW Mode .......................... 114, 479, 484

SPORT Mode........................... 113, 478, 482

Supplemental Restraint System ......... 77, 108

System Message ..................................... 114

Transmission System ............................... 106

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning............. 110

Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®)

OFF ............................................... 109, 489

Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®)

System .......................................... 108, 488

INDIVIDUAL Mode Indicator ................... 113

Information .............................................. 719

Instant Fuel Economy ...................... 130, 159

Instrument Panel........................................ 99

Interior Lights........................................... 250

Interior Rearview Mirror ......................... 237

iPod................................................... 289, 330

Jump Starting........................................... 693

741

Index

Key Number Tag ...................................... 185

Keyless Access System .............................. 187

Keys........................................................... 184

Master Keys ............................................ 184

Number Tag............................................ 185

Rear Door Won’t Open ........................... 199

Remote Transmitter ................................ 193

Types and Functions................................ 184

Kickdown.................................................. 469

Knee Airbags.............................................. 69

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ........ 558

LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 87

Lights ................................................ 222, 644

Auto High-Beam ..................................... 227

Bulb Replacement ................................... 644

Daytime Running Lights .......................... 226

High Beam Indicator ............................... 110

Interior.................................................... 250

Light Switches......................................... 222

Lights On Indicator.................................. 110

Parking Lights ......................................... 222

Turn Signals ............................................ 221

Load Limits ............................................... 451

Locking/Unlocking ................................... 184

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 200

Childproof Door Locks ............................ 199

From Inside ............................................. 197

From Outside........................................... 187

Keys ........................................................ 184

Using a Key ............................................. 194

Low 12-Volt Battery Charge .................... 699

Low Battery Charge.................................. 699

Low Fuel Indicator (Amber) ..................... 107

Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength ...... 186

Low Oil Pressure Indicator ....................... 698

Low Speed Braking Control ..................... 522

Lower Anchors............................................ 87

Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 451

Lumbar Support........................................ 240

Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch ....... 240

Maintenance............................................. 617

12-Volt Battery ........................................ 661

Brake Fluid .............................................. 642

Cleaning.................................................. 665

Coolant ................................................... 638

Maintenance Minder

............................ 621

Oil ........................................................... 634

Precautions.............................................. 618

Radiator .................................................. 639

Remote Transmitter ................................. 663

Replacing Light Bulbs............................... 644

Safety...................................................... 619

Service Items ........................................... 626

Tires ........................................................ 652

Transmission Fluid ................................... 641

Under the Hood ...................................... 631

Malfunction Indicator Lamp............ 105, 700

Map Lights ................................................ 251

Maximum Load Limit ............................... 451

Meters, Gauges......................................... 120

Mirrors ...................................................... 237

Adjusting ................................................ 237

Door ....................................................... 238

Exterior ................................................... 238

Interior Rearview ..................................... 237

Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 670

Moonroof ................................................. 218

MP3 ................................................... 291, 332

Multi-View Rear Camera.......................... 610

Navigation ................................................ 161

No Content ............................................... 138

NORMAL Mode Indicator ........................ 113

Numbers (Identification).......................... 722

742

Index

Odometer.................................................. 121

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines.............. 459

Oil (Engine) ............................................... 633

Adding .................................................... 635

Checking................................................. 634

Displaying Oil Life .................................... 622

Low Oil Pressure Indicator........................ 698

Recommended Engine Oil........................ 633

Viscosity .......................................... 633, 721

Open Source Licenses ....................... 384, 734

Opening/Closing

Hood....................................................... 632

Moonroof................................................ 218

Power Windows ...................................... 215

Tailgate ................................................... 201

Outside Temperature Display .................. 122

Overheating.............................................. 696

Paddle Selectors........................................ 472

Panic Mode ............................................... 214

Parking ...................................................... 599

Parking Brake............................................ 589

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator

(Amber) ........................................... 104, 702

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator

(Red) ................................ 102, 103, 701, 702

Parking Lights ........................................... 222

Parking Sensor System.............................. 601

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 78

Passing Indicators ..................................... 222

Petrol

Gauge..................................................... 121

Playing Bluetooth® Audio................ 293, 334

POWER Button ......................................... 219

Power Flow Monitor ................................ 156

Power Flow/Engine Status Display/High

Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge.... 127

POWER Gauge .......................................... 122

Power System

Won’t Start ............................................. 689

POWER SYSTEM Indicator........................ 106

Power System Won’t Start ....................... 689

Power Tailgate ......................................... 204

Power Windows ....................................... 215

Precautions While Driving

Rain ........................................................ 468

Pregnant Women ....................................... 59

Puncture (Tire).......................................... 675

Radiator .................................................... 639

Radio (AM/FM) ................................. 286, 326

Radio Data System (RDS) ................. 288, 328

Range................................................ 130, 159

RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 288, 328

Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing)....... 727

READY Indicator....................................... 106

Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control

System

.................................................. 491

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror

Button..................................................... 233

Rear Seat Heaters..................................... 265

Rear Seats (Folding Down) ...................... 244

Rearview Mirror ....................................... 237

Refueling .................................................. 612

Fuel Gauge ............................................. 121

Gasoline ......................................... 612, 720

Low Fuel Indicator (Amber) ..................... 107

Regulations .............................. 499, 655, 723

Remote Transmitter................................. 193

Replacement

Battery.................................................... 663

Bulbs ...................................................... 644

Fuses .............................................. 705, 707

Rear Wiper Blade Rubber ........................ 650

Tires........................................................ 658

Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 648

Reporting Safety Defects......................... 726

Resetting a Trip Meter..................... 130, 159

Road Departure Mitigation..................... 528

On and Off ............................................. 531

Safe Driving................................................ 45

Safety Check............................................... 50

Safety Labels .............................................. 96

Safety Message ............................................ 4

743

Index

Safety Support ................................. 137, 166

Seat Belts .................................................... 51

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor ................. 57

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 55

Checking .................................................. 60

Detachable Anchor ................................... 58

Fastening .................................................. 56

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat

Belt ......................................................... 89

Pregnant Women...................................... 59

Reminder .................................................. 53

Warning Indicator ............................. 53, 107

Seat Heaters ..................................... 264, 265

Seats.......................................................... 239

Adjusting ................................................ 239

Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support.................. 240

Front Seat Heaters .................................. 264

Front Seats.............................................. 239

Rear Seat Heaters.................................... 265

Rear Seats............................................... 243

Security System ........................................ 212

Immobilizer System Indicator................... 111

Security System Alarm Indicator .............. 112

Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 86

Setting the Clock...................................... 182

Settings............................................. 141, 171

Shift Lever ................................................ 470

Operation ............................................... 471

Releasing ................................................ 695

Won’t Move ........................................... 695

Shift Position Indicator .................... 106, 471

Shifting (Transmission)............................. 470

Shoulder Anchor......................................... 57

Side Airbags ................................................ 72

Side Curtain Airbags................................... 75

SNOW Mode ............................. 114, 479, 484

Snow Tires................................................. 660

Spark Plugs................................................ 720

Specifications ............................................ 720

Specified Fuel.................................... 612, 720

Speedometer ............................................ 120

SPORT HYBRID i-MMD

(intelligent Multi-Mode Drive) ................ 13

SPORT Mode ............................. 113, 478, 482

SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 64

Steering Wheel ......................................... 236

Adjusting................................................. 236

Stopping.................................................... 599

Summer Tires ............................................ 660

Sunglasses Holder..................................... 257

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 64

Switches

(Around the Steering Wheel) ........ 8, 9, 219

System Message Indicator........................ 114

System Updates ........................................ 320

Tailgate..................................................... 201

Unable to Open....................................... 713

Temperature

Outside Temperature Display................... 122

Temperature Sensor......................... 122, 271

Temporary Repair Kit (TRK)..................... 675

Time (Setting)........................................... 182

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) ..................................................... 492

Indicator.................................................. 109

Tires........................................................... 652

Air Pressure..................................... 653, 721

Checking and Maintaining ...................... 652

Inspection ............................................... 652

Labeling .................................................. 653

Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 675

Regulations ............................................. 655

Rotation .................................................. 659

Summer .................................................. 660

Temporary Repair Kit (TRK)...................... 675

Tire Chains .............................................. 660

Wear Indicators....................................... 657

Winter..................................................... 660

Tools.......................................................... 674

Towing a Trailer ....................................... 453

Equipment and Accessories ..................... 454

Load Limits.............................................. 453

Towing Your Vehicle................................ 458

Behind a Motorhome .............................. 458

Emergency .............................................. 711

744

Index

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring

System) .................................................... 492

Indicator.................................................. 109

Traffic Jam Assist ...................................... 569

Traffic Sign Recognition System ...... 123, 578

Transmission.............................................. 470

Creeping ................................................. 469

Fluid ........................................................ 641

Kickdown ................................................ 469

Number................................................... 722

Operation .......................................... 33, 471

Shift Lever Does Not Move....................... 695

Shift Position Indicator ..................... 106, 471

Shifting.................................................... 470

Trip Meter ......................................... 130, 159

TRK (Temporary Repair Kit) ..................... 675

Troubleshooting ....................................... 673

Blown Fuse...................................... 705, 707

Brake Pedal Vibrates .................................. 41

Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door .......... 42

Emergency Towing .................................. 711

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead ................... 693

Noise When Braking .................................. 43

Overheating............................................. 696

Power System Won’t Start ....................... 689

Puncture/Flat Tire..................................... 675

Rear Door Won’t Open ...................... 41, 199

Shift Lever Won’t Move ........................... 695

Warning Indicators .................................. 100

Turn Signals............................................... 221

Indicators (Instrument Panel).................... 110

Turning on the Power

Does Not Activate ................................... 689

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead................... 693

Unlocking the Doors ................................ 187

Unlocking the Front Doors

from the Inside ................................. 26, 197

USB Flash Drives ............... 274, 291, 332, 369

USB Ports................................................... 275

Using the Keyless Access System ............. 187

Vanity Mirrors............................................. 11

Vehicle Identification Number ................ 722

Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®) .............. 488

OFF Indicator........................................... 109

On and Off.............................. 139, 168, 489

System Indicator...................................... 108

Viscosity (Oil) .................................... 633, 721

VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist

) .............. 488

Wallpaper ................................................. 313

Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 698

Warning Labels........................................... 96

Warnings........................................... 140, 170

Warranties (Warranty Manual provided

separately) .............................................. 729

Watts ........................................................ 720

WAV.................................................. 291, 332

Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 657

Wi-Fi Connection ..................................... 343

Window Washers ..................................... 230

Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 643

Switch .................................................... 230

Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 215

Windshield ............................................... 230

Cleaning ......................................... 665, 668

Defrosting/Defogging ............................. 269

Washer Fluid........................................... 643

Wiper Blades........................................... 648

Wipers and Washers ............................... 230

Winter Tires.............................................. 660

Snow Tires .............................................. 660

Tire Chains.............................................. 660

Wipers and Washers ................................ 230

Automatic Intermittent Wipers ................ 231

Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades..... 648

Front....................................................... 230

Rear........................................................ 232

Wireless Charger ...................................... 259

WMA................................................. 291, 332

Worn Tires ................................................ 652

Printed in the U.S.A.

MYGARAGE.HONDA.COM (U.S.A.)

HONDA.CA (CANADA)

313D4630

OM-26249

00X31-3D4-6300

2026 Honda CR-V Hybrid Owner’s Manual

Honda CR-V 2026

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Honda CR-V 2026 Questions and Answers